The term “comparability analysis” is used to designate two distinct but related analytical processes:
The incremental profit, if any, derived from the exploitation of LSAs is known as “location rent”. Thus, the term “location savings” represents “cost savings” whereas “location rent” represents the incremental profits derived from LSAs. The value of “location rent” is at most equal to, or less than, the value of LSAs.
Figure 3.D.4
Determining Location Rent
| GAMBAR |
The concept of comparability analysis is used in the selection of the most appropriate transfer pricing method, as well as in applying the selected method to arrive at an arm’s length price or financial indicator (or range of prices or financial indicators). It plays a central role in the overall application of the arm’s length principle.
A practical difficulty in applying the arm’s length principle is that associated enterprises may engage in transactions that independent enterprises would not undertake. Where independent enterprises do not undertake transactions of the type entered into by associated enterprises, the arm’s length principle is difficult to apply because there is little or no direct evidence of what conditions would have been established by independent enterprises. However, the mere fact that a comparable transaction may not be found between independent parties does not of itself mean that the controlled transaction being analyzed is not at arm’s length.
It should be kept in mind that the relative lack of comparables for a taxpayer’s controlled transaction does not imply that the arm’s length principle is inapplicable to that transaction. Nor does it imply anything about whether that transaction is or is not, in fact, at arm’s length. In a number of instances, it will be possible to use “imperfect” comparables, e.g. comparables from another country with similar economic conditions or comparables from another industry sector. Such comparables may need to be adjusted to eliminate or reduce the differences between that transaction and the controlled transaction as discussed in 3.1.6 below, provided such adjust-ments can be done reliably.
In other instances, where no comparables are found for a controlled transaction between associated enterprises, it may become necessary to use approaches not depending directly on comparables to find an arm’s length price (see 2.5.3.2). It may also be necessary to examine the economic substance of the controlled transaction to determine whether its conditions are such that it might be expected to have been agreed between independent parties in similar circumstances— in the absence of evidence of what independent parties have actually done in similar circumstances.
A controlled and an uncontrolled transaction are regarded as comparable if the economically relevant characteristics of the two transactions and the circumstances surrounding them are sufficiently similar to provide a reliable measure of an arm’s length result. It is recognized that in reality two transactions are seldom completely alike and in this imperfect world, perfect comparables are often not available. It is therefore necessary to use a practical approach to establish the degree of comparability between controlled and uncontrolled transactions. The two transactions do not necessarily have to be identical to be comparable. Instead, none of the differences between them could materially affect the arm’s length price or profit; where such material differences exist, reasonably accurate adjustments are possible to eliminate their effect. Thus, in determining a reasonable degree of comparability, adjustments may need to be made to account for certain material differences between the controlled and uncontrolled transactions. These adjustments (which are referred to as “comparability adjustments”) are to be made only if the effect of the material differences on price or profits can be ascertained with sufficient accuracy to improve the reliability of the results.
Practical guidance is needed for cases without sufficient comparables. There are two distinct problems relating to comparables for developing countries’ tax authorities. The first is lack of access to existing sources of data, such as existing non-local company databases. The second is the lack of reliable local country comparables. Each of these causes problems for local tax administrations (e.g. the lack of data impedes the reliable and efficient determination of appropriate arm’s length results) and also causes problems associated with double taxation and dispute avoidance (e.g. the lack of adequate data impedes a country’s ability to reach agreement with taxpayers and with other tax authorities in mutual agreement negotiations).
The first step in undertaking a transfer pricing analysis always involves the accurate delineation of the transaction; this includes an awareness of the industry and market context in which the transaction takes place. From this, the most appropriate transfer pricing method can be selected (bearing in mind the likely existence of necessary data) and where appropriate, a tested party will be chosen. This process should determine the kind of comparables to be sought. Where comparables operating in the same jurisdiction as the tested party are available there is no need to consider whether geographic differences might have a material impact on the prices or profits under review. However, in the absence of such information, foreign comparables should not automatically be rejected as all transfer pricing cases require a solution. A pragmatic approach, making use of the best available comparables, will often be required. Adjustments may need to be considered and made where they improve the reliability of the comparison.
The extent to which LSAs will lead to location rents depends on competitive factors relating to the end product and to the general access to LSAs. It is possible that in a particular case, even though LSAs exist, there are no location rents. For example, in situations in which the market for the end product is highly competitive and potential competitors also have access to the LSAs, much or all of the benefits of LSAs would be passed on to the customers through lower prices of products, resulting in little or no location rent. However, circumstances where extra profits are passed on to customers are varied, and may be permanent or temporary. Where this is temporary, at the end of this period of competition, the MNE may possibly achieve a larger market share in the local market with an increased ability to sell products at a higher price. Alternatively, if an MNE has exclusive access to the LSAs, then the MNE may derive significant location rents associated with the LSAs, as the LSAs reflect a competitive advantage. These location rents may dissipate over time due to competitive pressure, depending on the facts and circumstances of each case.
This chapter discusses a possible procedure to identify, screen, select and adjust comparables in a manner that enables the taxpayer or tax administration to make an informed choice of the most appropriate transfer pricing method and apply that method correctly to arrive at the appropriate arm’s length price or profit (or range of prices or profits).
A typical approach that can be followed while performing a comparability analysis is outlined below. The steps listed below are by no means exhaustive but rather suggest an outline based upon which a comparability analysis could be carried out. It should be noted that the process is not necessarily linear, for example, a number of the steps may need to be carried out repeatedly until a satisfactory result is achieved.
A summary of the comparability analysis in operation steps are set out below. The subsequent sections of this chapter deal with each of these steps in more detail.
The first step is understanding the economically significant characteristics of the industry, taxpayer’s business and controlled transactions; see below. This involves:
Deciding whether transactions should be evaluated separately or on a combined / aggregated basis.
The next step is an examination of comparability factors of the controlled transaction, see 3.4:
As with the determination of whether location rents exist, the arm’s length attribution of location rents depends on competitive factors relating to access to the LSAs, and on the realistic alternatives available to the associated enterprises given their respective bargaining power. To the extent that competitors would not have access to the LSAs, the relevant question is why this is so. There are a number of possibilities. For example, the MNE could have production intangibles that allow it to manufacture at a lower cost than competitors. At arm’s length, the owner of the intangible would typically be entitled to the rents associated with this cost saving, as it would have a realistic alternative to undertake its production elsewhere at similarly low costs. As another example, it might be that the low-cost producer is the first to operate in the low-cost jurisdiction and there are no comparable low-cost producers in its jurisdiction or other jurisdictions, implying that, for a time at least, it is well-placed to extract a part of the location rents.
The remaining steps in a comparability analysis (see 3.5) are:
An essential first step to enabling effective transfer pricing analysis is the collection of information about the taxpayer to understand its business operations and activities. This factfinding process should include identification of associated enterprises involved in the controlled transaction, and gathering information about relevant cross-border controlled transactions in the context of the commercial and financial relations between the relevant members of the MNE (including the functions performed, assets used or contributed (including intangibles, see Chapter 6) and risks assumed, by each party, the nature of products/services transferred, the terms and condi-tions of the transaction, the economic circumstances etc.).
An analysis should be performed of the circumstances specific to each taxpayer and industry. This includes, but is not limited to, an analysis of the industry, competition, economy, regulatory factors and other elements that may significantly affect the taxpayer and its environment.
Information about the taxpayer from its annual report, product brochures, news articles, research reports prepared by independent agencies, management letters and internal reports could act as a good starting point for understanding the taxpayer’s circumstances. A study of these documents will provide an idea of the industry to which the enterprise belongs, the nature of its business activities (i.e. manufacturer, wholesaler, distributor etc.), its market segment, market share, market penetration strategies utilized, type of products/services dealt in, etc.
The next question would be the appropriate split consistent with the arm’s length principle. As discussed above, the bargaining power of the associated enterprises which reflects the arm’s length nature of two independent parties negotiating over their respective shares of savings/rents may be well suited as the key metric for this. This can be used to determine the arm’s length surplus (savings/rents) allocations when comparable uncontrolled transactions or benchmarks are not available.
The arm’s length price for a transaction between two or more controlled entities must be established in relation to transactions actually undertaken. Thus, the critical first step in any comparability analysis is to accurately define those transactions by analyzing their economically relevant characteristics, as reflected not only in the contracts between the parties, but also their conduct and any other relevant facts. In this regard, the contractual terms will generally be the starting point for the analysis (as clarified or supplemented by the parties’ conduct); and to the extent that the conduct or other facts are inconsistent with the written contract, the parties’ conduct (rather than the terms of the written contract) should be taken as the best evidence of the transaction(s) actually undertaken.
Tax authorities should not substitute other transactions in the place of those that have actually been undertaken. They should also not disregard actually undertaken transactions other than in exceptional circumstances. Such circumstances may exist, for example, where the arrangements viewed in their totality are not commercially rational, thereby preventing the determination of an arm’s length price for each party to the transaction (taking into account their own perspectives and the options realistically available to each of them). This test is substantive and looks at the nature of the arrangements entered into; a lack of independent transactions does not, of itself, indicate that the controlled transaction lacks commercial rationality.
The test for commercial rationality must be considered from each entity’s own perspective, as an arrangement that is commercially rational at group level is not necessarily arm’s length from the perspective of each party.
In addition, an arrangement that is expected to leave the MNE worse off as a whole on a pre-tax basis than it would be if it had not entered into the arrangement will raise questions. The question is whether it is primarily tax driven and it may need further examination as to whether it is commercially irrational thereby preventing the determination of an arm’s length price for each party to the transaction.
Government rules and regulations should be treated as conditions of the market in the particular country if they apply in the same way to controlled and uncontrolled transactions. Such rules would include government interventions in the form of price controls, interest rate controls, exchange controls, subsidies for certain sectors, anti-dumping duties etc., and should be taken into account in arriving at an appropriate transfer price in that market. The question becomes whether, in light of these conditions, the transactions between associated enterprises are consistent with comparable uncontrolled transactions between independent enterprises.
Where a transaction that was actually undertaken is not commercially rational, any alternative transactions that are substituted for transfer pricing purposes should correspond as closely as possible to the actual facts of the case while achieving a commercially rational expected result: i.e. one which would have enabled the parties to come to a price acceptable to both at the time the arrangement was entered into.
In general, non-recognition or substitution of transactions should not be undertaken lightly as this would create significant uncertainty for taxpayers and tax administrations. Non-recognition or recharacterization of transactions may also lead to double taxation due to the divergent views taken by countries on how any substitute transactions are structured. The ability of tax authorities to disregard or substitute transactions will depend on their powers under applicable domestic law and should be considered in developing domestic transfer pricing legislation and administrative rules. See further Chapters 6 and 10.
An important aspect of transfer pricing analysis is whether this analysis has to be carried out with respect to a taxpayer’s individual international controlled transactions or whether a group of international controlled transactions that have a close economic nexus and are carried out between the same parties can be analyzed together for transfer pricing purposes.
The transfer pricing analysis should ideally be made on a transaction-by-transaction basis. However, there are cases where separate transactions are so closely linked that such an approach would not lead to a reliable result. Where transactions are so closely interrelated or continuous that application of the arm’s length principle on a transaction-by-transaction basis would become unreliable or cumbersome, transactions are often aggregated for the purpose of the analysis.
An example of where government rules affect the market is that of certain pharmaceutical formulations, which may be subject to price regulation in a particular country. Another example is Export Oriented Units which may be subject to beneficial provisions under the taxation laws of a country; ideally, companies that enjoy similar privileges should be used as comparables, and if that is not possible, comparability adjustments may need to be made as part of the comparability analysis. Another example is where foreign exchange regulations limit the amounts of the payments that can be made for services or intangibles. However, such regulatory limits may not set arm’s length prices for services or intangibles. For example, assuming that all the transactions are denominated in the same currency, certain countries have restrictions on the payment of interest on external commercial borrowings and the exchange control regulatory requirements authorize the borrower to pay interest at LIBOR plus say 200 basis points. The country of the lender may, however, not agree to use this as a basis for benchmarking the transaction when the lending enterprise itself borrows in its domestic market at a higher rate.
The transfer pricing analysis should ideally be made on a transaction-by-transaction basis. However, there are cases where separate transactions are so closely linked that such an approach would not lead to a reliable result. Where transactions are so closely interrelated or continuous that application of the arm’s length principle on a transaction-by-transaction basis would become unreliable or cumbersome, transactions are often aggregated for the purpose of the analysis.
Another important aspect of combined transactions involves the use of composite contracts and “package deals” among the members of an MNE group. A composite contract and/or package deal may contain a number of elements including leases, sales and licenses all packaged into one deal. Generally, it will be appropriate to consider the deal in its totality to under-stand how the various elements relate to each other, but the components of the composite contract and/or package deal may or may not, depending on the facts and circumstances of the case, need to be evaluated separately to arrive at the appropriate transfer price. In certain cases, it may be more reliable to allocate the aggregate compensation among the elements of the composite contract or package deal.
“Aggregation” issues also arise when looking at potential comparables. Since third-party information is not often available at the transaction level, entity level information is frequently used in practice when looking at external comparables (e.g. in the absence of reliable internal comparables; “external comparable” and “internal comparable” are defined in section 3.5.2 below). It must be noted that any application of the arm’s length principle, whether on a transaction-by-transaction basis or on an aggregation basis, needs to be evaluated case by case, applying the most appropriate transfer pricing method to the facts in that particular case.
The first part of a comparability analysis for transfer pricing purposes involves understanding and defining the controlled transaction to be tested. In addition to the contextual information on the industry and the overall business of the taxpayer, this analysis is typically structured around five so-called comparability factors.
The market level of the company is another key factor. For example, the price at the wholesale and retail levels would generally differ so that a retail price should not be compared to a wholesale price. Other market conditions which may influence the transfer price may include: costs of production (including costs of land, labour and capital); availability of substitutes (both goods and services); level of demand/supply: transport costs; the size of the market, and the extent of competition.
The factors are:
Property, whether tangible or intangible, as well as services, may have differing characteristics which may lead to value and price differences in their values in the open market. Therefore, these differences must be accounted for and considered in any comparability analysis of controlled and uncontrolled transactions.
Characteristics that may be important to consider are:
For example, comparability analysis should take into account the differences between trademarks and trade names that aid in commercial exploitation (marketing intangibles) as opposed to patents and know-how (trade intangibles).
The conduct of the contracting parties is generally a result of the terms of the contract between them. The contractual relationship thus requires careful analysis when computing the transfer price. While there may be a written contract, the terms of the transactions may also be found in correspondence and communications between the parties involved. In cases where the terms of the arrangement between the two parties are not explicitly defined in written contracts, the contractual terms have to be deduced from the parties’ economic relationship and their conduct.
An important point to note is that associated enterprises may not hold each other fully to the terms of the contract since they have common overarching interests. This contrasts with independent enterprises, which are expected to hold each other to the terms of the contract. Thus, it is important to determine whether the contractual terms between the associated enterprises are a “sham” (something that appears genuine, but when looked at more closely lacks reality, and is not valid under many legal systems) and/or have not been followed in reality.
Also, explicit contractual terms of a transaction involving members of an MNE may provide evidence as to the form in which the responsibilities, risks and benefits have been assigned among those members. For example, the contractual terms might include the form of consideration charged or paid, sales and purchase volumes, the warranties provided, the rights to revisions and modifications, delivery terms, credit and payment terms etc. In addition to an examination of these contractual terms, it will be important to check that the actual conduct of the parties conforms to them.
On a general level, business strategies are one of the important factors in a comparability analysis. However, the examination of the legitimate business strategy of an MNE will depend on the facts and circumstances of each case. The business strategy of an MNE is dependent upon the structural characteristics of its industry. Nonetheless, MNEs with different business strategies may exist within the same industry. The business strate-gies pursued by different MNEs may differ because of their different levels of global integration, different corporate histories, internal efficiencies and competitive advantages. Business strategies would take into account many aspects of an enterprise such as innovation and new product development, degree of diversification, risk aversion, assessment of political changes, the impact of existing and planned labour laws, duration of arrangements and other factors bearing upon the daily conduct of business. Such business strategies may need to be taken into account when determining the comparability of controlled and uncontrolled transactions.
Where there are material differences in economically significant contractual terms between the taxpayer’s controlled transactions and the potential comparables, such differences should be evaluated, in order to judge whether comparability between the controlled and uncontrolled trans-actions is nevertheless satisfied and whether comparability adjustments need to be made to eliminate the effects of such differences.
How contractual terms may affect transfer pricing may be seen in the following example:
| Example: Relevance of Contractual Terms Consider Company A in one country, an agricultural exporter, which regularly buys transportation services from Company B (its foreign subsidiary) to ship its product, cocoa beans, from Company A’s country to overseas markets. Company B occasionally provides transportation services to Company C, an unrelated domestic corporation in the same country as Company B. However, the provision of such services to Company C accounts for only 10 per cent of the gross revenues of Company B and the remaining 90 per cent of Company B’s revenues are attributable to the provision of transportation services for cocoa beans from Company A. In determining the degree of comparability between Company B’s uncontrolled transaction with Company C and its con-trolled transaction with Company A, the difference in volumes involved in the two transactions, volume discounts if any, and the regularity with which these services are provided must be taken into account where such factors would have a material effect on the price charged.
|
Functional analysis typically involves identification of functions performed, assets employed and risks assumed (also called FAR analysis) with respect to the international controlled transactions between members of an MNE. Functional analysis seeks to identify and compare the economically significant activities and the responsibilities undertaken by each of the associated enterprises and by any independent entity engaging in a potentially comparable transaction. An economically significant activity is one which materially affects the price charged in a transaction and/or the profits earned from that transaction.
Functional analysis is the cornerstone of any transfer pricing exercise. Its purpose is to gain an understanding of the operations of an enterprise in connection with its transactions with associated enterprises. The functional analysis examines the respective roles of the parties to the controlled transaction under examination. The roles undertaken by each of the associated enterprises will affect the determination of an arm’s length remuneration for the controlled transaction since compensation in transac-tions between two independent enterprises will usually reflect the functions that each enterprise performs, taking into account assets employed and risks assumed. Generally, the more valuable those functions and assets, and the greater the risks, the greater the expected remuneration.
On a strategic level, market share improvement strategies considered by MNEs can be divided into the following three main categories depending on the period of their existence in a market:
The functional analysis also examines the activities of the parties to uncontrolled, potentially comparable transactions. The functional anal-ysis of parties to potentially comparable transactions will assist in evaluating whether such transactions appropriately can be utilized as comparables in the analysis since close comparability of functions performed, assets used or contributed and risks assumed is often a prerequisite for a valid comparison.
Functional analysis is a process of finding and organizing facts about the transaction in terms of the functions, risks and assets in order to identify how these are divided between the parties involved in the transaction. The functions, risks and assets are analyzed to determine the nature of functions performed, degree of risks undertaken and the nature of the assets employed by each party. This analysis helps to select the tested party/parties where needed (as explained below), the most appropriate transfer pricing method, the comparables, and ultimately to determine whether the profits (or losses) earned by the entities are appropriate to the functions performed, assets employed and risks assumed.
The functional analysis is important because the expected return of the entities involved in a transaction depends on the importance of the functions performed, the nature and degree of risks assumed and the nature and value of assets employed. Generally, the more valuable the functions performed, assets employed and the greater the risks assumed by a party to a transaction the greater its expected return (or potential loss). It is therefore extremely important to map the functions performed, assets employed and risks assumed by all the associated enterprises in relation to the controlled transaction under examination.
A clearer understanding of functional analysis may be gained from the example below.
The following paragraphs describe how a functional analysis can be carried out and documented based on the example involving P Co. For these purposes it is necessary to have a qualitative description of the intragroup transactions and circumstances; this can be represented by a table as depicted in 3.T.1.
In the table, the intensity of the risks, functions and assets of a particular entity is reflected by the number of “X” assigned. Such a table can be used to summarize key aspects of a functional analysis, and to qualitatively compare the different enterprises in an MNE across a number of categories related to functions, assets, and risks based solely on the facts of a particular case. This tool is commonly referred to as a “tick chart.” Tick charts, while very useful, are inherently subjective. Accordingly, the same set of facts in the hands of two different analysts may not result in identical tick charts. Caution should be used in giving tick charts quantitative significance. For example, three ticks do not reflect three times more value than a single tick. Moreover, all categories in the chart do not have equivalent weight. Accordingly, tick charts should primarily be used as a tool in evaluating qualitative aspects of the analysis, and should not be used mechanically to split profits according to the relative number of ticks.
Example: “P Co.”—Energy SolutionsP Co. is a company incorporated and registered under the laws of Country A. P Co. is in the business of intelligent energy solutions and is a market leader in the development, production and supply of electronic meters and their components, software, energy monitoring, billing solutions and payment systems. Additionally, the company owns technologies related to electronic energy meters. P Co. has an established marketing networks in many developing and developed countries. P Co. is a part of MNE X, one of the largest metering consortiums in the world, which shares technology and pools the extensive experience of development and manufacture within a network covering over 30 countries. Q Co. is a company incorporated and registered under the laws of Country B and is a wholly owned subsidiary of P Co. Q Co. intends to manufacture a wide range of electronic energy meters and portable calibrators, which would cater to all segments of the power generation, transmission, distribution and consumption sectors and offers features required for electricity revenue management. However, such equipment will have to be customized to cater to the needs of domestic users. Such adaptations would be developed by Q Co. in its own research & development (R&D) facilities. Q Co. entered into a license agreement with P Co. to source its core technology, TECHNO A™—developed and patented by P Co. TECHNO A™, being software driven, allows cost-effective product feature enhancements and provides flexibility to utilities to effectively manage electric-ity revenue and demand, thereby limiting or eliminating revenue losses. TECHNO A™ technology was developed in Country A by P Co. The TECHNO A™ technology measures electricity flow using digital and microprocessor based techniques, and processes the measurements into useful information. Use of TECHNO A™ technology has major advantages in the design and manufacture of meters. Within the above context, the controlled transactions between Q Co. and P Co. are the purchase of certain components by Q Co. from P Co. and the license of technology by Q Co. from P Co. As noted above, P Co. is specialized in dealing with processors and other components of electronic meters and their sub-assemblies. These are critical components of an electronic meter. Q Co. manufactures energy meters in Country B and uses processors and related components purchased from P Co. Q Co. then sells energy meters to P Co., in line with its requirements. Q Co. has its own R&D center which tries to improve the technologies so as to achieve further efficiencies. This would mean that dependence on outside sources for technologies would be reduced in the future and cost savings could be achieved. Also, Q Co. has penetrated the market in the territory of Country B by incurring huge marketing expenditure to establish its own marketing intangibles. These are separate from the intangibles of P Co. in Country A for which a technology license agreement is in place between P Co. and Q Co.
|
Table 3.T.1
| Symbol | Comparative risk level standards | Comparative functional level standards | Comparative asset level standard |
| - | No risk | No Functions | No assets |
| √ | Lowest risk | Least Functions | Few assets |
| √ √ | Medium risk | Lesser Functions | Medium assets |
| √ √ √ | Highest risk | Highest Functions | Most assets |
Functions performed are the activities that are carried out by each of the parties to the transaction. In conducting a functional analysis, economi-cally significant functions are to be considered, as such functions add more value to the transactions and are therefore expected to fetch higher anticipated returns for the entity performing such functions. Thus, the focus should not be on identifying the maximum number of functions but rather on the identifica-tion of critical functions performed by the associated enterprises.
The above market share strategies depend on various factors like market power and the business life cycle of the MNE in a particular market. Market penetration occurs when an MNE is a relative newcomer to a particular market and is seeking to enter and establish its products/services in the new market. An MNE might actively pursue a market expansion strategy to increase its market share in highly competitive markets. Market maintenance occurs when an MNE has already entered a market and is aiming at maintaining its market share.
Some of the relevant functions that are often observed and that may be economically important in determining the price for a transaction are:
It should be emphasized that this list is purely indicative. The extent to which each of these functions (or other functions not listed above) is economically significant and contributes to the creation of value depends on the particular facts and circumstances of the case.
A functional analysis can be approached by evaluating all the economically significant activities performed in relation to the controlled transaction under examination (such as the list indicated above) and in potentially comparable uncontrolled transactions. In general, a taxpayer should prepare this list for both parties to the relevant controlled transaction (e.g. for the producing and selling/distributing activities in this example) to ultimately support the selection of the most appropriate transfer pricing method and to assist in identifying useful comparables.
Continuing the example from 3.4.4.6, it might be hypothesized for purposes of illustration that the following are the functions performed by the respective parties.
Functions Performed by P Co.
With respect to the sale of technology and components of electronic energy meters:
In this example, it is assumed that in the context of the sale of electronic energy meters by Q Co. on the basis of the technological support of P Co., P Co. performs the following economically significant functions:
With respect to the import/purchase of raw materials/components by Q Co.:
It is assumed that, in connection with the purchase of processors and other components by Q Co. from P Co., the economically significant functions performed by P Co. can be summarized as follows:
Functions Performed by Q Co.
It is assumed that the functions of Q Co. in the context of the purchase of components and subsequent sale to domestic utilities are as follows:
The following common functions are required to manage the busi-ness in the above example. While both parties are likely to participate in performing these functions, one may perform one or more of the functions more intensively than the other party.
A market penetration strategy may involve a combination of strategies for attracting existing users of a competitive brand to new products and attracting non-users to the product category to which the new product belongs.
In addition to identifying the specific functions undertaken by each party, the analysis should also evaluate the relative intensity with which each party performs its functions. Table 3.T.2. indicates one way such a qualitative evaluation of relative functional intensity might be summarized in a tick chart.
Table 3.T.2
(by P Co. and Q Co. in relation to Q Co.’s Market)
| Category | Level of Intensity | |
|
| A Co | B Co |
| Market development | x | xxx |
| Product development | xxx | xx |
| Manufacturing | - | xxx |
| Quality control | xx | xxx |
| Post-sales activities | - | xxx |
| General management functions | - | - |
| Corporate strategy determination | x | xxx |
| Finance, accounting, treasury and legal | - | xxx |
| Human resource management | - | xxx |
Assets (tangible as well as intangible) that are used by, or transferred between, the associated enterprises in the course of an international controlled transaction need to be identified as part of the functional analysis.
The analysis should involve the identification of the type of capital assets employed (e.g. plant and equipment, intangible assets, financial assets etc.) and their significance to the controlled transaction. For economically significant assets it may be necessary to perform a more detailed analysis of the assets employed, such as their age, location, property right protections available, market value etc.
In the case of capital-intensive industries, the employment of a capital asset such as property, plant and equipment, etc. is costly and has to be financed either internally or externally. However, there can also be cases where the entities are involved in activities for which the assets employed may not require such a large capital investment. Depending on the circum-stances and applicable accounting standards, costs associated with acquiring rights to use an asset may be recorded as operating expenses (e.g. in the form of leasing or rental costs) or as financial expenses below the operating profit line (e.g. as interest expenses). Where an operating profit measure is used to determine if the controlled transaction(s) are arm’s length, it will be impor-tant to ensure such amounts are considered in the comparability analysis and that their accounting treatment is consistent. Adjustments might be required to ensure consistency of accounting standards between the controlled trans-action and the comparable. Differences in the use of assets can sometimes be eliminated or reduced to a significant extent by making comparability adjustments on account of working capital or capacity utilization.
Where the transactions involve the use or transfer of economically significant intangibles, the special considerations set out in Chapter 6 should be borne in mind.
When an MNE pursues a market maintenance/expansion strategy it may focus on combining multiple strategies of:
It can be hypothetically assumed for the purpose of the example that B Co. owns the following tangible assets. In any actual case the list of relevant economically important assets would depend on the specific facts of the case.
It can be assumed for purposes of the example that:
In addition to identifying the specific assets used or contributed by P Co. and Q Co, the functional analysis should evaluate the relative importance of the asset contribution of each party. Table 3.T.3. indicates one way such a qualitative evaluation might be summarized.
Table 3.T.3
| Category | Level of Intensity | |
|
| P Co | Q Co |
| Tangible assets | xx | xxx |
| Intangible assets | xxx | xx |
| - Technological | xxx |
|
| - Brand | x | x |
| - Legal | x | xxx |
Risk analysis is an important part of the functional analysis. The detailed guidance provided in this section on the analysis of risks as part of a functional analysis does not mean that risks are more important than functions or assets. The relevance of functions, assets and risks in a specific transaction will need to be determined through a detailed functional analysis.
Risks are an inherent part of commercial activities. Businesses exist and undertake commercial activities in order to pursue opportunities to make profits. Simply put, risk is the effect of uncertainty on the objectives of the business. Greater risks are associated with higher expected returns—profit-seeking enterprises would only take on the risks in commercial opportunities if they anticipate a positive return. But such opportunities are inherently uncertain: costs may be higher than anticipated; revenues may be lower; circumstances may change and therefore actual results may be better or worse than those which were expected.
All these three market share strategies use two fundamental tactics:
It may be desirable to isolate the costs related to the pursuit of the above tactics as precisely as possible so that the allocation of costs at arm’s length can be computed.
Since the assumption of economically significant risks will be relevant to the pricing of a transaction, a transfer pricing analysis must first identify such risks, and then determine which entity assumes them. This analysis of risk should start from the contractual terms that exist between the parties but should also have regard to the conduct of the parties, including the functions they perform and any other relevant facts. Only then can the controlled transaction be properly understood and defined, and from there, appropriately priced. For transfer pricing purposes, the analysis of risk can be broken down into six steps.
There are many sources and types of risk, the significance of which will vary depending on the nature of the business transaction. The significance of a risk will depend on a combination of its likelihood and its potential impact on the profits (or losses) of the business. For example, the risk associated with the design of new packaging to improve visibility of a product may be relatively small compared to the risk associated with the development of a completely new product line. Changes to a “flagship” product are likely to carry more risk than changes or variations to a less important product or to one product among many sold by the business, and risks associated with developments based on novel technologies or wholly new applications are likely to be higher than those which build on existing, proven products or technologies.
An examination of the key functions and commercial context of a transaction will help to identify significant risks. In many cases, an examina-tion of the functions performed, assets used or contributed and risks assumed by other associated enterprises in the MNE contributing to the group’s crea-tion of value may help in this process since risks also represent opportunities and businesses will generally allocate resources to manage significant risks.
An illustrative list of risks that may be assumed by the parties to the transaction is provided below. However, the relevance and significance of each individual risk factor listed below will depend on the nature of the individual transaction and the particular facts of the individual case.
Table 3.T.4
| Nature of risks | Particulars |
| Financial risk | a. Method of funding |
|
| b. Fluctuation in interest rates |
|
| c. Funding of losses |
|
| d. Foreign exchange risk |
|
| |
| Product risk | a. Design and development of product |
|
| b. Upgrading/obsolescence of product |
|
| c. After sales service |
|
| d. Risks associated with R&D |
|
| e. Product liability risk |
|
| f. Intellectual property risk |
|
| g. Scheduling risk |
|
| h. Inventory risk |
|
| |
| Market risk | a. Development of a market including advertisement and product promotion, etc. |
|
| b. Fluctuation in demand and prices |
|
| c. Business cycle risk |
|
| d. Volume risk |
|
| e. Service incentive scheme risk |
|
| f. Asset redundancy risk |
|
| |
| Collection risk | a. Credit risk |
|
| b. Bad debt risk |
|
|
|
| Entrepreneurial risk | a. Risk of loss associated with capital investment |
|
| b. Single customer risk |
|
| c. Risk of losing human capital intangible |
|
| |
| General business risk | a. Risk related to ownership of property |
|
| b. Risk associated with the exploitation of a business |
|
| c. Inflation risk |
|
| |
| Country/regional risk | a. Political risk |
|
| b. Security risk |
|
| c. Regulatory risk |
|
| d. Risk related to government policies |
It should be emphasized that this list is purely illustrative, and that the extent to which each of these risks (or other risks not listed above) is economically significant and contributes to the creation of value depends on the industry and on taxpayer-specific circumstances. Hence, real life knowledge of how a particular MNE is functioning vis-à-vis its associated enterprise is very crucial in determination of the risk. For instance, not all industries involve the same level of product liability risk.
Market penetration, market expansion and market maintenance strategies are legitimate business strategies that may involve substantial costs, sometimes resulting in significant losses. Accordingly, there is strong implicit recognition that market share strategies cannot be pursued indefinitely by a taxpayer and there has to be some definite time frame in the foreseeable future when these strategies might yield profits. A transfer pricing analysis should consider the arm’s length allocation of the costs of these strategies between an MNE and its subsidiaries. The appropriate allocation of the costs of such strategies will depend on the facts and circumstances of each case. It is important to examine the following factors in order to determine the proper cost allocation between parties to cross-border transactions:
Once economically significant risks have been identified, the analysis turns to consideration of which party assumes such risks. In this regard, the starting point for the analysis is usually the contractual terms between the parties (STEP 2). Parties transacting at arm’s length would be expected to agree on the allocation of significant risks between them before the outcome of the risk-taking is known. However, contracts between associated enter-prises may not specify the allocation of all the economically significant risks.
Figure 3.D.1
The Process of Delineating and Pricing Transactions
| GAMBAR |
Most of the commonly assigned risks in the contract are risks which can be mitigated against, for example inventory risk, bad debts, foreign exchange risk etc. Market circumstances, price competition, the supply of raw materials, rises in wages etc. are risks which typically are more difficult to mitigate, and which may not be identified in the contract. Volatility in the global market in the past decade has demonstrated that risks which are difficult to mitigate are often economically more significant than the kinds of contractual risks as mentioned above.
Moreover, in some cases, written contracts may be inconsistent or may not be followed in practice. For example, a contract may say that a manufacturer of electronic goods bears warranty risk; however, in practice the reseller habitually pays for the cost of customer repairs made under warranty. In this case, it is the reseller that is bearing the risk. The determination of the risk assumption between the parties must therefore be based on the actual conduct of the parties, rather than merely to the legal form of the agreement.
Even where a comprehensive and consistent contract is in place, an analysis of the conduct of the parties and other facts is critical. In particular, it is important to consider which party or parties control the economically significant risks, and whether a party assigned a risk in fact has the financial capacity to assume it. Both control (see sections 3.4.4.33 to 3.4.4.35) and financial capacity (see sections 3.4.4.36 to 3.4.4.38) are necessary for one party to be treated as having assumed a particular risk; but neither of them is by itself sufficient.
The next step in the risk analysis process gathers facts on the actual conduct of the parties through a functional analysis. As has been noted above, information relating to the exercise of control over risk and the financial capacity to assume risk are particularly important. This information will then be analyzed in the remaining steps.
While it may be impossible to eliminate or even influence some risks, economically significant risks are central to the success or failure of commercial operations, and thus commercial enterprises generally devote substantial resources to managing significant commercial opportunities and their inherent risks.
For example, a limited risk company acting solely as a sales agent with little or no responsibility for market development would be less likely to share the costs of a market penetration strategy initiated by its parent company than would a full risk distributor that might benefit more from a successful market penetration or expansion strategy.
When an MNE enters a new market with its product or expands market share of its product in an existing market through its subsidiary, questions of the creation of marketing intangibles and increases in the value of product-related intangibles such as trademarks, trade names etc. follow closely behind. It is important to examine and follow the process of creation of intangibles in a market, as well as the legal ownership of such intangibles and the right to share in the return from such intangibles (the notion which some countries refer to as “economic ownership”). Transfer pricing aspects of these issues are discussed in greater detail in Chapter 6 on intangibles.
In a transfer pricing analysis, “control” over a risk has a specific meaning. It is:
| Example: Clothing Manufacturer Company X runs a clothing manufacturing facility. It enters into a con-tract with Company Y to manufacture children’s pyjamas on Y’s behalf. The design and pattern for the pyjamas are provided by Company Y. Company Y also specifies the sizes and number of pyjamas to be pro-duced, as well as timing of production. Company X is required to manu-facture the pyjamas to Y’s specifications, including meeting Y’s quality standards and using materials approved by Company Y. Company Y undertakes quality control audits to ensure that the pyjamas produced by X meet those specifications, and provided that is the case, it guaran-tees to buy all the pyjamas produced by X as specified under the contract. The contract also states that, provided X meets the quality control stand-ards set out by Y, Y will indemnify X against any warranty or compensa-tion claims which may arise from the sale of the pyjamas. In this example, the economically significant risks are identified as the inventory risk and warranty/ product recall risk. In respect of both of these, Company Y has the capability and actually performs the decision-making functions regarding what to produce and when, and it sets and actively monitors the quality control standards and other specifications. Y can therefore be said to control these risks. |
Control over risk involves the process of real decision-making. Decision-makers must be able to understand the risk and the impact the decision could have on the business. They must have access to relevant information. If information or analysis is provided by others, the decision-maker must be able to assess whether the right information has been provided, and whether the analysis being relied upon are adequate. Without the foregoing, the mere formalization of a decision, for example in the form of the signing of documents or the minutes of a meeting reflecting a decision effectively already made elsewhere, are insufficient.
The setting of the broad policy framework in which to assess risks is also not enough. For example, the setting by Company Y of broad MNE objectives or a general company “image” would not mean that Company Y controls risks relating to specific marketing strategies. Similarly, a requirement to analyze and report on certain risks in a certain way, or in accordance with a particular framework or template, does not necessarily constitute control over risk for the purposes of a transfer pricing analysis.
| Example: Control Over Risk by Parent Company Company A situated in Country Z belongs to an MNE group with operations worldwide through various subsidiaries. Company A is responsible for the overall research programmes of the group. The group has two R&D centres operated by Companies B and C, both subsidiaries of Company A and situated in Countries X and Y respectively. Risks relating to R&D are identified as economically significant (STEP 1). Company A employs a workforce that includes the Chief Executive Officer, Chief Financial Officer, senior management and technical personnel that provide strategic supervision of the group’s R&D activities. Company A claims that it controls and takes all strategic decisions with regard to the core functions of Companies B and C. The contractual arrangements between the companies support this (STEP 2). STEP 3 Functional analysis: Company A designs and monitors the MNEs overall research programmes, making the decisions regarding which areas of research to pursue, as well as setting the objectives of the research. Company A establishes a reporting and analysis frame-work against which Companies B and C must provide information on the progress of the research activities. It also provides funds needed for R&D activities and controls the annual budget for R&D activities of Companies B and C. The CEO, CFO and other senior management personnel of Companies B and C reside in Countries X and Y and are technically and functionally competent to take decisions and carry out the R&D activities of Company B and C, under the overall direction of Company A. The technical manpower needed for R&D activity and the assets of Companies B and C are located in Countries X and Y. Company A claims that it controls the risk of the R&D activities of its subsidiaries. On inquiry, it is found that the personnel managing the group’s R&D activities in Company A in Country Z are experienced and qualified to make decisions on and to monitor the R&D activities of Companies B and C, and that they in fact do so, based on regular reports provided by B and C on the progress of the research, which Company A evaluates. In addition, Company A has furnished evidence that it has covered the costs of Companies B and C’s R&D activities in all the instances where such activities did not lead to successful outcomes. It was also noted that Companies B and C actually perform R&D functions and take the decisions required for performing the day-to-day functions of R&D. STEPS 4-6 Analysis and conclusions: In this example, while the actual functions of R&D activities are undertaken in Countries X and Y, Company A contractually assumes the risk related to the ultimate success or otherwise of the R&D activity and has demonstrated that it has the capability to control, and actually controls these risks through its strategic decisions and monitoring activities and through bearing the losses from unsuccessful R&D programmes. Provided Company A has the financial capacity to assume these risks, it will be concluded that Company A assumes the risks associated with the success or failure of the research activity undertaken by Companies B and C. Companies B and C, which perform operational R&D activities and take the decisions necessary to perform these day-to-day functions of R&D and also bear the related operational risk, should be entitled to an appropriate return for these functions and risks. Company A, which provides the strategic direction and management of the group’s R&D activities, funds the group’s R&D activities and exercises control over the risk of unsuccessful R&D activity, should be entitled to an appropriate return for its functions and risks. Company A should be entitled to the returns from the intangibles (if any) associated with the R&D, less the appropriate returns to Companies B and C. Example: Control Over Risk by Subsidiaries Company A situated in Country Z, a low-tax/no-tax jurisdiction, belongs to an MNE having operations worldwide through various subsidiaries. Company B and C, which are both subsidiaries of Company A, operate R&D centres situated in Country X and Y respectively, having normal tax rates. Risks relating to R&D were identified as economically significant (STEP 1). Company A, which employs a workforce of ten persons including a CEO, CFO and other senior management, claims that it controls and takes all strategic decisions with regard to the core functions of companies B and C. The contractual arrangements between the companies support this (STEP 2). STEP 3 Functional analysis: Company A provides the funds needed for R&D activities and controls the annual budget for such activities of Companies B and C. It also provides technical assistance for registration of patents in Countries X, Y and Z. The CEO, CFO and other senior management personnel of Company B and C reside in Countries X and Y and are technically and functionally competent to take decisions and carry out R&D activities of Company B and C. The technical manpower needed for R&D activity and the R&D related assets of Companies B and C are located in Countries X and Y. Company A claims that it controls the risk of the R&D activities of its subsidiaries. Upon audit it was found that the CEO and CFO and senior management of Company A in Country Z do not have the technical skills and experience to take strategic decisions regarding the direction of the R&D activities, or to monitor those activities. Company A has not furnished any evidence that it takes strategic decisions relating to the R&D programmes of Companies B and C. On the other hand, it was found that the senior management of Companies B and C are taking the important strategic decisions related to the design and direction of the R&D programmes and budget, including determining the objectives of the research and evaluating which areas of research to pursue. However, Company A has furnished evidence that the funds were actually transferred to its subsidiaries for R&D activities. STEPS 4-6 Analysis and conclusions: In this example all the core functions of R&D activities are located in Countries X and Y and the non-core functions of registering patents are located in Country Z. Even though the senior management of Company A are located in Country Z they are not capable of taking strategic decisions or controlling and monitoring R&D activities and do not, in fact, do so. The determination, utilization and control of the budget for carrying out R&D activities and decisions regarding day-to-day performance of R&D activities were carried out by Companies B and C. In view of these facts it cannot be upheld that Company A controls the risk of R&D activities. Company A should be entitled to an appropriate return for the provision of funding and Companies B and C should be entitled to an appropriate return for their functions including the strategic decisions and control over the risk of R&D activities. Note that in this example, the conclusion would have been the same even if Company A had been a resident of a high-tax jurisdiction. |
Where a risk has materialized it will be a question of fact as to which party bore the consequences. However, since any analysis of risks must take into account temporality (i.e. past risks where outcomes are known are no longer risks at all), it will be relevant to consider whether a party has the financial capacity to assume a risk. Financial capacity to assume risk can be defined as access to funding to take on or to lay off the risk, to pay for the risk mitigation functions and to bear the consequences of the risk if it materializes. Access to funding takes into account the available assets of the party, as well as the options realistically available to it to access additional liquidity, if needed, to cover the costs anticipated to arise should the risk materialize. The consideration of whether an entity has the necessary financial capacity should be done on the basis that it is operating as an unrelated party in the same circumstances as the entity. For instance, if an entity has the right to exploit income-generating assets, it is likely to be able to access liquidity against its income stream.
It should be noted that the financial capacity to assume the risk is not necessarily the financial capacity to bear the full consequences of the risk materializing (e.g. the full loss): the risk-bearer may have the capacity to protect itself from the consequences of the risk materializing (e.g. by hedging the risk or insuring against the impact of the risk). However, because financial capacity to assume a risk is not by itself sufficient to assume a risk, a high level of capitalization does not necessarily mean that the highly capitalized party assumes the risk.
It is relevant to mention here that in a multinational enterprise associated entities may work together to exert control over the risks of the entire MNE group. Precise distribution of risk among the associated enterprises may be extremely difficult to achieve. The transfer pricing analysis regarding which entity assumes certain risks should therefore be done considering all the facts and circumstances of each case.
Steps 4 to 6 of the risk analysis framework analyze the information gathered in the earlier steps to determine the assumption of risk for the purposes of the transfer pricing analysis.
In cases where the contractual assumption of risk is fully supported by the parties’ conduct, including an alignment with the exercise of control and financial capacity to assume the risk, the analysis will be straightforward. That is, where a party, which is assigned a risk under a consistent contract (i.e. one that is followed in practice) (STEP 4(i)) also controls that risk and has the relevant financial capacity (STEP 4(ii)), it will be regarded as assuming the risk for the purposes of understanding and defining the transaction and pricing it under a TP analysis (STEP 6). The fact that another party also performs control functions or has financial capacity will not affect the determination of the assumption of risk under the transfer pricing analysis. In some cases, risks may be contractually shared by more than one party.
When applying the Cost Plus Method (CPM), Resale Price Method (RPM) or Transactional Net Margin Method (TNMM) (see further Chapter 4) it is necessary to choose the party to the transaction for which a financial indicator (mark-up on costs, gross margin or net profit indicator) is tested. The choice of the tested party should be consistent with the functional analysis of the controlled transaction. Attributes of controlled transaction(s) will influence the selection of the tested party (where needed).
In other cases, where the contractual assumption of risk is not aligned with the exercise of control or the financial capacity to assume the risk, the analysis will require an additional step (Step 5). That is, where a party is contractually assigned a risk (or is made to actually bear the costs of the risk when it materializes) (STEP 4(i)) but does not control it, or does not have the relevant financial capacity (STEP 4(ii)), it cannot be regarded as truly assuming the risk. Instead, the party which does exercise control over the risk and has the relevant financial capacity should be allocated the risk (STEP 5). If multiple associated enterprises are identified that both exercise control and have the financial capacity to assume the risk, then the risk should be allocated to the associated enterprise or group of enterprises exercising the most control. This allocation of risk is what should be used to define the transaction and determine the arm’s length price for transfer pricing purposes (STEP 6). The other parties performing control activities should be remunerated appropriately, taking into account the importance of the control activities performed.
In exceptional cases, it may be the case that there is no party that both exercises control and has the financial capacity to assume the risk. Such a scenario would rarely occur between independent enterprises and therefore a thorough analysis should attempt to identify the reasons for this. An assessment of the commercial rationality of such a transaction may be necessary (see sections 3.3.2.3 to 3.3.2.6 above).
The assumption of risk based on the analysis above should be compensated with an appropriate anticipated return. Normally, this means that the party or parties assuming the risk will enjoy the potential upside consequences resulting from the playing out of the risk, for example, the profits that result from a successful venture risk; but would also bear the potential downside consequences if the risk materializes resulting in greater costs or lower than expected profits. In a proper transfer pricing analysis, associated enterprises should always be appropriately remunerated for their contributions— the functional analysis considers functions and assets and not only risks. For example, parties performing risk mitigation functions on behalf of an entity assuming risk should be adequately compensated at arm’s length for those functions. Similarly, where a party is performing control functions, this should be taken into account even if it does not assume the risk relating to those control functions. The form of this compensation will depend on the arrangements between the enterprises and the nature of the contribution: it may be appropriate for such a party to share in the potential upside and downside consequences resulting from the playing out of the underlying risk. Alternatively, the contribution might be compensated in a manner that is not contingent on the underlying risk.
Continuing the example from section 3.4.4.6, it is assumed for the purpose of the example that the following are the risks assumed by the respective parties.
Table 3.T.5
Risk Assumption—Exposure and Control Decisions
| Risk Category | Exposure and Control Decisions of P Co | Exposure and Control Decisions of Q Co |
| Product liability risk | It is assumed that P Co. faces this risk arising from the product failure, technology absorption by Q Co. and consequential reputational risk. Further, P Co. is primarily engaged in product and technology development, and makes all the relevant control decisions thereto, so this risk is also assumed by P Co. | It is assumed that Q Co. faces product liability risk as a result of rejection where the products do not conform to the order specification given by domestic power utilities. Since Q Co makes the relevant control decisions relating to conformity with customer specifications or national/international product standards, these risks are assumed by Q Co. Q Co. mitigates this risk by taking steps to ensure excellent quality and safety standards and processes are deployed and by having its own R&D centre. |
| Technology risk | P Co. is the technology owner. Due to market competition and an ever-changing technology scenario, the company needs to continuously upgrade its existing technology and develop new technology. P Co. makes these control decisions and continuously focuses on providing products with contemporary technology. It can thus be concluded that P Co. assumes the technology risk. | It is assumed that the manufacturing operations of Q Co. are non-complex. Further, product technology and know-how have been provided by P Co. Hence, Q Co. does not assume any major technology risk. |
| Research and development risk | It is assumed that since P Co. serves diverse markets, its engineering and R&D professionals constantly strive to provide innovative solutions that offer competitive advantages for customers worldwide. These activities include the control decisions relating to R&D risk. P Co. thus assumes the R&D risk in this case. | It is assumed that since no significant R&D (except for supporting Q Co.’s business and that of providing technical assistance to its customers) is carried out by Q Co., it assumes no significant risk on this account. |
| Credit risk | As P Co. is not involved in decisions relating to the extension of credit to customers, it does not assume any significant credit risk. | Since Q Co. is responsible for decisions relating to the extension of credit to customers, all the major credit risks associated with sales are assumed by Q Co. |
| Inventory risk | As P Co. is primarily engaged in product and technology development, and is not involved in inventory management, this risk is not assumed by P Co. | Q Co. is responsible for managing the procurement of raw materials/ components and maintenance of requisite stock levels for each product including finished goods. This risk is mitigated to the extent that components are procured from P Co. |
| Foreign currency risk | P Co. exports technology and components to Q Co.; hence they are also subjected to appreciation/depreciation of local currency against the foreign currency. The assumption of this risk will depend on which party makes the relevant control decisions regarding currency, including the use of any hedging instruments to mitigate such risk. | It is assumed that since Q Co. imports technology and com-ponents from P Co. and its sales are restricted to domestic markets, the imports are subjected to appreciation/depreciation of local currency against the foreign currency. The assumption of this risk will depend on which party makes the relevant control decisions regarding currency, including the use of any hedging instruments to mitigate such risk. |
Based on the foregoing, the risks assumed by P Co. and Q Co., combined with a qualitative evaluation of the intensity of those risks, can be summarized in a table like the one below. It should be emphasized that one type of risk may be more important or have a larger economic impact on prices than another type of risk. Thus, P Co.’s technology risk may affect pricing far more than Q Co.’s inventory or credit risk, even though all three types of risk are assigned three ticks in the chart. Thus, this type of summary cannot be used as a mechanical tool for allocating profit.
Table 3.T.6
Summary of Risks Borne by Each Party
| Category | Level of Intensity | |
|
| A Co | B Co |
| Market risk | - | - |
| Product liability risk | - | xxx |
| Technology risk | xxx | x |
| Research and development risk | xxx | xx |
| Credit risk | - | xxx |
| Inventory risk | - | xxx |
| Foreign currency risk | xx | xx |
Economic analysis deals with industry analysis and the circum-stances that may be relevant for determining market comparability. The relevant information on the industry can be broadly classified as follows:
Care must be exercised while considering global economic trends, as the market trends in the taxpayer’s country and in the country of its associated enterprise and/or of the potential comparables (in the case where foreign comparables are used) could be significantly different. For example, in the 2008 global financial crisis some of the banks and automobile companies reported huge losses globally, but significant profits in emerging economies. Where there are such significant differences between the economic circumstances prevailing in different markets such that it is not possible to eliminate them by making reliable comparability adjustments, then companies from such different markets might not be retained as reliable comparables.
Comparable uncontrolled transactions (“comparables”) are of two types:
Undertaking a more detailed classification of the above broad headings may suggest that the following specific factors should be evaluated in performing an industry analysis if they are economically significant for the examined controlled transaction:
Market prices for the transfer of the same or similar property may vary across different markets owing to cost differentials and/or differences in purchasing power and habits prevalent in the respective markets which may affect the market price. Markets can be different for numerous reasons; it is not possible to itemize exhaustively all the market conditions which may influence transfer pricing analysis but some of the key market conditions which influence such an analysis are discussed below.
In general, uncontrolled comparables would first be sought from the geographic market in which the controlled taxpayer operates, because there may be significant relevant differences in economic conditions between different markets. If reliable comparables from the same market are not available, an uncontrolled comparable derived from a different geographical market may be considered if it can be determined that (i) there are no differences between the two markets that would materially affect the price or profit of the transaction or (ii) reasonably reliable adjustments can be made to account for such material differences between the two markets.
An example of a potential issue relating to geographic location is that of “location savings”, which may come into play during a transfer pricing analysis. Location savings are the net cost savings that an MNE realizes as a result of relocation of operations from a high-cost jurisdiction to a low-cost jurisdic-tion. Typically, the possibility to derive location savings may vary from one jurisdiction to another, depending for example on the following:
It is quite possible that part of the cost savings may be offset at times by “dis-savings” on account of the poor quality and reliability of the power supply, higher costs for transportation, quality control etc. Accordingly, only the net location savings (i.e. savings minus dis-savings) may give rise to an extra profit arising to an MNE due to the relocation of its business from a high-cost to a low-cost jurisdiction.
This Chapter describes several transfer pricing methods that can be used to determine an arm’s length price and describes how to apply these methods in practice. Transfer pricing methods (or “methodologies”) are used to calcu-late or test the arm’s length nature of prices or profits. Transfer pricing methods are ways of establishing arm’s length prices or profits for transactions between associated enterprises. As described in Chapter 3 on Comparability Analysis, the transaction between related enterprises for which an arm’s length price is to be established is referred to as the “controlled transaction”. The selected transfer pricing method is the mechanism by which the prices or results of the controlled transaction are compared to the prices or results of comparable uncontrolled transactions. In this way, the application of transfer pricing meth-ods helps assure that transactions conform to the arm’s length standard. It is important to note that although the term “profit margin” is used, companies may also have legitimate reasons to report losses at arm’s length. Furthermore, transfer pricing methods are not determinative in and of themselves. If an associated enterprise reports an arm’s length amount of income, without the explicit use of one of the recognized transfer pricing methods, this does not mean that its pricing should automatically be regarded as not being at arm’s length and that adjustments should be imposed.
The computation of location savings typically involves the quantification of the net cost savings derived from relocating in a low-cost country, as compared to the relevant high-cost country. In theory, the cost savings computation includes selection of a pre-transfer manufacturing or servicing base in the relevant high-cost country compared to the comparable manufacturing or services cost in the low-cost country, taking into account such things as total labour cost per unit of output (adjustment on account of difference in labour productivity), cost of raw material, costs of land and rent costs; tax benefits etc. The cost savings can be partially offset by higher cost of infra-structure such as less reliable power supplies etc. in certain cases.
Figure 3.D.2
Determining Net Location Savings
| GAMBAR |
Location-specific advantages and location savings are defined as a type of benefit related to geographical location. The relocation of a business may in addition to location savings give some other location-specific advantages (LSAs). These LSAs could be, depending on the circumstances of the case:
Taken together, location savings and each of the other types of benefit related to geographical location are called location-specific advantages (LSAs). LSAs may play a very important role both in increasing the profitability of the MNE and in determining the bargaining power of each of the associated enterprises. It should be noted that the term LSA includes sources of value that are discussed elsewhere in the Manual, and should not be double-counted in assessing arm’s length outcomes. LSAs can be meas-ured as follows:
Figure 3.D.3
Determining Location-specific Advantages
| GAMBAR |
Even though internal comparables may display a higher degree of comparability, there is a need to subject internal comparables to as rigorous a scrutiny as external ones regarding comparability factors, and to make comparability adjustments when necessary. Use of internal comparables may have advantages but also requires caution as mentioned below; accordingly, this will require careful consideration of the facts and circumstances of each case.
In each case, the objective is to identify the most appropriate method for the particular case. Considerations involved in selecting a method can include: the respective strengths and weaknesses of each method; the nature of the controlled transaction; the availability of reliable information (in particular on uncontrolled comparables) needed to apply the selected method; and the degree of comparability between the controlled and uncon-trolled transactions.
The advantages of internal comparables are:
Method selection is an important part of the comparability analysis described in Chapter 3. The starting point in selecting a method is to develop an understanding of the controlled transaction (inbound or outbound), by means of the functional analysis. The functional analysis establishes the foundation necessary to select the most appropriate transfer pricing method as it helps:
► To identify and accurately delineate the intragroup transactions (the wording “accurate delineation” connotes the act of estab-lishing the facts of the transaction based on available evidence, including the relevant acts of the parties);
► To identify the characteristics that would make a particular uncontrolled transaction or function suitable for use as a comparable;
► To determine any necessary adjustments to the comparables;
► To check the relative reliability of the transfer pricing method selected; and
► Over time, to determine if modification of the transfer pric-ing method is appropriate because the controlled transac-tion, function, allocation of risks or allocation of assets have been modified.
The major components of a functional analysis are analyses of the functions undertaken by each of the parties to the transaction, together with the assets they use or contribute and the risks they assume. The functional analysis is described and discussed in detail in Chapter 3, at 3.4.4. A summary is provided below for context in the case of selection of appropriate methods.
The functions performed: The functional analysis identifies and describes the activities performed by each of the relevant parties such as product design, purchasing, inbound logistics, manufacturing, research and development (R&D), assembling, inventory management, outbound logistics, marketing and sales activities, after sale services, supporting activities, services, advertising, financing and management etc. The functional analysis must spec-ify which party performs each activity and the intensity with which each party performs that function. Where both parties are involved in performing an activity the functional analysis should identify the relevant differences; e.g. if both have inventories but Company A holds inventories for a period of up to two years whereas Company B holds inventories for a period of one month the functional analysis should identify that fact. The activities that add most value must be identified and should be discussed in more detail.
The risks assumed: The functional analysis should identify risks assumed and undertaken by each of the parties. Examples are: financial risk (currency, interest rate, funding risks etc.) credit and collection risk (trading credit risk, commercial credit risk), operational risk (systems failure risk), commodity price risk, inventory risk and carrying costs, R&D risk, environmental and other regulatory risks, market risk (country political risk, reli-ability of customers, fluctuation in demand and prices) and product risk (product liability risk, warranty risk and costs, contract enforceability and the risk of product obsolescence). The party which assumes a risk would expect to have higher earnings than one that does not; and will incur the expenses and perhaps related loss if and when risk materializes.
Internal comparables, where available and reliable, may allow the taxpayer to consider the use of the CUP Method which is the most direct and reliable method if it can be applied. Internal comparables may also be used with the other recognized transfer pricing methods.
The assets used or contributed: The functional analysis must identify the assets used or contributed by each of the parties and should distinguish between tangible and intangible assets. Tangible assets such as property, plant and equipment have to be financed and an investment in such capital assets would usually be expected to earn a long-term return based on the use and risk level of the investment. Intangible assets are very important as substantial competitive advantage is often achieved by the creation and use of intangible assets. Some intangibles have legal protection (e.g. patents, trademarks, trade names) but other intangibles with less legal protection may be equally important and valuable (e.g. know-how, trade secrets, marketing intangibles etc.).28
See Glossary for a definition of “marketing intangibles”; a term also used extensively in the OECD Transfer Pricing Guidelines.
However, reliable internal comparables may not exist. If that is the case, it will be necessary to examine external sources of potential comparable transactions among third parties.
Interplay of the above factors: Today, in an MNE, operations tend to be more integrated across jurisdictional boundaries and the functions, risks and assets are often shared between entities in different jurisdictions. This makes functional analyses both more difficult and more necessary. The functional analysis can help identify which functions, risks and assets are attributable to the various related parties. For example, the functional analysis may reveal that one company performs one particular function but the cost of this is borne by the other party to the transaction. The functional analysis could highlight that situation and consider the legal allocation of risk and the economic substance of the transaction. Another example would be where a company performs one particular function and bears the cost thereof but the benefit also accrues to the other party to the transaction. The functional analysis could emphasize that situation and consider which party bears the risk in legal terms and which party assumes the risk according to the economic substance of the transaction. The functional analysis typically includes a discussion of the industry in which the tested party operates, the contractual terms of the transaction at issue, the economic circumstances of the parties and the business strategies they employ. The functional analysis helps to identify the operations that would be expected to benefit a related party and require an arm’s length return.
Selecting a method after the functional analysis: Once the functional analysis is performed the application of a transfer pricing method, with the associated evaluation of comparable transactions, may be considered. Transfer pricing methods typically use information on comparables; the lack of such comparables can make a particular method— even one that might seem initially preferred— inapplicable, and a different method more reliable. These comparable transactions are also referred to as “uncontrolled transactions” because the parties involved in the transactions are independent of each other. Although uncontrolled transactions of independent unrelated companies are usually used as comparables for transfer pricing purposes, in practice it is sometimes not possible to identify reliable, closely comparable data in the same markets. In such cases practical solutions should be sought in good faith by taxpayers and the tax administration. Comparability issues are discussed in more detail at Chapter 3.
There are two types of third-party or external comparables. The first type relates to transactions between two independent parties, neither of which is a party to the controlled transaction. For example, it might be possible to apply the CUP Method based on the price of a comparable product sold under comparable circumstances by uncontrolled parties.
Solutions for cases where comparables are difficult to find may include the following:
► Searching for comparables in other industries where such comparable companies have similar functions, assets and risks;
► Searching for comparables in other geographical regions that share certain key similarities with the country in which a company conducts its business; and
► Using industry analyses (publicly available or conducted internally by the company) to identify profit levels that can reasonably be expected for various routine functions (e.g. production, services, distribution).
The suggestions above are not intended to be exhaustive, neither is any preference implied by the ordering of the alternatives. Rather, the approaches above are presented as examples of what might be done and are included for information purposes only. Due to the difficulty in obtaining access to (publicly available) data, in certain instances methods other than the ones presented above may need to be used. Further guidance on this issue can be found in the PCT Transfer Pricing Toolkit (see 2.5.3.2).
The second type of external comparable relates to the use of the results of comparable uncontrolled companies (engaged in comparable trans-actions) when applying profit-based transfer pricing methods. Typically, such results are identified through the use of commercial databases and the application of “screening” criteria. The determination of appropriate screening criteria is a critical step and should be based on the most economically relevant characteristics of the accurately delineated controlled transaction (see section 3.5.2.28 et seq.). The objective of finding the closest comparables must, however, also be balanced with the need to be pragmatic and to find an answer.
Intangibles: Among the factors to be considered in selecting the most appropriate method in the circumstances of the case. It is important to determine which party has developed or acquired any intangibles used and in what capacity, which party has the legal ownership and which party receives the benefit of the intangibles. The party that developed the intangibles and bore the related intangible development risks should be able to obtain benefits from those intangibles for example through:
► A sale or licensing of the intangibles to another party who exploits it; or
► Exploiting the intangible itself, for example by way of an increase in the price of products or services that make use of such intangibles.29
See Chapter 6 on Intangibles.
There are various sources of data and information which are available to assist a taxpayer or tax administration in identifying potential external comparables. Possible sources range from commercial or electronic databases to regulatory and other government filings and various analytical reports issued by trade and industry associations. The search objective is to identify the most reliable comparables for the controlled transaction under examination according to the specific set of criteria.
There are two general categories of methods. “Traditional Transaction Methods” consist of the Comparable Uncontrolled Price (CUP), the Cost Plus Method (CPM) and the Resale Price Method (RPM). The “Transactional Profit Methods” consist of the Transactional Net Margin Method (TNMM) and the Transactional Profit Split Method (PSM). A number of jurisdictions also apply “other methods” which are considered to provide arm’s length results; however, it needs to be ensured that such methods are properly applied to be consistent with the arm’s length principle.
No preference for particular methods is advocated in this Manual. The most suitable method should be chosen taking into consideration the facts and circumstances. The taxpayer should e.g. take into account the type of transaction, the functional analysis, comparability factors, availability of comparable transactions and the possibility of making adjustments to the data to improve comparability. For further discussion on this issue, see Chapter 3.
Once a method is chosen and applied, taxpayers are generally expected to apply the method in a consistent fashion. Assuming that an appropriate transfer pricing method is being applied, a change in the method is typically required only if there are any relevant changes in the facts, functionalities or availability of data.
The strengths of the RPM include:
► The method is based on the resale price, a market price, and thus represents a demanddriven method; in situations where there
is a weak relationship between the costs incurred and the sales price of a product or services (e.g. when demand is inelastic), the resale price may be more reliable; and
► The method can be used without forcing distributors to inappropriately “make profits”. The distributor earns an arm’s length gross profit margin. However, in some circumstances the distributor could legitimately have operating losses which are not due to the transfer price but rather are the result of commercial factors, for example, high selling expenses caused by business strategies such as a market penetration strategy. By comparison, the application of the TNMM, which analyzes a financial ratio based on operating profits, will generally result in an arm’s length range of positive operating profits. The tested party in the analysis would then generally be expected also to earn a positive operating profit within the range. However, the RPM does not necessarily result in positive operating profits to be earned by the tested party.
The weaknesses of the RPM include:
► It may be difficult to find comparable data on gross margins due to accounting inconsistencies; and
► The method involves a onesided analysis, as its focus is on the related sales company as the tested party in the transfer pricing analysis. It is possible that the arm’s length gross profit margin and hence transfer price, which is based on a benchmarking analysis, can lead to an extreme result for the related supplier of the sales company (e.g. the supplier might experience a loss even though its distributor is profitable).
In a typical intragroup transaction involving a “fullyfledged” manufacturer (i.e. as compared, for example, with a limited risk or contract manufacturer) owning valuable patents or other intangibles and affiliated sales companies which purchase and resell the products to unrelated customers, the RPM is an appropriate method to use if:
► The CUP Method is not applicable;
► The sales companies do not own or contribute to valuable intangibles; and
► Reliable comparisons with uncontrolled transactions can be made on COGS.
The data sources provide a vast array of information. Some provide simple leads or contacts, or a starting point to learn more about a particular industry so that appropriate comparables are ultimately selected. Others provide business profiles and detailed financial information about potential comparables. Each source can be important in establishing and documenting the quantitative basis for an arm’s length transfer pricing policy.
It is useful to again consider the example of Figure 4.D.2. It is assumed here that Associated Enterprise 1 owns valuable patents to manufacture the bicycles and has a valuable trade name. Associated Enterprise 2 purchases the bicycles from Associated Enterprise 1 and resells the bicycles to unrelated dealers in the local country. In such a case, the RPM will be selected to determine an arm’s length transfer price between Associated Enterprise 1 and Associated Enterprise 2 if the CUP Method cannot be applied. The CPM (discussed below) will not be selected in this case, because:
► The fullyfledged manufacturer (i.e. Associated Enterprise 1) owns unique and valuable intangibles, performs R&D activities and generally has operations that are more complex than those of the sales company (i.e. Associated Enterprise 2);
► The results obtained from applying the CPM will not be as reliable as the results obtained from applying the RPM using the sales company as the tested party; and
► It will be very difficult, if not impossible, to identify manufacturers comparable to Associated Enterprise 1 (i.e. that own comparable intangibles) when applying the CPM.
The RPM will establish the transfer price by reference to the resale or gross margins (gross profit/net sales) earned by thirdparty resellers (assuming that no internal comparables are available) and compare them to the gross margin earned by Associated Enterprise 2 on the bicycles purchased from related parties.
| A controlled taxpayer sells property to another member of its group which resells the property to an unrelated customer. It is assumed that there are no material changes in the beginning and ending inventory for the year under review. Information regarding an uncontrolled comparable is sufficiently complete to conclude that it is likely that all material differences between the controlled and uncontrolled transactions have been identified and reliably adjusted for. If the applicable resale price of the property involved in the controlled sale is $100 and if the reseller in the comparable uncontrolled transaction earns a gross profit margin of 20 per cent, then an arm’s length result for the controlled sale is a price of $80 ($100−(0.20 × $100)). |
| SCO, a Country B corporation, is the distributor for FP, its foreign parent. There are no material changes in the beginning and ending inventory for the year under review. SCO’s total reported cost of goods sold is $800, consisting of $600 for property purchased from FP and $200 for other costs of goods sold incurred to unrelated parties. SCO’s applicable resale price and reported gross profit are as follows: Applicable resale price Cost of goods sold: $1 Cost of purchases from FP $600 Costs incurred to unrelated parties $200 |
| TCO, a Country T corporation, is the exclusive distributor of products for its foreign parent. To determine whether the gross profit margin of 25 per cent earned by TCO is an arm’s length result, the local taxing authority considers applying the Resale Price Method. There are several uncontrolled distributors that perform similar functions under similar circumstances in uncontrolled transactions. However, the uncontrolled distributors treat certain costs such as discounts and insurance as cost of goods sold, while TCO treats such costs as operating expenses. In such cases, accounting reclassifications must be made to ensure consistent treatment of such material items. Inability to make such accounting reclassifications will decrease the reliability of the results of applying the Resale Price Method based on the results of the uncontrolled transactions. |
A key resource among the general sources of information is that of commercial databases including databases in electronic form. These data-bases have been developed by various organizations which compile accounts filed by companies with the relevant administrative bodies and present them in an electronic format suitable for searches and statistical analysis. Some of these databases compile financial data from one country only, while others compile regional or even global data. These products typically provide detailed financial information as well as some textual information such as short business descriptions. The level of detail available in the database largely depends on the country concerned.
| WCO, a Country W corporation, manufactures Product Z, an unbranded product, and sells it to RCO, its wholly owned foreign subsidiary. RCO acts as a distributor of Product Z in Country R, and sells it to uncontrolled parties in that country. Uncontrolled Distributors A, B, C, D and E distribute competing products of approximately similar value in Country R. All such products are unbranded. Relatively complete data are available regarding the functions performed, assets used or contributed and risks assumed by the uncontrolled distributors and the contractual terms under which they operate in the uncontrolled transactions. In addition, data are available to ensure accounting consistency between all of the uncontrolled distributors and RCO. As the available data are sufficiently complete and accurate to conclude that it is likely that all material differences between the controlled and uncontrolled transactions have been identified, and reliable adjustments are made to account for such differences, the results of each of the uncontrolled distributors may be used to establish a range of arm’s length resale price margins to apply to the transactions involving RCO. |
| The facts are the same as in Example 4, except that sufficient data are not available to determine whether any of the uncontrolled distributors provide warranties or to determine the payment terms of the contracts. As differences in these contractual terms could materially affect price or profits, the inability to determine whether these differences exist between the controlled and uncontrolled transactions diminishes the reliability of the results of the uncontrolled comparables. However, the reliability of the results may be enhanced by the application of a statistical method when establishing an arm’s length range. |
| The facts are the same as in Example 4, except that Product Z is branded with a valuable trademark that is owned and was developed by WCO. Companies A, B and C distribute unbranded competing products, while Companies D and E distribute products branded with other trademarks. Companies D and E do not own any rights in the trademarks under which their products are sold. The value of the products that Companies A, B and C sell are not similar to the value of the products sold by S. The value of products sold by Companies D and E, however, is similar to that of Product X. Although close product similarity is not as important for a reliable application of the Resale Price Method as for the Comparable Uncontrolled Price Method, significant differences in the value of the products involved in the controlled and uncontrolled transactions may affect the reliability of the results. In addition, because in this case it is difficult to determine the effect the trademark will have on price or profits, reliable adjustments for the differences cannot be made. Because transactions involving Companies D and E have a higher level of comparability than those involving Companies A, B and C with Company S, only transactions involving Companies D and E should be included in determining the arm’s length gross margin. |
In a controlled transaction involving a sale of tangible property, the CPM generally focuses on the related manufacturing company as the tested party in the transfer pricing analysis. The CPM may also be used in the case of services rendered, in which case the service provider is generally designated as the tested party.
The CPM begins with the costs incurred by the supplier of property or services in a controlled sale of property or services to a related purchaser. An appropriate cost plus markup is then added to this cost, to calculate an appropriate gross profit in light of the functions performed, risks assumed, assets used or contributed and market conditions.
The advantage of commercial databases is that they can provide the ability to sort quickly and retrieve selectively only the potential comparables that meet certain qualitative and quantitative screening criteria. Criteria commonly used for initial screening include industry codes, scale or sales volume, ownership and related/associated enterprises, availability of financial data or certain financial ratios.
The CPM is most often used to analyze transfer pricing issues involving tangible property or services. It is typically applied to manufacturing or assembling activities and relatively simple service providers. The method evaluates the arm’s length nature of an intragroup charge by reference to the gross profit markup on costs earned by independent suppliers of tangible property or services in comparable uncontrolled transactions. That is, it compares the gross profit markup earned by the tested party for manufacturing the product or for providing the service to the gross profit markups earned by comparable companies engaged in comparable transactions.
| Figure 4.D.3 Cost Plus Method (CPM) |
Figure 4.D.3. explains this further. Associated Enterprise 1, an electrical goods manufacturer in Country 1, manufactures under contract for Associated Enterprise 2. Associated Enterprise 2 instructs Associated Enterprise 1 on the quantity and quality of the goods to be produced. Associated Enterprise 1 will be guaranteed sales to Associated Enterprise 2 and will face little risk. As Associated Enterprise 1 is less complex in terms of functions, assets and risks than Associated Enterprise 2, the analysis under the CPM would focus on Associated Enterprise 1 as the tested party. Since Associated Enterprise 1 is a simple manufacturer, the CPM may be the best method of analysis in this case. The CPM analyzes whether the gross profit markup earned by Associated Enterprise 1 is at arm’s length by reference to the gross profit margins earned by companies manufacturing comparable goods for (or providing comparable services to) unrelated parties. The CPM thus does not directly test whether the transfer price is at arm’s length by comparing prices. As such, it is a less direct (transactional) method as compared to the CUP Method.
Under the CPM (when applied to sales of tangible property) an arm’s length price equals the controlled party’s cost of producing the tangible property plus an appropriate gross profit markup, defined as the ratio of gross profit to cost of goods sold (excluding operating expenses) for a comparable uncontrolled transaction.
The formula for the transfer price in intercompany transactions of products is as follows: TP = COGS x (1 + cost plus markup), where:
► TP = the Transfer Price of a product sold between a manufacturing company and a related company;
► COGS = the Cost of Goods Sold to the manufacturing company; and
► Cost plus markup = gross profit markup defined as the ratio of gross profit to cost of goods sold. Gross profit is defined as net sales minus cost of goods sold.
The financial ratio considered under the CPM is the gross profit markup, which is defined as the ratio of gross profit to cost of goods sold of the supplier of products or services. As discussed above, gross profit equals net sales minus cost of goods sold. For a manufacturing company, cost of goods sold equals the cost of producing the goods sold. It includes direct labour costs, direct material costs and factory overheads associated with production.
It is important to note that commercial databases rely on publicly available information. These databases may not be available in all countries, since not all countries have the same amount of publicly available informa-tion about their companies. Further, due to the different disclosure and filing requirements depending on the legal form of the enterprise, the information may not be in a similar format, making it difficult to compare. Most of these databases are used to compare the results of companies rather than of transactions because third-party information at a transactional level is generally not readily available.
As with the RPM, accounting consistency is extremely important in applying the CPM. Application of different accounting principles to the controlled and the uncontrolled transaction may result in inconsistent calculation of the gross profit. Appropriate adjustments of accounting principles may be necessary to ensure that gross profit markups are calculated uniformly for the tested party and the comparable companies. For example, the comparable manufacturers may differ from the related party manufacturer in reporting certain costs (e.g. costs of R&D) as operating expenses or as cost of goods sold. Differences in inventory valuation methods will also affect the computation of the gross profit markup.
The costs and expenses of a company normally fall into the following three groups: (1) direct cost of producing a product or service (e.g. cost of raw materials); (2) indirect costs of production (e.g. costs of a repair department that services equipment used to manufacture different products); and (3) operating expenses (e.g. selling, general & administrative expenses or SG&A expenses). The gross profit margin used in the CPM is a profit margin that is calculated by subtracting only the direct and indirect costs of production from the sales price. In contrast, a net margin analysis would also consider operating expenses. Due to differences in accounting standards between countries, the boundaries between the three groups of costs and expenses are not the same in each and every case. Suitable adjustments may need to be made. In a situation in which it is necessary to consider certain operating expenses to obtain consistency and comparability, a net margin method may be more reliable than the CPM, as discussed below.
| It is assumed that Associated Enterprise 1, a bicycle manufacturer that manufactures bicycles under contract for Associated Enterprise 2, earns a gross profit markup of 15 per cent on its cost of goods sold and classifies certain expenses (such as warranty expenses) as operating expenses that are not part of cost of goods sold. Four comparable independent manufacturers are identified which earn gross profit markups between 10 per cent and 15 per cent. However, these comparable companies account for those particular (warranty) expenses as part of cost of goods sold. The unadjusted gross profit markups of these comparables are thus not calculated on the basis of the same costs as the gross profit markup of Associated Enterprise 1. Unless reliable adjustments can be made to the calculation of the gross profit markups of the uncontrolled transactions or, in the alternative, of Associated Enterprise 1, for purposes of consistency, a net margin method may be more reliable. |
The arm’s length price or margin can result from looking at comparable functionality (manufacturers of broadly similar types of product) or from making a transactional comparison by looking at each transaction the tested party engages in involving comparable products (e.g. manufacturing of different types of bicycle).
The arm’s length (range of) gross profit markup(s) can be established in the following two ways:
► Transactional comparison: the gross profit markup earned by the related party manufacturer when selling goods to an independent enterprise in a comparable uncontrolled transaction, which previously has been rejected as an internal comparable for purposes of applying the CUP Method because for example it involves different models of bicycle. If for example the controlled transaction involves the manufacturing of recreational bicycles, but the unrelated transactions involve bicycle rickshaws etc., these may involve broadly similar products, with comparable accounting measures of COGS making gross margin comparisons sufficiently reliable; and
► Functional comparison: the gross profit markups earned by independent companies performing functions and incurring risks comparable to the functions performed and risks incurred by the related party manufacturer. Functional comparison involves a search for comparable manufacturing companies.
The Comparable Uncontrolled Price (CUP) Method compares the price charged for property or services transferred in a controlled transaction to the price charged for property or services transferred in a comparable uncontrolled transaction in comparable circumstances. The CUP Method may also sometimes be used to determine the arm’s length royalty rate for the use of an intangible, or to determine an arm’s length rate of interest on a loan. CUPs may be based on either “internal” comparable transactions or on “external” comparable transactions. Figure 4.D.1 below explains this distinction in the context of a particular case study.
| Figure 4.D.1 Comparable Uncontrolled Price (CUP) Method |
In practice, transactional comparisons are more likely to achieve the broad product and accounting consistency required for the CPM than functional comparisons. In a transactional comparison, much more information about the controlled and uncontrolled transactions is available (e.g. contractual terms). In a functional comparison that is based on information provided in publicly available databases and in the annual reports of comparable companies and the tested party, much less specific information is available with respect to the functions performed and risks incurred by the companies. Consequently, it would be more likely in these circumstances that a net margin method would be used, see paragraph 4.5.2.
Based on benchmarking and financial analyses an arm’s length range of gross profit markups earned by comparable independent manufacturers will be determined. If the gross profit markup earned by the related party manufacturer falls within this range, then its transfer price will be considered arm’s length.
An uncontrolled transaction is considered comparable to a controlled transaction in applying the CPM if:
► There are no differences between the transactions being compared that materially affect the gross profit markup; or
► Reasonably accurate adjustments can be performed to adjust for the effect of such differences.
As with the RPM, and for the same reasons, close similarity of products in the controlled and uncontrolled transactions is less important under the CPM than under the CUP Method, while functional comparability (including comparability of risks assumed and assets used or contributed) is more important. However, because significant differences in products may necessarily result in significant differences in functions, assets and risks, the controlled and uncontrolled transactions should ideally involve the provision of similar services or the manufacturing of products within the same product family.
As the gross profit markup remunerates a manufacturing or service company for performing a manufacturing or service function, the CPM necessarily requires functional comparability. If there are material differences in functions performed, assets used or contributed and risks assumed that affect the gross profit markups achieved on the controlled and the uncontrolled transactions, adjustments should be made to account for such differences. In general, comparability adjustments should be made on the gross profit markups of the uncontrolled transactions. Sometimes the operating expenses in connection with the functions performed will need to be taken into account because differences in functions performed may be reflected in the operating expenses, as service providers may very well have no COGS.
Application of the CPM entails a number of potential difficulties associated with the determination of the costs (in addition to those associated with inconsistent accounting treatments):
► The link between costs incurred and the market price can be very weak so that gross profit margins can vary greatly each year;
► It is important to apply a comparable markup to a comparable cost base;
► Differences between the tested party and potential comparables should be identified. In this respect, it is crucial to consider differences in the level and types of expenses in connection with the functions performed, assets used or contributed and risks assumed between the controlled and uncontrolled transactions. If differences merely represent the differing efficiencies of the parties being compared, no adjustment to the gross profit markup should be made. If, however, additional functions are being performed by the tested party, then it may be necessary to determine an appropriate additional return to such function and permit a separate return for these additional functions.
Similarly, if the comparables perform functions not performed by the tested party, then the return for such functions should be subtracted from the gross profit margin applied to the controlled transactions of the tested party;
► Careful consideration should be given to what costs should be excluded from the cost base. An example of costs that should
be excluded are particular costs that are passedthrough (that is, costs explicitly not subject to a markup) in both the tested party and comparable transactions;
► As with the Resale Price Method, accounting consistency is extremely important. Gross profit markups should be calculated uniformly for the associated enterprise and the independent enterprises;
► Historical costs should in principle be ascribed to individual units of production. If costs differ over a period, average costs over the period may be used;
► One can use either budgeted cost or actual cost in applying the CPM. On the one hand using actual costs will better reflect the risks faced by a contract manufacturer.32 On the other hand, third parties will usually use budgeted costs in determining prices of products being sold into the market. That is, they will not charge the customer an additional amount at the end of the year if actual costs are higher than budgeted costs; and
► As the costs considered in using the CPM are only those of the manufacturer of the goods or the service provider, a problem may arise with respect to the allocation of some costs between the manufacturer or service provider and the purchaser of goods or services.
Note that if the contract is based on actual costs, the contractual terms may include incentives or penalties depending on the performance of the contract manufacturer.
The strength of the CPM is that the method is based on internal costs, the information on which is usually readily available to the multinational enterprise.
Commercial databases can be a practical and sometimes cost-effective way of identifying external comparables and may provide the most reliable source of information, depending on the facts and circum-stances of the case. However, a number of limitations to commercial databases are frequently identified and commercial databases are not avail-able in all countries. Further, they may be costly to use and many developing countries may not have access to them. The use of commercial databases is not compulsory, and it may be possible to identify reliable comparables from other sources of information, including internal comparables as described above, or a manual identification of third parties (such as competitors) that are regarded as potential sources of comparables for the taxpayer’s controlled transaction.
The weaknesses of the CPM include the following:
► There may be a weak link between the level of costs and the market price;
► The data on gross profit markups may not be comparable due to accounting inconsistencies and other factors;
► Accounting consistency is required between the controlled and uncontrolled transactions;
► The analysis is onesided, i.e. it focuses only on the related party manufacturer or service provider; and
► Since the method is based on actual costs, there may be no incentive for the controlled manufacturer to control costs.
The CPM is typically applied in cases involving the intragroup sale of tangible property where the related party manufacturer performs limited manufacturing functions or in the case of intragroup provision of services. The method usually assumes the manufacturer or service provider has low risks, because the level of the costs will then better reflect the value being added and hence the market price.
The CPM is also generally used in transactions involving a contract manufacturer, a toll manufacturer or a low risk assembler which does not own product intangibles and assumes little risk. The related customer involved in the controlled transaction will generally be much more complex than the manufacturer (or service provider) in terms of functions performed (e.g. conducting marketing and selling functions, coordination of production and sales, giving instructions to the contract manufacturer about the quantity and quality of production, and purchasing raw materials in some cases), risks assumed (e.g. market risk, credit risk and inventory risk) and assets used or contributed (e.g. product or other intangibles). The contract manufacturer is thus the less complex and as such should be the tested party in the transfer pricing analysis.
The CPM is usually not a suitable method to use in transactions involving a fullyfledged manufacturer which owns or develops unique and valuable product intangibles as it will be very difficult to locate independent manufacturers with comparable product intangibles. That is, it will be hard to establish a profit markup that is required to remunerate the fullyfledged manufacturer for its unique and valuable intangibles. In a typical transaction structure involving a fullyfledged manufacturer and related sales companies (e.g. commissionaires), the sales companies will normally be the less complex entities involved in the controlled transactions and will therefore be the tested party in the analysis. The RPM is typically more easily applied in such cases.
| LCO, a domestic manufacturer of computer components, sells its products to FS, its foreign distributor. UT1, UT2 and UT3 are domestic computer component manufacturers that sell to uncontrolled foreign purchasers. Relatively complete data are available regarding the functions performed, assets used or contributed and risks borne by UT1, UT2 and UT3, and the contractual terms in the uncontrolled transactions. In addition, data are available to ensure accounting consistency between all the uncontrolled manufacturers and LCO. The available data are sufficiently complete to conclude that it is likely that all material differences between the controlled and uncontrolled transactions have been identified, and reliable adjustments are made to account for the differences. An acceptable range of arm’s length cost plus markups can thus be established. |
Facts of the Case Study: The controlled transaction in this figure involves the sale of bicycles between Associated Enterprise 1, a bicycle manufacturer in Country 1, and Associated Enterprise 2, a bicycle importer in Country 2, which purchases, imports and resells the bicycles to unrelated bicycle dealers in Country 2. Associated Enterprise 1 is the parent company of Associated Enterprise 2.
| The facts are the same as in Example 1 except that LCO accounts for supervisory, general and administrative costs as operating expenses, which are not allocated to its sales to FS. The gross profit markups of UT1, UT2 and UT3, however, reflect supervisory, general and administrative expenses because they are accounted for as costs of goods sold. Accordingly, the gross profit markups of UT1, UT2 and UT3 must be adjusted to provide accounting consistency. If data are not sufficient to determine whether such accounting differences exist between the controlled and uncontrolled transactions the reliability of the results will be diminished. |
| The facts are the same as in Example 1 above, except that under its contract with FS, LCO uses materials consigned by FS. UT1, UT2 and UT3, on the other hand, purchase their own materials, and their gross profit markups are determined by including the costs of the materials. The fact that LCO does not carry an inventory risk by purchasing its own materials, while the uncontrolled producers carry inventory, is a significant difference that may require an adjustment if the difference has a material effect on the gross profit markups of the uncontrolled producers. Inability to reasonably ascertain the effect of the difference on the gross profit markups will affect the reliability of the comparison between the tested party and UT1, UT2 and UT3. |
| FS, a foreign corporation, produces apparel for PCO, its parent corporation. FS purchases its materials from unrelated suppliers and produces the apparel according to designs provided by PCO. The local taxing authority identifies ten uncontrolled foreign apparel producers that operate in the same geographic market and are similar in many respects to FS. Relatively complete data are available regarding the functions performed, assets used or contributed and risks borne by the uncontrolled producers. In addition, data are sufficiently detailed to permit adjustments for differences in accounting practices. However, sufficient data are not available to determine whether it is likely that all material differences in contractual terms have been identified. For example, it is not possible to determine which parties in the uncontrolled transactions bear currency risks. As the differences in these contractual terms could materially affect price or profits, the inability to determine whether differences exist between the controlled and uncontrolled transactions will diminish the reliability of these results. Therefore, the reliability of the results of the uncontrolled transactions must be enhanced for those comparables to be useful, for example by investigating whether they incur currency risk (through reviewing annual reports and the like). |
Transactional profit methods analyze the profits arising from particular controlled transactions in order to determine whether the transfer price is at arm’s length. Transactional profit methods can be divided into two categories; the TNMM and the PSM. This section covers the TNMM and the next section covers the PSM.
These methods differ from traditional methods in that the analysis is not necessarily based on particular comparable uncontrolled transactions involving identical or perhaps even broadly comparable products. Often, and depending on the facts and circumstances, the analysis is based on the net return (generally, the earnings before interest, tax and extraordinary items, i.e. EBIT) realized by various companies engaged in a particular line of business (that is, a series of transactions that are appropriate to be aggregated). Among other situations, one of the transactional profit methods, the PSM, being a twosided method, may be applied when both of the associated enterprises make unique and valuable contributions (e.g. in the form of intangibles). Detailed guidance on when the PSM may be appropriate can be found at section 4.6.3 below.
4.2.1.3 In applying the CUP Method to determine whether the price charged for bicycles sold in this controlled transaction is at arm’s length, the following information is assumed to be available for consideration:
► The price charged for bicycles sold in a comparable uncontrolled transaction between Associated Enterprise 1 and Unrelated Party C (i.e. transaction #1);
► The price charged for bicycles sold in a comparable uncontrolled transaction between Associated Enterprise 2 and Unrelated Party A (i.e. transaction #2); and
► The price paid for bicycles sold in a comparable uncontrolled transaction between Unrelated Party A and Unrelated Party B (i.e. transaction #3).
It is rare that enterprises use transactional profit methods to actually determine their prices. However, the profit resulting from a controlled transaction might be quite a good signal to establish whether the transaction was affected by conditions that differ from those that would have been made between independent enterprises in otherwise comparable circumstances. Where complexities make the application of the traditional transaction methods addressed in the previous chapter unreliable, transactional profit methods may prove to be a good solution.
Transactional profit methods and particularly the TNMM are also commonly used by taxpayers for practical reasons. The TNMM often provides a useful check on the accuracy and reasonableness of the traditional transaction methods or is used to supplement these methods. In some situations, it may also be easier to find comparables that can be used to apply the TNMM than it is to find transactional comparables that can be used to apply the CUP, Resale Price or CPM.
The TNMM examines the net profit margin relative to an appropriate base (e.g. costs, sales, assets) that a taxpayer realizes from a controlled transaction (or transactions that are appropriate to be aggregated). The profit margin indicators are discussed below. The TNMM looks at the profits of one of the related parties involved in a transaction, as do the CPM and RPM. The party examined is referred to as the tested party.
The TNMM compares the net profit margin33 (relative to an appropriate base) that the tested party earns in the controlled transactions to the same net profit margins earned by the tested party in comparable uncontrolled transactions or alternatively by independent comparable companies. As it uses net margins to determine arm’s length prices the TNMM is a less direct method than the CPM and RPM that compares gross margins. It is also an even more indirect method than the CUP Method that directly compares prices. Many factors may affect net profit margins but may have nothing to do with transfer pricing.
For example, return on total costs, return on assets, and operating profit to net sales ratio.
The TNMM is used to analyze transfer pricing issues involving tangible property, intangible property or services. It may be applied when one of the associated enterprises employs intangible assets, the appropriate return to which cannot be determined directly. In such a case the arm’s length compensation of the associated enterprise(s) not employing the intangible asset is determined by determining the margin realized by enterprises engaged in a similar function with unrelated parties. The remaining return is consequently left to the associated enterprise controlling the intangible asset. The return to the intangible asset is, in practice, a “residual category” being the return left over after other functions have been appropriately compensated at arm’s length. This implies that the TNMM is applied to the least complex of the related parties involved in the controlled transaction. This approach has the added benefit that generally more comparable data are available and fewer adjustments are required to account for differences in functions and risks between the controlled and uncontrolled transactions. In addition, the tested party typically does not own valuable intangible property. Where the TNMM is applied in cases that involve intangibles the guidance of chapter 6. of this Manual should be noted. See 6.1.4.
Comparable uncontrolled transactions, such as transaction #1 or #2, which involve a transaction between the tested party and an uncontrolled party, are referred to as internal comparables. Comparable uncontrolled transactions such as transaction #3, which involves a transaction between two parties neither of which is an associated enterprise, are called external comparables. The application of the CUP Method involves a detailed transactional comparison whereby the controlled and uncontrolled transactions are compared based on the five comparability factors mentioned in Chapter 3.
The TNMM is more tolerant of, and flexible in, accommodating certain minor differences in functionality (where such functions are reflected in operating expenses), and in accounting practices than the RPM or the CPM. Table 4.T.1. below and the paragraphs following it illustrate this distinction.34
Table 4.T1
Transactional Net Margin Method (TNMM)
| Sales price | = | $10 000 |
| Cost of goods sold | = | $ ? |
| Gross profit | = | $ ? |
| Operating expenses | = | $ 2 000 |
| Net profit (5% of price) | = | $ 500 Determined by reference to Comparables |
Associated Enterprise 1, a bicycle manufacturer in Country 1, sells bicycles to Associated Enterprise 2 which resells the bicycles to an independent enterprise, an unrelated bicycle dealer in Country 2. Assume that Associated Enterprise 1 is the more complex party, controlling a variety of technology and operating intangibles. Associated Enterprise 2, on the other hand, is a routine distributor/ reseller which does not make unique and valuable contributions. The CUP Method would compare the price charged in the controlled transaction between Associated Enterprise 1 and Associated Enterprise 2 with the price charged in comparable uncontrolled transactions. If the CUP Method cannot be applied, the CPM and RPM may be considered.
All figures and numeric examples are for practical purposes only. They do not reflect actual cases or actual arm’s length figures or margins.
The CPM is likely to be relatively unreliable in this case because it would treat the more complex entity, Associated Enterprise 1, as the tested party. Given that Associated Enterprise 2 performs relatively simple activities, the RPM could be considered. Under the RPM, the sales company, the less complex of the two entities involved in the controlled transaction, will be the tested party. The analysis would entail a search for distributors which sell broadly similar products, which perform functions, use or contribute assets and assume risks comparable to those of Associated Enterprise 2, and for which appropriate data relating to gross profits can be obtained.
Examining multiple year data may be useful in a comparability analysis but it is not a systematic requirement. Multiple year data may be used where they add value and make the transfer pricing analysis more reliable. Circumstances that may warrant consideration of data from multiple years include the effect of business cycles in the taxpayer’s industry or the effects of life cycles for a particular product or intangible. However, the exist-ence of any such cycle needs to be aptly demonstrated by the taxpayer.
| Example of a Typical Process of Database Screening— Reviewing Comparability25 The process described in this box is simply an example of a commonly-used approach to conducting a database search for comparables. In any particular case, however, consideration should be given to the most economically significant characteristics of the accurately delineated transaction under review as the basis for determining appropriate screening criteria. For instance, it may be unhelpful to eliminate potential comparables from other markets where geographic or market similarity is not in fact critical to the prices or profits associated with the transaction under review. 1 Industry/business activity qualification codes A common starting point in the comparables search process is industry/ business activity classification codes. Countries may have a set of industry classification codes used for statistical or other purposes. Alternatively, Standard Industry Classification codes (SIC) the Nomenclature of Economic Activities in the European Community (NACE), and the North American Industry Classification System (NAICS) industry codes are the most commonly used by taxpayers and tax administrations worldwide. This screen will typically also enable a focus on the appropriate level of the market. 2 Geography/region/country/market It generally makes sense to consider potential comparables from the same geographic market as the tested party in the first instance as this will minimize any potential differences that could have a material effect on the comparison. However, in many countries, especially develop-ing countries, the availability of independent comparables, or of public information on independent comparables, is limited. Where there is no information available relating to transactions that are in other respects comparable to the tested transaction and relate to the same geographic market, it is important to consider the relative importance of the various comparability factors, bearing in mind that the aim is to find the most reliable comparables available. That is, other comparability factors such as those relating to the functional analysis may be more important in a particular case than the geographic market, in which case, this screening criterion could be demoted or even abolished. Where the market is considered to be a key comparability factor, it may be appropriate for this to be defined as a country, a region, or group of countries that are considered to be either (a) a single or largely integrated market; or (b) sufficiently similar to the market of the tested transactions. 3 Key words related to the business activity This stage generally involves identifying and searching for key terms related to the tested party’s business and the activities associated with the transactions under review. For example, key words may relate to the most important activities and the level of market. 4 Availability of financial information For practical reasons, potential results are screened out if information in relation to the relevant years are missing. In the event that multiple year data is being used, it may be pragmatic to screen out potential results with two or more years of information missing. 5 Level of revenues (or other indicators of size, such as assets or number of employees) In some cases, the magnitude of the business can have a material effect on comparability. If so, it can be relevant to include a screen based on the size of the potential comparables, as measured by, for instance, turnover, asset values, employees, etc. In addition, it may be appropriate in some cases to examine more carefully any companies with continuous losses. At arm’s length, independent companies may make losses, but this would not be expected to continue for an extended period of time. 6 Independence, public vs privately held companies A fundamental element of the arm’s length principle is that of a comparison between the controlled transaction and uncontrolled transactions. Therefore, most search processes will seek to eliminate transactions that have been entered into by entities that belong to a multinational group. However, where no more reliable comparables are available, group members with no or only very limited related party transactions which do not materially affect their gross or net margin may need to be used. There can be advantages to restricting the search to publicly held companies since disclosure and audit requirements for such companies are typically more rigorous. Public companies are also generally required to provide considerably more detail in their audited financial statements and in the accompanying notes and management review of operations. However, in many cases, whether or not a potential comparable is publicly held is likely to be less important as a comparability factor than other considerations such as functional similarity. Thus, where data are scarce, eliminating potential comparables on this basis may not be pragmatic. 7 Type of financial accounts This stage focusses on identifying entities that provide either consolidated or statutory financial accounts. Financial information of comparables should not be affected/influenced by connected circumstances. Care must be taken when using consolidated financial accounts. They may be used only if the functions conducted by the consolidated group equate to those of the tested party. It is also important to ensure potential comparables’ financial statements are audited, conform to generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP), have sufficient detail, and are available in a relatively consistent form over time. 8 Active/inactive entities Inactive entities are usually screened out in the search process as circumstances between active and inactive entities are generally different. 9 Primary screening for functional comparability This is an important step, which will often need to be continued in the secondary and tertiary screening phases of the process. In some cases, the key word search related to business activities described above can be refined by screening transactions based on certain amounts in the financial accounts which would indicate the existence (or absence) of certain functions or assets. For example, if the tested party does not undertake any research and development and does not use any intangibles which may have been created through R&D, it may be appropriate to include a screen to exclude entities which have non-negligible amounts of R&D expenses. See also the discussion of diagnostic ratios in section 3.5.2.34 et seq. It may also be possible to screen out those entities engaged in significant business activities that are substantially dissimilar to the controlled transaction and are not adequately disclosed to allow segmentation. Entities engaging in significant non-comparable activities should be excluded from the set of comparables. |
Ibid. See Box 7, p.43.
Sometimes it may be more reliable to choose the TNMM and compare net profits. If, for example, there is different reporting of the cost of goods sold and operating expenses for the tested party and the comparable distributors, so that the gross profit margins reported are not comparable and reliable adjustments cannot be made, the RPM may be relatively unreliable. However, this type of accounting inconsistency will not affect the reliability of the TNMM, as this method examines net profit margins instead of gross profit margins. Also, as further discussed below, the fact that the TNMM requires less product comparability than the traditional transaction methods (and as such has a greater tolerance to product differences and cost accounting differences compared to traditional transaction methods) can be a significant practical benefit of using TNMM.
The application of the TNMM would entail an analysis of the least complex party— in this case the distributor. Such an analysis would entail a search for comparable distributors taking into account the comparability standard of this method. An application of the TNMM focusing on a related party manufacturer as the tested party could be appropriate in a situation in which Associated Enterprise 1 is instead, a contract manufacturer and has no unique and valuable intangibles. In such a case, the contract manufacturer may be the least complex entity, as MNEs often separate the ownership of valuable technology intangibles from the manufacturing function. The CPM would normally be considered if the CUP Method cannot be applied. However, due to the accounting inconsistency mentioned above, it may be appropriate to apply the TNMM using a financial ratio based on net profit margin that is appropriate for a manufacturer (e.g. return on total costs).
In addition to information from commercial databases of company results, a number of other sources of information may be useful, including in some cases, price databases, publications and exchange quoted prices for commodities. Such publications may provide useful information on market conditions and prices of standard commodities. They can also be useful in understanding relevant market dynamics for the products concerned. In some cases, it may be appropriate to use quoted prices from commodities or futures exchanges in order to benchmark transfer prices for commodities (see 4.7. on the application of a separate transfer pricing method relating to transactions in commodities). However, as with any such source of potential benchmarking data, its reliability in pricing the tested transaction must be carefully considered, particularly in the case of information in relation to less transparent markets, i.e. those in which information on individual transactions is not generally available to those who are not a party to the transaction. In such cases, the published information will typically be based on the publisher’s observations and contacts with key market participants. While this kind of information can be useful, it should be borne in mind that the publisher may have made adjustments to the raw data in ways that may not be apparent. Such data should therefore be used with care.
The next question is how to determine the transfer price based on the application of the TNMM. The mechanism of the TNMM is similar to the mechanisms of the RPM and CPM, as can be seen in the following examples.
Related party distributor: In applying the RPM to establish an arm’s length transfer price, the market price of products resold by the related party distributor to unrelated customers (i.e. sales price) is known, while the arm’s length gross profit margin is determined based on the results of comparable uncontrolled transactions, i.e. a benchmarking analysis. The transfer price or cost of goods sold of the related party distributor is the unknown variable. Assuming a resale price of $10,000 and a gross profit margin of 25 per cent, the transfer price amounts to $7,500:
Table 4.T.2
Mechanism of the Resale Price Method (RPM)
The quantitative screening step involves further screening of the financial information relating to the potential comparables for the relevant period to determine whether their activities are comparable to that of the tested party, and whether they report sufficient data at the level needed to apply the selected transfer pricing method. Under this step, the search process focuses on a rigorous review of each transaction or company in the potential independent comparable pool against the full range of specific screening criteria. The objectives at this stage are verification, final screening and selection. This process is based on trial and error and requires multiple data sources, cross-checks and selected follow-up and confirmation of factual data. It will often be difficult to find ‘perfect’ comparables for a controlled transaction. Therefore, in undertaking the screening process, judgement is required. If the primary screening is applied too rigorously and inflexibly, it may be the case that no apparent comparables remain. In such cases it is particularly important to focus on the most economically significant characteristics of the controlled transaction while dispensing with other, less critical screening criteria for the transaction at hand. Where this is the case, secondary screening can be particularly useful to refine the set of potential comparables.
For example, such screening may be done using diagnostic ratios. Diagnostic ratios are financial ratios applied to reject comparables that do not fulfil certain criteria. Particularly in cases where broad primary screening criteria have been used, diagnostic ratios can be used to improve the reliability of a potential set of comparables by helping to distinguish between results from transactions with differing degrees of comparability, and seeking to eliminate those with a lower degree of comparability from the potential comparable set. One or a combination of diagnostic ratios may be used as a kind of additional screen to narrow a range in cases where comparability defects remain in the potential comparables set that are otherwise difficult to eliminate, resulting in a range that would otherwise be overly wide.
The determination of an arm’s length transfer price based on the
| Initially | Benchmarking analysis | ||
| Resale price | $10 000 | $10 000 | |
| Cost of goods sold | ? | 7 500 | |
| Gross profit | ? | 2 500 | (25% of resale price) |
TNMM is similar. The main difference from a gross margin analysis is that operating expenses are considered in calculating the transfer price. In applying the TNMM to the tested party distributor, the resale price and the operating expenses of the related party distributor are known, while the arm’s length net profit margin (i.e. net profit to sales ratio)35 is found on the basis of a benchmarking analysis. The cost of goods sold and the gross profit are the unknown variables. Assuming a resale price of $10,000, operating expenses of $2,000 and an arm’s length net profit margin of 5 per cent, using the TNMM, the transfer price of $7,500 is determined by working backwards using the available information. That is, a transfer price of $7,500 is required to ensure that the distributor earns a net profit margin of 5 per cent.
Table 4.T.3
Mechanism of the Transactional Net Margin Method (TNMM)
| Initially | Benchmarking analysis | ||
| Resale price | $10 000 | $10 000 | |
| Cost of goods sold | ? | 7 500 | |
| Gross profit | ? | 2 500 | |
| Operating expenses | 2 000 | 2 000 | |
| Operating profit | ? | 500 | (5% of resale price) |
Net profit equals operating profit before interest and taxes.
When applying the CUP Method, an uncontrolled transaction is considered comparable to a controlled transaction if:
► There are no differences in the transactions being compared that would materially affect the price; or
► Reasonably accurate adjustments can be performed to account for material differences between the controlled and the uncontrolled transaction.
For example, a ratio of marketing and advertising expenses to sales could be an indicator of the intensity of the marketing and advertising function undertaken. This ratio could then be used to refine the arm’s length range based on comparables with similar levels of marketing / advertising intensity in cases where the tested party makes sales to independent customers. Note that it would generally not be reliable to use a diagnostic ratio which comprises elements that are themselves the subject of related party transactions.
The application of diagnostic ratios is based on the assumption that a diagnostic ratio reflects a value driver of a particular line of business and is a reflection of the comparable functional and risk profile. In practice, it also depends on data availability. Most countries with transfer pricing rules acknowledge that the application of a net margin method is less sensitive to product and functional similarity than a traditional transaction method. However, functional comparability is still required in practice so a proper functional analysis and a good understanding of the tested business are essential in determining what diagnostic ratios may be useful, and to help avoid “cherry picking” or subjective use. Diagnostic ratios enable some of the features of a potential comparable that are economically relevant for the comparable search process to be taken into account when performing the comparable search.
Related party manufacturer: In applying the CPM to establish an arm’s length transfer price, the cost of goods sold by the related party manufacturer is known. The arm’s length gross profit markup is based on a benchmarking analysis. The transfer price or sales revenue of the related party manufacturer is the unknown variable. Assuming cost of goods sold of $5,000 and a gross profit markup of 50 per cent, the transfer price amounts to $7,500.
Table 4.T.4
Mechanism of the Cost Plus Method (CPM)
| Initially | Benchmarking analysis | ||
| Resale price | ? | $7 500 | |
| Cost of goods sold | $5 000 | 5 000 | |
| Gross profit | ? | 2 500 | (50% of cost of goods sold) |
In order to identify potential comparables with a similar functional and risk profile a diagnostic ratio measuring, for example, the level of wage costs compared to an appropriate base (e.g. total operating costs or total turnover) can be used as a yardstick to measure the level of technical manpower employed by comparable companies engaged in software development. The identification of a diagnostic ratio will depend upon several factors such as geographical location; the nature of the business, product and services; the product and service market etc. Using diagnostic ratios may help to identify comparables which are in line with the functional and risk profile of the tested party.
In applying the TNMM to the tested party manufacturer instead of the CPM, the cost of goods sold and the operating expenses of the related party manufacturer are known. A benchmarking analysis will determine the arm’s length net profit of the related party manufacturer using a profit level indicator such as the ratio of net profit to total cost. The sales price and the gross profit are the unknown variables. Assuming cost of goods sold of
$5,000, operating expenses of $1,000 and an arm’s length net profit to total cost ratio of 25 per cent, the transfer price amounts to $7,500. Table 4.T.4. illustrates that working backwards using the available information leads to the determination that the sales price (i.e. transfer price in this case) is $7,500.
Table 4.T.5
Mechanism of the Transactional Net Margin Method (TNMM)
|
Initially | Benchmarking analysis | ||
| Resale price | ? | $7 500 | |
| Cost of goods sold | $5 000 | 5 000 | |
| Gross profit | ? | 2 500 | |
| Operating expenses | 1 000 | 1 000 | |
| Operating profit | ? | 1 500 | (25% of total cost) |
In performing the comparability analysis, the controlled transactions and uncontrolled transactions should be compared based on the comparability factors mentioned earlier and stated in detail in Chapter 3. In determining the degree of comparability between the controlled transactions and uncontrolled transaction #1 in Figure 4.D.1, for example, the following factors should be taken into account: (i) characteristics of goods being transferred or services provided, (ii) contractual terms, (iii) economic circumstances and (iv) business strategies. For the functional analysis it is necessary to analyze the functions performed, the risks assumed and the assets used or contributed.
The diagnostic ratio is applied by using cut-off criteria. With this method, financials of the tested party are used to calculate the diagnostic ratios and these ratios are then used to create minimum or maximum values to reject companies. Once a cut-off is determined, generally all the values above or below a particular range of the cut-off will be eliminated, depending upon the facts and circumstances of each case. Subsequently, based on the functional and risk profile of the tested party, all companies with a diagnostic ratio above and below the cut-off range will be excluded.
| Examples of Diagnostic Ratios Diagnostic ratios can be a useful additional tool for refining a comparable search. Depending on the facts and circumstances, many different ratios can be envisaged. In determining an appropriate ratio to apply, consideration should be given to what are the most economically significant characteristics of the tested transaction, and how such characteristics might be reflected in the accounts. It should be noted, however, that the ratio should not use amounts that relate to controlled transactions. For example, if an entity makes sales to a related party, it would generally not be reliable to use a sales-based ratio in the screening process. Some examples of diagnostic ratios are set out below: ► days of inventory (average) ► days receivable (average) ► days payable (average) ► turnover per employee ► fixed assets over total assets ► inventory over sales ► operating assets to total assets ► fixed assets to total sales ► fixed assets to number of employees ► operating expenses to sales ► cost of sales to sales ► inventory to total assets ► research and development expenses to total costs ► advertising and promotion expenses to total costs |
| FP is a publicly traded Country A corporation with a Country B subsidiary named BCO that is under audit for its 2009 taxable year. FP manufactures a consumer product for worldwide distribution. BCO imports the assembled product and distributes it within Country B at the wholesale level under the FP name. FP does not allow uncontrolled taxpayers to distribute the product. Similar products are produced by other companies but none of them is sold to uncontrolled taxpayers or to uncontrolled distributors.
|
There is data from a number of independent operators of wholesale distribution businesses. These potential comparables are further narrowed to select companies in the same industry segment that perform similar functions and bear similar risks to BCO. An analysis of the information available on these taxpayers shows that the ratio of operating profit to sales is the most appropriate profit level indicator, and this ratio is relatively stable where at least three years are included in the average. For the taxable years 2007 to 2009, BCO shows the above results.
After adjustments have been made to account for identified material differences between BCO and the uncontrolled distributors, the average ratio of operating profit to sales is calculated for each of the uncontrolled distributors. Applying each ratio to BCO would lead to the comparable operating profit (COP) for BCO shown in the table below.
| Uncontrolled Distributor | OP/S (%) | COP ($) |
| A | 1.7 | 8 840 |
| B | 3.1 | 16 120 |
| C | 3.8 | 19 760 |
| D | 4.5 | 23 400 |
| E | 4.7 | 24 440 |
| F | 4.8 | 24 960 |
| G | 4.9 | 25 480 |
| H | 6.7 | 34 840 |
| I | 9.9 | 51 480 |
| J | 10.5 | 54 600 |
The data are not sufficiently complete to conclude that it is likely that all material differences between BCO and the uncontrolled distributors have been identified. The Country B taxing authority measures the arm’s length range by the interquartile range of results, which consists of the results ranging from $19,760 to $34,840. Although BCO’s operating income for 2009 shows a loss of $4,600, the tax authority determines that no allocation should be made, because BCO’s average reported operating profit of $20,000 ([$27,000 + $37,600 + $(4,600)]/3) is within the interquartile range, which extends from COP observation 19,760 to 34,840.
Adapted from the US Internal Revenue Service Intercompany Transfer Pric-ing Regulations. Available from https://www.irs.gov/pub/irs-apa/482_regs.pdf.
The final stage in the comparables search involves manual consideration of each potential comparable (particularly in the case where the results concerned are the gross or net profits of potentially comparable companies, rather than individual pricing data). For instance, this may involve a review of websites and other publicly available information on the shortlist of potentially comparable companies to ensure they are as reliable as possible.
| The facts are the same as in Example 2. In addition, the taxing authority examines the taxpayer’s results for the 2010 taxable year. As in Example 2, the taxing authority increases BCO’s income for the 2009 taxable year by $24,250. The results for the 2010 taxable year, together with the 2008 and 2009 taxable years, are as follows:
|
The interquartile range of comparable operating profits, based on average results from the uncontrolled comparables and average sales for BCO for the years 2008 to 2010, ranges from $15,500 to $30,000. In determining whether an adjustment for the 2010 taxable year may be made, the taxing authority compares BCO’s average reported operating profit for the years 2008 through 2010 to the interquartile range of average comparable operating profits over this period. BCO’s average reported operating profit is determined without regard to the adjustment made with respect to the 2009 taxable year. Therefore, BCO’s average reported operating profit for the years 2008 to 2010 is ($10,000). Because this amount of income falls outside the interquartile range, the tax authority determines that an adjustment may be appropriate. To determine the amount, if any, of the adjustment for the 2010 taxable year, the taxing authority
compares BCO’s reported operating profit for 2010 to the median of the comparable operating profits derived from the uncontrolled distributors’ results for 2010. The median of the comparable operating profits derived from the uncontrolled comparables results for the 2010 taxable year is $12,000. Based on this comparison, the taxing authority increases BCO’s 2010 taxable income by $22,000, the difference between the median of the comparable operating profits for the 2010 taxable year and BCO’s reported operating profit of ($10,000) for the 2010 taxable year.
Other sources of comparable data may include the following:
Certain adjustments may be needed in order to satisfy the requirements for accuracy and reliability of the comparables so that the financial results of the comparables are stated on the same basis as those of the tested party. However, the following important issues should be considered before such a comparability adjustment is made:
Comparability adjustments are part of the comparability analysis and should be appropriately documented in order to ensure their reliability.
| DCO is a developer, producer and marketer of products. DCO develops a new “high tech product” (HTP) that is manufactured by its foreign subsidiary HCO located in Country H. HCO sells the HTP to JCO (an H Country subsidiary of DCO) for distribution and marketing in Country H. The taxable year 2009 is under audit, and the taxing authority examines whether the royalty rate of 5 per cent paid by HCO to DCO is an arm’s length consideration for the HTP technology. Based on all the facts and circumstances the taxing authority determines that the TNMM will provide the most reliable measure of an arm’s length result. HCO is selected as the tested party because it engages in relatively routine manufacturing activities, while DCO engages in a variety of complex activities using unique and valuable intangibles. Finally, because HCO engages in manufacturing activities, it is determined that the ratio of operating profit to operating assets is an appropriate profit level indicator. Uncontrolled taxpayers performing similar functions cannot be found in Country H. It is determined that data available in Countries M and N provide the best match of companies in a similar market performing similar functions and bearing similar risks. Such data are sufficiently complete to identify many of the material differences between HCO and the uncontrolled comparables and to make adjustments to account for such differences. However, data are not sufficiently complete to ensure that no material differences remain. In particular, the differences in geographic markets might have materially affected the results of the various companies. In a separate analysis it is determined that the price that HCO charged to JCO for the HTP is an arm’s length price. Therefore, HCO’s financial data derived from its sales to JCO are reliable. HCO’s financial data from 2007 to 2009 are as follows:
Applying the ratios of average operating profit to operating assets for the 2007 to 2009 taxable years (derived from a group of similar uncontrolled comparables located in Countries M and N) to HCO’s average operating assets for the same period provides a set of comparable operating profits. The interquartile range for these average comparable operating profits is $3,000 to $4,500. HCO’s average reported operating profit for the years 2007 to 2009 ($21,500) falls outside this range. Therefore, the taxing authority auditing 2009 determines that an adjustment may be appropriate for the 2009 taxable year. To determine the amount, if any, of the adjustment for the 2009 taxable year the tax authority compares HCO’s reported operating profit for 2009 to the median of the comparable operating profits derived from the uncontrolled distributors’ results for 2009. The median result for the uncontrolled comparables for 2009 is $3,750. Based on this comparison the district director increases royalties that HCO paid by $21,500 (the difference between $25,250 and the median of the comparable operating profits, $3,750).37 |
It is assumed here that the time limit to make adjustments to the years 2007 and 2008 has expired.
Comparability adjustments can be divided into three broad categories:
Accounting adjustments: There are various types of difference in accounting standards and practices between the tested party and third parties used as comparables which may lead to measurement errors if adjust-ments are not made. The accounting differences can be grouped under the following categories of classification differences and differences under relevant law or standards.
Product comparability should be closely examined in applying the CUP Method. A price may be materially influenced by differences between the goods sold or services rendered in the controlled and uncontrolled transactions. The CUP Method is appropriate especially in cases where an independent enterprise buys or sells products that are identical or very similar to those sold in the controlled transaction or in situations where services are rendered that are identical or very similar to those rendered in the controlled transaction.
Accounting differences may relate to classification where certain operations are recorded in different accounting lines. For example:
Other accounting differences that may warrant adjustments relate to situations where a comparable or tested party may have a choice under relevant law or standards to capitalize or expense certain costs like R&D expenses. Thus, a company may have developed significant intangibles but have no intangible property in its assets on the balance sheet. Similarly, different accounting law or standards may be applicable to goodwill recognition and amortization which may create significant discrepancies between the comparables and the tested party. In many cases it is difficult to identify differences in accounting standards due to the following reasons:
Balance sheet adjustments are intended to account for different levels of inventories, receivables, payables, interest rates etc. The most common balance sheet adjustments, made to reflect differing levels of accounts receivable, accounts payable and inventory, are known as working capital adjustments. The fact that balance sheet adjustments are found most commonly in practice does not mean that they should be performed on a routine or mandatory basis. A significantly different level of asset intensity may require further investigation of the comparability characteristics of the potential comparable and merely making a working capital adjustment would not alleviate the problem.
It is very common for the tested party and each of the potential comparables to differ materially in the amount of working capital (inventory, accounts receivable and payable). Such differences are generally caused by differences in the financing terms of purchases and sales that the company receives from its suppliers and extends to its customers, and by differences in the levels of inventory held by the company. Such differences may generate substantial differences in the working capital structure and may have an impact on the operating profits of the companies due to the financing costs. In order to reduce the effect of differences in terms of purchases and sales and levels of inventory on profitability, adjustments can be made to reflect the time value of the receivables, payables and inventory of the comparables. This, however, should be done only if such adjustments can be reasonably made and they improve comparability.
| MCO manufactures parts for industrial equipment and sells them to its foreign parent corporation. For purposes of applying the TNMM, 15 uncontrolled manufacturers that are similar to MCO have been identified. MCO has a significantly lower level of accounts receivable than the uncontrolled manufacturers. Since the rate of return on capital employed is used as the profit level indicator, both operating assets and operating profits must be adjusted to account for this difference. Each uncontrolled comparable’s operating assets is reduced by the amount (relative to sales) by which they exceed MCO’s accounts receivable. Each uncontrolled comparable’s operating profit is adjusted by deducting imputed interest income on the excess accounts receivable. This imputed interest income is calculated by multiplying each uncontrolled comparable’s excess accounts receivable by an interest rate appropriate for shortterm debt. |
Although product comparability is important in applying the CUP Method, the other comparability factors should not be disregarded. Contractual terms and economic conditions are also important comparability factors. Where there are differences between controlled and uncontrolled transactions, adjustments should be made to enhance reliability.
| KCO is the Country K subsidiary of a foreign corporation. KCO purchases goods from its foreign parent and sells them in the Country K market. For purposes of applying the TNMM, 10 uncontrolled distributors that are similar to KCO have been identified. There are significant differences in the level of accounts payable among the uncontrolled distributors and KCO. To adjust for these differences the taxing authority increases the operating profit of the uncontrolled distributors and KCO to reflect interest expense imputed to the accounts payable. The imputed interest expense for each company is calculated by multiplying each company’s accounts payable by an interest rate appropriate for its shortterm debt. |
Adjustments for inventory, accounts receivable and accounts payable follow the same basic mechanics. First a value is calculated as the difference between the ratio of the balance sheet item in question to net sales for the comparables and the same ratio for the tested party. The denominator of these fractions will be an arm’s length amount for the tested party, for example the denominator of a Profit Level Indicator (PLI) can be used. An alternative approach would be to calculate these ratios with respect to operating expenses such as where gross profit/operating expenses are the PLI used. The resulting difference in the ratios is then multiplied by an interest rate and by the net sales of the comparables to generate an amount to adjust the income statements of the comparables. Then the PLI of that comparable is recomputed.
Several profit level indicators (PLIs) are allowed under the TNMM, typically based on operating profit. A PLI is a measure of a company’s profitability that is used to compare comparables with the tested party. A PLI may express profitability in relation to (i) sales, (ii) costs or expenses or (iii) assets. More specifically, the PLI can be the operating profit relative to an appropriate base (e.g. costs, sales or assets). With the help of an appropriate profit level indicator the net profitability of the controlled transaction is compared to the net profitability of the uncontrolled transactions.
Table 4.T.6
Overview of Profit Level Indicators38
| Return on Assets (ROA) | Operating profit divided by the operating assets (normally only tangible assets) |
| Return on Capital Employed (ROCE) | Operating profit divided by capital employed which is usually computed as the total assets minus cash and investments |
| Operating Margin (OM) | Operating profit divided by sales |
| Return on Total Costs (ROTC) | Operating profit divided by total costs |
| Return on Cost of Goods Sold | Gross profit divided by cost of goods sold |
| Berry Ratio | Gross profit divided by operating expenses |
Please note that not necessarily all PLIs mentioned can be used when apply-ing the TNMM.
Key Definitions:
► Gross profit is arrived at by deducting from the total sales the cost of sales, including all the expenses directly incurred in relation to those sales;
► Operating profit or operating income is the income of a company net of direct and indirect expenses but before deduction for nonoperating expenses such as interest and taxes. It is defined as sales minus COGS minus operating expenses (alternatively expressed as gross profit minus operating expenses). “Operating profit” is a better term than “net profit” in this context because net profit is also used to represent the profit of a company after interest and taxes have been subtracted. Further, the term operating profit indicates more clearly that only profits resulting from operating activities are relevant for transfer pricing purposes.
Although all of the above PLIs are possible, the three PLIs: (i) return on capital employed (ROCE), (ii) operating margin (OM) and (iii) return on total cost (ROTC) are most used in practice. The Berry Ratio may also be used, but subject to certain concerns about its inappropriate use.39 An OM is typically used for marketing, sales and distribution activities; a Berry Ratio may sometimes be used for service or distribution activities; and full cost plus, ROCE or ROA are typically used for manufacturing activities. The ROA and ROCE divide operating profit by a balance sheet figure. These PLIs are based on assets actively employed in the business. Such tangible assets consist of all assets minus investments (e.g. in subsidiaries), minus cash and cash equivalents beyond the amount needed for working capital. In the case of the ROA a deduction is also made for intangible assets such as goodwill. These two PLIs may, for example, be used for leasing companies. This type of PLI may be the most reliable if the tangible operating assets have a high correlation to profitability. For example, a manufacturer’s operating assets such as property, plant and equipment could have more impact on profitability than a distributor’s operating assets, since often the primary valueadded by a distributor is based on services it provides and these are often less dependent on operating assets. The difference between the ROA and the ROCE is that the ROA focuses on the assets used or contributed while the ROCE focuses on the amount of debt and equity capital that is invested in the company.
For the Berry Ratio to be the most appropriate transfer pricing method to determine the remuneration of a controlled transaction (for instance for the distribution of products) the following elements have to be present: (i) the value of the functions performed, taking into account assets used or contributed and risks assumed, should be proportional to the operating expenses; (ii) the value of the functions performed, taking into account assets used or contributed and risks assumed, is not materially affected by the value of the products distributed; in other words it is not proportionate to sales; and (iii) the tested party does not perform other significant functions in the transaction under examination that should be remunerated using another method or profit level indicator.
Reasonably accurate adjustments may be possible for differences in:
► The type and quality of the products. E.g. unbranded Kenyan coffee beans as compared with unbranded Brazilian coffee beans;
► Delivery terms. E.g. Associated Enterprise 1 in Figure 4.D.1 sells similar bicycles to Associated Enterprise 2 and Unrelated Party C. All relevant information on the controlled and uncontrolled transactions is available to Associated Enterprise 1, and hence it is probable that all material differences between the transactions can be recognized.30 The uncontrolled price can be adjusted for the difference in delivery terms to eliminate the effect of this difference on the price;
► Volume of sales and related discounts. E.g. Associated Enterprise 1 sells 5,000 bicycles to Associated Enterprise 2 for US$90 per bicycle, while it sells 1,000 similar bicycles to Unrelated Party C. The effect of the differences in volume on price should be analyzed, and if the effect is material, adjustments should be made for example based on volume discounts in similar markets;
► Product characteristics. E.g. the uncontrolled transactions to an unrelated party in Figure 4.D.1 involve bicycles on which modifications have been made. However, the bicycles sold in the controlled transactions do not include these modifications. If the product modifications have a material effect on price, then the uncontrolled price should be adjusted to take into account this difference in price;
► Contractual terms. E.g. Associated Enterprise 1 sells the bicycles to Associated Enterprise 2 offering a 90day credit term but the contract terms dictate that all sales to Unrelated Party C are cash on delivery;
► Allocation of risks. E.g. Associated Enterprise 1 is exposed to inventory risk related to sales by Associated Enterprise 2 and the risk that customers of Associated Enterprise 2 will default on their bicycle purchase loans; whereas in the transaction between Associated Enterprise 1 and Unrelated Party C, the latter is exposed to the inventory risk and the risk of its customers’ default. This difference in risk allocation must be analyzed and its effect on price quantified before Associated Party 2’s prices and Unrelated Party C’s prices can be considered comparable; and
► Geographical factors. E.g. Associated Enterprise 1 sells bicycles to Associated Enterprise 2 located in South Africa, while Unrelated Party C, to which it also sells the same bicycles, is located in Egypt. The only material difference that could be identified between the controlled and uncontrolled transactions concerns the locale. To perform adjustments to account for this
difference one might have to consider, for example, differences in inflation rates between South Africa and Egypt, the competitiveness of the bicycle market in the two countries and differences in government regulations if relevant.
It is assumed that the circumstances relating to the controlled and uncon-trolled transactions are similar. The only material difference that could be identified between the transactions is that the price relating to the controlled transaction is a delivered price (i.e. including transportation and insurance), while the uncontrolled transaction #3 is made ex works, with the buyer taking responsibility from the named place of delivery, which is Associated Enterprise 1’s factory (the “works”). It is possible to perform reasonably accurate adjustments for this difference.
Other PLIs listed above are ratios between income statement items. PLIs based on income statement items are often used when fixed assets do not play a central role in generating operating profits. This is often the case for wholesale distributors and service providers. Operating margin has often been used when functions of the tested party are only broadly similar but not close to those of the comparables, since differences in function have less effect on operating profit than on gross profit.
The Berry Ratio represents a return on a company’s valueadded functions on the assumption that these valueadded functions are captured in its operating expenses. It has been observed in practice that the Berry Ratio is used as a PLI for distributors and service providers. The Berry Ratio assumes that there is a relationship between the level of operating expenses and the level of gross profits earned by distributors and service providers in situations where their valueadded functions can be considered to be reflected in the operating expenses. Consequently, it may be appropriate to use the Berry Ratio if the selling or marketing entity is a service provider entitled to a return on the costs of the provision of its services. It should be noted, however, that the Berry Ratio is very sensitive to functions and cost classification. The Berry Ratio has other limitations, including that it tends to only work if the comparables are functionally similar; and the comparables do not own significant intangible assets.
In general, the gross margin has not been favoured as a PLI because the categorization of expenses as operating expenses or cost of goods sold may be somewhat arbitrary or even subject to manipulation, making comparisons between the tested party and comparables difficult or impossible.
The choice of PLI depends on the facts and circumstances of a particular case. Thus, it may be useful to consider multiple PLIs. If the results tend to converge, that may provide additional assurance that the result is reliable. If there is, on the other hand, a broad divergence between the different PLIs it may be useful to examine important functional or structural differences between the tested party and the comparables.
The arm’s length (range of) net profit margins can be determined by way of:
► Transactional comparison: the net profit margin that the tested party enjoys in a comparable uncontrolled transaction which initially has been rejected as an internal comparable under the CUP Method due to its strict requirements; and
► Functional comparison: the net profit margins enjoyed by independent companies performing functions and assuming risks comparable to those of the tested party.
In identifying potentially comparable uncontrolled transactions or enterprises two approaches are possible: the “additive” and the “deductive”.
Much more detailed information will be available with respect to the controlled and uncontrolled transactions if a transactional comparison is possible, because the related parties involved have participated in these transactions. The degree of comparability can then be analyzed more thoroughly
than in a functional comparison in which only public information is available (e.g. business descriptions in a database, annual reports and Internet data). This may imply that the reliability of transactional comparisons will be higher than that of functional comparisons in practice. In fact, if sufficient data exist to reliably apply a TNMM based on a transactional comparison it may be possible to apply a traditional transaction method.
The following example shows how the results of the comparable are adjusted to reflect the tested party’s levels of working capital. The other approach could be that calculations are made to adjust the tested party’s results to reflect the comparables levels of working capital or to adjust both the tested party’s results and the comparables results to reflect “zero” working capital. In general, working capital adjustments are calculated for inventory, trade receivables and trade payables. The method for calculating working capital adjustments for all three accounts follows the same basic approach. To begin with, a value is calculated for differences in levels of working capital between the tested party and the comparable party relative to the appropriate base. The appropriate base will be the denominator used for calculating the PLI which can either be costs, sales or assets. The resulting difference in the ratios is then multiplied by an appropriate interest rate. A working capital (WC) adjustment so computed is either adjusted to the PLI of the comparable or to the Tested Party’s PLI for the purpose of comparison.
Figure 3.D.6
Working Capital Adjustments
However, functional comparison will be more often used in practice as the data necessary for functional comparison may be available whereas the data needed for transactional comparison is not. Let us assume that a related party distributor is the tested party in the example presented in Table 4.T.7. The TNMM is applied and the profit level indicator is the operating margin. A benchmarking analysis is performed, identifying four comparable independent distributors considering the comparability standard of the TNMM. The arm’s length range of operating margin earned by these comparable distributors falls between 2 per cent and 6 per cent. Because the operating profit margin earned by the related party distributor falls within this range (e.g. 4 per cent), its transfer price is considered to be at arm’s length.
Table 4.T.7
Functional Comparison Example
|
| Comparable A | Comparable B | Comparable C | Comparable D | Tested Party |
| Revenue | 100 000 | 120 000 | 125 000 | 130 000 | 122 000 |
| COGS | 80 000 | 92 400 | 95 000 | 89 700 | 92 720 |
| Gross profit | 20 000 | 27 600 | 30 000 | 40 300 | 29 280 |
| Operating expenses | 18 000 | 24 000 | 25 000 | 32 500 | 24 400 |
| Operating profit | 2 000 | 3 600 | 5 000 | 7 800 | 4 880 |
| Operating profit margin |
2% |
3% |
4% |
6% |
4% |
Product comparability is most important in applying the CUP Method, as differences in products will result in different prices. The CPM and the RPM are less dependent on product comparability and focus on func-tional comparability because differences in functions that are reflected in differences in operating expenses may lead to a broad range of gross margins. However, the TNMM is even less dependent on product comparability and functional comparability than the traditional transaction methods, because net margins are less influenced by differences in products and functions. The TNMM focuses on broad product and functional comparability.
However, the comparability standard to be applied to the TNMM requires a high degree of similarity in several factors between the tested party and the independent enterprises that may adversely affect net margins. Net margins may be affected by factors that have no effect, or a less significant effect, on gross margins or prices due to the variation of operating expenses between companies. These factors may be unrelated to transfer pricing.
4.2.2.6 Reasonably accurate adjustments may not be possible for:
► Unique and valuable trademarks. E.g. assuming Associated Enterprise 1 in Figure 4.D.1 is engaged in manufacturing high value branded goods, and attaches its valuable trademark to the goods transferred in the controlled transaction, while uncontrolled transaction #1 concerns the transfer of goods that are not branded. The effect of the trademark on the price of a watch may be material. However, it will be difficult, if not impossible, to adjust for the effect of the trademark on price since the trademark is an intangible asset that is unique. If reasonably accurate adjustments cannot be made to account for a material product difference the CUP Method may not be the appropriate method for the transaction; and
► Fundamental differences in the products. E.g. if the products being sold are significantly different from the products sold in the proposed comparable transaction it may not be possible to adjust for the product differences.
Specific factors that may affect net margins include, but are not limited to:
If material differences between the tested party and the independent enter-prises are affecting the net margins, reasonably accurate adjustments should be made to account for such differences.
The TNMM is less reliable when applied to the aggregate activities of a complex enterprise engaged in various different transactions or functions. The method should be used to analyze only the profits of the associated enter-prise that are attributable to simpler controlled transactions or functions. The TNMM should thus generally not be applied on a company-wide basis if the company is involved in a number of different controlled transactions or functions which are not properly evaluated on an aggregate basis. However, it may be possible to apply the TNMM when the aggregate activities/transac-tions are sufficiently interlinked, as for example when similar sales functions are conducted for products in similar product lines.
The TNMM should be applied using transactions or functions of independent enterprises that are comparable to the controlled transactions or functions being examined. Furthermore, results attributable to transactions between the tested party and independent enterprises should, if possible, be excluded when evaluating controlled transactions. The latter point is illus-trated in Table 4.T.8. below. In this example, the Related Party Distributor purchases products from both the Related Party Manufacturer and an Unrelated Manufacturer and resells these products to customers. The tax authorities in the country of the Related Party Distributor apply the TNMM to determine whether the transfer prices of the Related Party Distributor are at arm’s length. A benchmarking study performed by the tax authorities shows that comparable distributors earn an operating profit margin between 2 and 6 per cent.
The tax authorities initially apply the TNMM to the profit and loss statement (P&L) of the Related Party Distributor as a whole. The operating profit margin earned by Related Party Distributor is 2 per cent based on aggregate transactions and therefore falls within the arm’s length range. The aggregated transactions therefore appear to be at arm’s length leading to a preliminary conclusion that no transfer pricing adjustment is required. However, if the TNMM was applied only to the results of the distributor from the resale of products acquired in controlled transactions, the conclusions would be very different. The operating profit margin earned by Related Party Distributor on its resale of the products acquired in the controlled transactions is minus 3 per cent, which falls outside the arm’s length range of comparable operating profit margins and therefore appears to merit an adjustment. It appears from the P&L that in this example the resale of products acquired by Related Party Distributor in controlled transactions generated operating losses, which reduced the aggregate income of the distributor as a whole. Consistency is important in quantifying these amounts. Net margins should be calculated uniformly between the tested party and the independent enterprises.
Table 4.T.8
Specific Transactions Versus Company as a Whole
|
| Controlled Transactions | Uncontrolled Transactions | Aggregate Transactions |
| Sales | $100 000 | $100 000 | $200 000 |
| COGS | 90 000 | 78 000 | 168 000 |
| Gross profits | 10 000 | 22 000 | 32 000 |
| Operating expenses | 13 000 | 15 000 | 28 000 |
| Operating profit | (3 000) | 7 000 | 4 000 |
| Operating profit margin | 3% | 7% | 2% |
An analysis considering multiple year data is sometimes better able to take into account the effects on profits of product life cycles and shortterm economic conditions. Different countries may take different views about when multiple year data should be analyzed and indeed whether that is allowed under a country’s domestic law; see multiple year data analyses at the examples at 4.5.5.3 and 4.5.5.4. Use of an arm’s length range should also be considered, to reduce the effects of differences between the controlled and uncontrolled entities. However, the use of a range may not sufficiently take into account circumstances where the profits of a taxpayer are affected by a factor unique to that taxpayer.
In the additive approach a list is prepared of potentially comparable uncontrolled transactions or of third parties which are believed to be carrying out potentially comparable transactions. As much information as possible on these transactions is then collected to confirm whether they are in effect acceptable comparables, based on the economically relevant characteristics for the controlled transaction. When adopting the additive approach special care should be taken in order to provide a reliable comparable; it is not sufficient that a third-party company be well-known in the relevant industrial sector. Also, one needs to avoid potential third-party companies who themselves have transfer pricing issues.
The strengths of the TNMM include the following:
► Net margins are less affected by transactional differences than price and less affected by functional differences than gross margins. Product and functional comparability are thus less critical in applying the TNMM;
► Less complex functional analysis is needed, as the TNMM is applied to only one of the related parties involved;
► Because the TNMM is applied to the less complex party, it can be used even though one of the related parties holds intangibles for which comparable returns cannot be directly determined;
► The TNMM is applicable to either side of the controlled transaction (i.e. to either the related party manufacturer or the distributor); and
► The results resemble the results of what could be referenced as a modified RPM or CPM of analysis.
The weaknesses of the TNMM include the following:
► Net margins are affected by factors (e.g. variability of operating expenses) that do not have an effect, or have a less significant effect, on price or gross margins. These factors affect net profits and hence the results of the TNMM but may have nothing to do with the company’s transfer pricing. It is important to consider these (nonpricing) factors in the comparability analysis;
► Information challenges, including the unavailability of information on profits attributable to uncontrolled transactions;
► Measurement challenges, as these may make it difficult to determine sales revenue, operating expenses and assets relating only to the relevant controlled transactions or functions in order to calculate the selected profit level indicator. For example, if a related party distributor purchases products from both a related party and an unrelated enterprise for resale it may be impossible to determine sales revenue, operating expenses and assets attributable to only the controlled transactions to reliably perform a net margin method of analysis. Furthermore, if the companies are engaged in different activities it may also be very difficult to allocate sales revenue, operating expenses or assets between the relevant business activity and other activities of the tested party or the comparables. This measurement problem is an important consideration in practice;
► The TNMM is applied to only one of the related parties involved. The arm’s length net margin found may thus result in an extreme result for the other related parties involved in the controlled transaction (e.g. operating losses to one of the parties while
the other party is guaranteed a net profit). This weakness also applies to the CPM and RPM but may be more important under the TNMM because net margins are affected by factors that may have nothing to do with transfer pricing. A check of the results of all related parties involved may therefore be appropriate;
► It may be difficult to “work back” to a transfer price from a determination of the arm’s length net margins; and
► Some countries do not recognize the use of TNMM. Consequently, the application of TNMM to one of the parties to the transaction may result in unrelieved double taxation when the results of the TNMM analysis are not accepted for the other party.
TNMM is usually applied with respect to broad comparable functions rather than particular controlled transactions. Returns to these functions are typically measured by a PLI in the form of a net margin that may be affected by factors unrelated to arm’s length pricing. Consequently, one might expect the TNMM to be a relatively disfavoured method. Nevertheless, TNMM is often applied when two related parties engage in a continuing series of transactions and one of the parties makes a less complex and more routine contribution to profits than does the other. In fact, it has become the most commonly applied transfer pricing method in crossborder disputes, largely because of the unavailability of good transactional comparables in many circumstances.
TNMM may also be appropriate for use in certain situations in which data limitations on uncontrolled transactions make it more reliable than traditional methods. TNMM may be more attractive if the data on gross margins are less reliable due to accounting differences (i.e. differences in the treatment of certain amounts as cost of goods sold or operating expenses) between the tested party and the comparable companies for which no adjustments can be made as it is impossible to identify the specific costs for which adjustments are needed. In such a case, it may be more appropriate to use TNMM to analyze net margins, a more consistent measured profit level indicator than gross margins in case of accounting differences.
Consider the example in Table 4.T.9. below, where the related party distributor earns a gross profit margin of 20 per cent while the comparable distributor earns a gross profit margin of 30 per cent. Based on the RPM one could conclude that the transfer price of the related party distributor is not at arm’s length. However, this conclusion may be incorrect if, due to accounting inconsistency, the related party differs from the comparable distributor in allocating costs between cost of goods sold and operating expenses.
Notwithstanding the difficulties often associated with adjustments to address the sources of noncomparability described above, the need to make adjustments should not automatically prevent the use of the CUP Method. It is often possible to perform reasonably accurate adjustments. Where there are material differences between the transactions, if reasonable adjustments cannot be performed the reliability of the CUP Method is decreased. In these circumstances another transfer pricing method may be more appropriate.
For example, it may be the case that the related party distributor treats warranty costs as cost of goods sold while the comparable distributor treats such costs as operating expenses. If the warranty costs of the comparable distributor can be identified precisely, then appropriate adjustments on the gross profit level can be made. In practice, however, such detailed information about independent enterprises cannot be obtained from publicly available information. It may then be more appropriate to perform a net margin method of analysis where such accounting inconsistency has been removed. The result of applying the TNMM is that the net profit margin of 10 per cent for the related party distributor is similar to that of the comparable distributor. The transfer price is therefore considered to be at arm’s length based on the TNMM.
Also, if the available comparables differ with respect to products and functions, making it difficult to reliably apply the CPM or RPM at gross profit level, it may be more appropriate to apply the TNMM (at operating profit level) because net margins are generally less affected by such differences. For example, in performing a benchmarking analysis for the purposes of the CPM or RPM it may appear that exact product and functional comparables cannot be found. In fact, the comparables differ substantially regarding product and functional comparability. In such a case the TNMM might be more reliably applied using such comparables.
Finally, TNMM may be attractive if the data are simply not available to perform a gross margin method of analysis. For example, this may be the case if the gross profits of comparable companies are not published and only their operating profits are known. The cost of goods sold by companies may also not be available, therefore only a net margin method of analysis can be applied.
In addition to the three situations mentioned above, the TNMM is also used in practice by tax authorities to identify companies for an audit by analyzing their net profit margins. Furthermore, the TNMM is often applied to check and to confirm the results of traditional transactional methods. For example, the TNMM may be used in combination with the RPM to determine an arm’s length compensation for a distribution company.
Table 4.T.9
Accounting Differences: The Resale Price Method (RPM) as Compared with the Transactional Net Margin Method (TNMM)
|
| Related Party Distributor | Comparable Distributor |
| Selling price | 100 | 100 |
| Cost of goods sold | 80 | 70 |
| Gross profit | 20 | 30 |
| Operating expenses | 10 | 20 |
| Operating profit | 10 | 10 |
Transactional profit methods analyze the profits arising from particular controlled transactions in order to determine whether the transfer price is at arm’s length. Transactional profit methods can be divided into two categories; the Transactional Net Margin Method (TNMM) and the Profit Split Method (PSM). This section covers the PSM.
The deductive approach usually commences with a search on a database for comparable companies or transactions. These can be commercial databases developed by editors who compile accounts filed by companies with the relevant governmental authorities, or proprietary databases developed by advisory firms. The approach typically starts with the identification of a wide set of companies that operate in the same sector of activity, perform broadly similar functions, and do not present economic characteristics that are obviously different.
The PSM is a useful, but often complex method of determining transfer prices based on an allocation of the relevant, combined profits made by the related parties in relation to the transaction(s).
The PSM seeks to eliminate the effect on profits of special conditions made or imposed in a controlled transaction (or in controlled transactions that it is appropriate to aggregate) by determining the division of profits that independent enterprises would have expected to realize from engaging in the transaction or transactions.
The PSM may be appropriate where:
► each related party to the transaction makes unique and valuable contributions; and/or
► the business operations of the related parties are so highly integrated that they cannot be reliably evaluated in isolation from each other; and/or
► the parties share the assumption of economically significant risk or separately assume closely related risks.
See section 4.6.3 et seq.
The PSM starts by identifying the relevant profits, or indeed losses in relation to the controlled transactions. It then seeks to split those profits or losses between the associated enterprises involved on an economically valid basis in order to achieve an arm’s length outcome for each party. Typically, the split should reflect the relative value of each enterprise’s contribution, including its functions performed, risks assumed and assets used or contributed.
The PSM is also referred to as the transactional PSM. It can be distinguished from global formulary apportionment approaches in the following ways. The PSM typically does not start with the global or total combined profits of the entire MNE group. Rather, it begins from the relevant profits in relation to particular transactions between two or more associated enterprises. Moreover, in order to comply with the arm’s length principle, the way in which the method is applied should not be arbitrary, but rather should approximate the results achieved had the parties been independent of each other. In particular, the factors by which the relevant profits are split between the associated enterprises to the transaction are typically based on measures of their relative contributions to value creation rather than an arbitrary formula.
It should be emphasized that the exclusive use of either of the two approaches may not yield valuable results. Depending on the facts of each case, one of the above two approaches can be used or both in combination.
The strengths of the PSM include:
► It can provide a solution in cases where onesided methods are not appropriate because each party to the transaction makes a unique and valuable contribution which cannot be benchmarked;
► It can be used where the level of integration, or the sharing of risks between the related parties means that the contribution of each party cannot be evaluated in isolation from those of other parties;
► As it is a twosided method, all relevant parties to the transaction are directly evaluated, helping to ensure an arm’s length result for each entity based on the relative value of its specific contributions, even in cases where there may be specific or unique facts and circumstances which may not be present in transactions between independent enterprises; and
► It is able to deal with returns to synergies between contributions or profits arising from economies of scale.
The weaknesses of the PSM include:
The PSM is often complex to apply. It may be difficult to measure the relevant revenues and costs to be split between the related parties. In addition to measurement difficulties, the method is typically highly reliant on detailed data from the MNE (see also Chapter 12 of this Manual, which deal with transfer pricing documentation). Determining an appropriate way to split the profits can also be challenging. Care must be taken to ensure the application of the PSM is as objective as possible. Since reliable, direct information on the allocation of profits in comparable independent transactions is relatively rare, the PSM often relies on less direct information or proxies (e.g. relative value of the contributions of each party) in its application of the arm’s length principle.
As with any transfer pricing method, the profit split should be used where it is found to be the most appropriate method to the circumstances of the case. Primarily, this determination is based on the nature of the accurately delineated transaction in the context of its circumstances. The analysis to determine the accurately delineated transaction should consider the commercial and financial relations between the related parties, their functions performed, assets used or contributed, and risks assumed, and how the activities of the parties impact the transaction given the market context in which the transaction occurs.
While it is not possible to be prescriptive, as noted above, indicators that a profit split may be the most appropriate method include:
► Where each related party to the controlled transaction makes a unique and valuable contribution; and/or
► Where the business operations of the related parties are so highly integrated that the contributions of the parties cannot be reliably evaluated in isolation from each other; and/or
► Where the related parties either share the assumption of the key economically significant risks associated with the transaction(s), or separately assume closely related economically significant risks associated with the transactions.
While as noted above, the PSM can be a complex method to apply reliably, the determination of when it is the most appropriate method should be done as objectively as possible. That is, the PSM should not simply be regarded as a method of last resort. Moreover, while the method may require relatively more, or more detailed information from the taxpayer and its associated enterprise(s) than other methods, where it is indeed found to be the most appropriate method, reasonable efforts should be made to gather such necessary information which, after all, will typically be in the hands of the MNE.
The strengths of the CUP Method include that it:
► Is a twosided analysis as the price used reflects the agreed price between two unrelated parties to the transaction;
► Avoids the issue of which of the related parties involved in the controlled transaction should be treated as the tested party for transfer pricing purposes;31
► Involves a direct transactional comparison of a similar transaction between unrelated parties. That is, it is a more direct measure of the arm’s length price than the other methods, all of which
indirectly determine arm’s length prices through analysis of the arm’s length profits. As it is a more direct measure, the CUP Method is less susceptible to differences in nontransfer pricing factors (such as differences in the accounting treatment of costs between controlled and uncontrolled parties); and
► May be more readily used in instances such as, for example, transactions involving commodity products.
This issue arises if the other two traditional transaction methods are applied.
The other traditional methods determine a transfer price from the perspective of the tested party in the analysis. For example, if the RPM is used, the related party
sales company is the tested party in the transfer pricing analysis. If the CPM is used, the related party manufacturer will be the tested party. The resulting transfer prices based on these two methods may very well differ from each other. The choice of the tested party is also significant in the TNMM.
The presence of any one or more of these indicators suggests that the profit split may be the most appropriate method.
Where one or more of the above indicators is present, it is highly unlikely that reliable comparable transactions will be available. However, a lack of comparables per se is insufficient evidence to conclude that a profit split will be the most appropriate method. That is, the PSM should not become a convenient method to be applied in every case where close comparables cannot be identified.
In contrast, where none of the indicators are present and the accurate delineation of the transaction shows that one of the related parties to the transaction performs functions, uses or contributes assets and assumes risks that can be reliably benchmarked by reference to uncontrolled comparables, a profit split is unlikely to be the most appropriate method. In such cases, it is likely to be more reliable to apply a transfer pricing method making use of the uncontrolled comparables, even in cases where ‘perfect’ or closely comparable uncontrolled transactions are lacking (see 4.1.2.9). As with any other method, pricing practices used between independent parties engaged in similar transactions in the same industry or market can provide information relevant to the analysis of the most appropriate transfer pricing method.
It is sometimes argued that since the PSM is seldom used among independent enterprises, its application in controlled transactions should be similarly rare. Whether or not the premise of this argument is correct, where the method is found to be the most appropriate to the circumstances, this should not be a factor. Transfer pricing methods, including the PSM, are not necessarily intended to replicate the way in which independent parties establish prices among themselves; rather, they are a way in which the arm’s length principle can be applied in order to determine appropriate transfer prices in controlled transactions. That said, if there is evidence (e.g. from a joint venture or similar arrangement) that independent parties in comparable circumstances use a PSM among themselves, this may suggest that a profit split will also be the most appropriate method in relation to the controlled transactions.
Unique and Valuable Contributions by Each Party
Perhaps the clearest indicator that the PSM may be the most appropriate method involves situations in which each party to the controlled transaction makes unique and valuable contributions. Such contributions (e.g. functions performed, assets used or contributed, including intangibles) will be “unique and valuable” where:
(i) they are not comparable to contributions made by uncontrolled parties in comparable circumstances; and
(ii) they represent a key source of actual or potential economic benefits in the business operations.
Together, these factors mean that the application of other transfer pricing methods may not be capable of reliably determining an arm’s length outcome because neither related party can be reliably benchmarked by reference to comparables.
It is possible that companies identified using the additive approach may not have been identified when using the deductive approach. This may in some cases suggest that the search strategy applied under the deductive approach is not sufficiently robust and should be reassessed, or simply that certain information is not contained in the database selected. Therefore, the additive approach could be useful for assessing whether the deductive search strategy is reliable, comprehensive and appropriate given the economic characteristics being considered.
When evaluating whether certain contributions are unique and valuable such that a PSM may be the most appropriate, a consideration of the context of the transaction, including the industry and market in which it occurs and the factors which affect business performance in that context are particularly relevant. See section 6.2.2 et seq. in relation to unique and valuable intangibles. See also section 6.3.4.2 in relation to transfers of fully developed intangibles and section 6.5.4 in relation to transfers of partially developed intangibles or intangibles whose future profit potential is very uncertain.
|
Example: Unique and Valuable DAEMPE FunctionsDades Enterprises, a resident of country G is in the business of software development and provides tailored software solutions to customers. Dades Enterprises has developed certain proprietary software relating to 3D mapping of underground aquifers. Subsequently, Dades Limited, a resident of country I and a member of the same MNE as Dades Enterprises, enters into an agreement with Client M, an independent party, for the supply of similar software, tailored to the mapping of underground liquid hydrocarbons. Dades Enterprises provides Dades Limited with access to the relevant code, software designs and knowhow developed in the original project. The legal agreement between the entities states that Dades Enterprises will retain legal ownership in any and all resulting software based on the original product. Dades Limited engages its own engineers to further develop and enhance the original software. The resulting product is largely based on the original proprietary software developed by Dades Enterprises, but contains material enhancements. The transfer pricing analysis shows that both Dades Enterprises’ and Dades Limited made unique and valuable contributions to the development of the enhanced software developed for Client M. Dades Enterprises’ contribution was in the form of the unique and valuable proprietary software, and Dades Limited in the form of unique and valuable contributions to the development and enhancement of that software. As a result of this, the profit split is determined to be the most appropriate method in this case.
DAEMPE Functions |
| Example: Material But not Unique and Valuable DAEMPE Functions The facts are the same as in 4.6.3.11 above, except that the development and enhancement activity conducted by Dades Limited is less significant and relates only to enhancing the original proprietary software so that it accepts a wider range of data input formats. In this case, the contribution of Dades Limited is found not to be unique and valuable, and as a result, a onesided method is likely to be the most appropriate way of determining an arm’s length price for the transaction. |
Highly Integrated Operations
All MNEs have business operations which are integrated to some degree. However the PSM is likely to be the most appropriate method only in those cases where the integration is so significant that the way in which each party performs functions, uses assets, and assumes risks is interlinked with and cannot be reliably evaluated in isolation from the way in which another related party to the transaction performs functions, uses assets and assumes risks.
One example of highly integrated operations which may warrant the determination that the profit split is the most appropriate method could be where the related parties perform functions jointly, use common assets jointly and/or share the assumption of economically significant risks, and do so to such an extent that their respective contributions cannot be evaluated in isolation.
It is very important that the taxpayer or tax administration using the “additive” and/or “deductive” approaches justifies and documents the criteria used to include or exclude particular third-party data from the pool of potential comparables, in order to ensure a reasonable degree of objectivity and transparency in the process. In particular, the process should be reproducible by the taxpayer and by the tax administration that wishes to assess it. It is also very important that third-party data be refined using qualitative criteria. It would be improper to use financial information relating to the transactions of a large sample of companies that have been selected solely because they are classified in a database under a given industry code.
Another example may be where the integration between the related parties takes the form of a high degree of interdependency. For instance, a profit split may be found to be the most appropriate method where, under a longterm arrangement, each party has made a significant contribution (e.g. of an asset) whose value depends in large degree on the other party. In such cases, a profit split approach could allow for pricing which appropriately takes into account and varies with the outcome of the risks assumed by each party.
| Stefanelli Enterprises Inc (SEI), incorporated in country M and Stefanelli Enterprises Corporation (SEC), a resident of country N are members of an MNE group specializing in providing trade facilitation for agricultural commodities and bulk chemicals. The prices for the products themselves are largely determined based on exchangequoted prices. Stefanelli’s customers may be either suppliers or purchasers of the products and tend to operate in both country M and country N. Customers expect the same standard of service in both countries and rely on the integrated nature of Stefanelli’s operations in each country to provide a seamless service in moving products from and to the two countries. Customers contract with either SEI or SEC depending on the country in which the trade originates. Functions associated with marketing and customer relations are undertaken by SEI or SEC, depending on the location of the customer. A functional analysis shows that SEI and SEC perform similar activities in fulfilling customer contracts, including arranging transportation and warehousing where required, as well as facilitating customs clearance in the exporting and importing countries, irrespective of which enterprise holds the contract with the customer. Therefore, both SEI and SEC support each other and provide services to one another in fulfilling their respective contracts. SEI or SEC may also source supplies for buyers or seek out customers on behalf of suppliers, but they do not take positions on the purchase and sale of the products on their own account. Instead, they either act as an agent, or enter into simultaneous purchase and sale agreements. SEI and SEC perform a similar range of functions and must cooperate extremely closely in order to effectively and efficiently provide services to the group’s customers. The two entities jointly use and contribute to the further development of the group’s economically significant assets, being its knowhow, customer and supplier relationships, and its IT systems. The group markets itself to customers based on its efficiency and ability to provide seamless, integrated services in both countries M and N. Although market data exists about fees charged for trade facilitation services, it is found that the level of integration between SEI and SEC is so significant that their operations cannot be reliably evaluated in isolation from each other. As a result, the profit split is determined to be the most appropriate method in this case. |
| Schol Manufacturing, a resident of country A, is a fullyfledged manufacturer of plastic products for the food service industry. Schol Distribution, an associated enterprise of Schol Manufacturing located in country B, imports these products and distributes them in the local market to food processing companies, restaurants, caterers, retail food outlets etc. Schol Distribution only purchases products from Schol Manufacturing and is wholly dependent on the latter for its supply of products. Schol Distribution provides customer feedback to Schol Manufacturing, but does not otherwise participate in the design or production process. A functional analysis shows that Schol Distribution does not make any unique and valuable contributions. For instance, it has not developed a highly valuable trademark or tradename for the plastic products in the market. Schol Manufacturing is also highly dependent upon Schol Distribution since it does not have any sales or distribution functions in country A. Without Schol Distributions, it would find it very difficult to sell its products into the country A market. While Schol Manufacturing and Schol Distribution are highly dependent upon each other, an appropriate arm’s length remuneration for each of them can be determined without the need to consider their activities together. For example, the distribution activities of Schol Distribution might be able to be reliably benchmarked through the application of the transactional net margin method and looking to comparable uncontrolled distributors. In this case therefore, the profit split is unlikely to be the most appropriate method. |
Shared Risks
A further indicator that the profit split may be the most appropriate method is where the parties to the controlled transaction share the assumption of the economically significant risks in relation to the transaction (see 14.4.4.). It may also be the most appropriate method in cases where the parties separately assume risks that are so closely related or interlinked that the playing out of the risks of each party cannot be reliably isolated from the risks assumed by the counterparties.
The relevance of risksharing to the determination of the most appropriate transfer pricing method will depend greatly on the extent to which the risks concerned are economically significant such that each party should be entitled to a share of the relevant profits associated with the controlled transaction(s) had the transaction occurred at arm’s length.
After having developed a set of comparability criteria that are tailored to the specifics of the controlled transaction at issue, the next step is to conduct an initial identification and screening of potential independent comparables. The objective in this initial screening, where performed using a commercial database, is to identify substantially all companies that have a reasonable probability of demonstrating the threshold comparability requirements and of providing verifiable, objective documentary evidence of market pricing or profits. In other words, the desired initial result is to obtain the largest possible pool of potential independent comparables for subsequent screening, verification, and analysis. Where comparables are selected from information sources other than databases this part of the process may be different.
| Global trading of financial instruments often occurs under an integrated trading model where each enterprise or location within the MNE per forms the full range of trading and risk management functions. That is, the entities comprising the MNE jointly perform the same key functions, use the same key assets and assume the same economically significant risks. Moreover, each enterprise or location cannot act independently and instead must cooperate with others in order to successfully enter into transactions and manage and control the risks related to those transactions. Bank B operates as a global trader of financial instruments. The headquarters of the bank has a number of subsidiaries and branches around the world which underwrite and distribute financial products, act as marketmakers in securities and derivative instruments and perform brokerage functions for clients trading on stock and commodities exchanges around the world. As a result of these activities, Bank B mainly earns income in the form of interest and dividends from the inventories it holds to be a marketmaker on physical securities, (net) gains on the trading of financial instruments, income from derivatives and fees from clients. Bank B operates its global trading business using an integrated trading model. That is, traders in each of its main trading centres in countries X, Y and Z (each of which is in a time zone which is at least five hours different from the other) set prices and trade off a portfolio of positions (the “book”) while the market is open in that country. When the markets in a particular country close, responsibility for trading the book is passed on to the main trading centre in the next time zone. Traders in each main trading centre have full control over the book and may close positions passed to them and open new ones. However, the legal ownership of the book does not change with the handover in control. The overall parameters and limits for allowable trades are set by a committee which comprises roughly equal numbers from each of the main trading centres, however, in each location, traders enter into transactions with customers based on their own professional decision making. The functional analysis shows that the main trading centres in countries X, Y and Z use the assets of the business jointly, and they jointly assume the economically significant risks. Each trading location undertakes broadly the same functions or activities and must cooperate with the others in order to successfully undertake their business and manage and control the risks associated with those transactions. Significant additional efficiencies and profit opportunities arise from the ability of Bank B to trade its book on a 24hour basis. Traders in each location receive a base salary together with performance pay based on a share of a bonus pool determined according to the overall profitability of the book. In this example, the main trading centres, through their close cooperation and joint performance of activities, share the assumption of the economically significant risks. As a result, the profit split method is found to be the most appropriate method. |
Availability of Information
It will often be the case that where the profit split is found to be the most appropriate method, direct comparable transactions that may otherwise be used to price the transaction will not be found. However, information from uncontrolled transactions may still be relevant to the application of the PSM, for example in terms of the how the relevant profits should be split amongst the parties, or in the first part of a residual profit split. See 4.6.5.10 et seq. and 4.6.4.7, respectively; see also section 4.6.3.6 on the relevance of market information.
As was noted at the beginning of this section, in general, a PSM first determines the relevant profits, being the total profits in relation to the controlled transactions under examination, and then splits those profits on an economically valid basis. There are a number of different approaches as to how those relevant profits are allocated between the associated enterprises, including the contribution and residual analysis approaches. These are discussed in more detail below.
As with all transfer pricing methods, care should be taken to avoid the use of hindsight in the application of the PSM (see section 4.6.5.10). In general, where it is found to be the most appropriate method, the PSM should be applied consistently to transactions over time, irrespective of the amount of the relevant profits (or indeed if there are losses). Applications of the method which vary depending on the amount of the relevant profits may be found to be arm’s length in some cases, but would be less common. If there are significant unforeseen developments which would have resulted in a renegotiation of the agreement between the parties had they been at arm’s length, a different application (going forward) may be warranted. For example, a different way of determining the relevant profits or how to split them might be agreed. In such cases, documenting the reasons for the different application would be essential.
When applying or evaluating the use of the PSM it is important to ensure that the complexity of the process does not result in losing sight of the intended result: an arm’s length outcome for each related party involved. In some cases therefore, particularly where the process relies on multiple assumptions or complex calculations, it may be useful to perform a ‘reality check’ of the outcomes using alternative methods or means.
In cases where comparable uncontrolled transactions can be found, the CUP Method is typically a very reliable method to use in determining whether the terms of commercial and financial transactions between associated enterprises are at arm’s length. This implies that an examiner should always consider the feasibility of applying the CUP Method. That is, an examiner should consider whether it is possible to locate acceptable internal comparables or external comparables. With regard to internal comparables therefore, a question that should be asked in any analysis is whether one of the associated enterprises involved is engaged in similar transactions with independent enterprises.
There are several ways in which the PSM can be applied.
Contribution Analysis
Under a contribution analysis, the relevant profits are allocated between the associated enterprises engaged in the controlled transactions in a way that aims to reflect a reasonable approximation of the divisions that would have been agreed by independent enterprises in similar circumstances. Relevant external market data, i.e. from comparable independent transactions between unrelated enterprises or between the taxpayer and an unrelated enterprise, should be used to support this allocation where available. However more commonly, such external data will not be obtainable. In such cases, the arm’s length principle can be applied by using data internal to the taxpayers themselves to determine the relative value of the contributions of each party to the controlled transaction(s). For example, this might be done by comparing the nature and degree of each party’s contributions to the controlled transactions and assigning a percentage based on that relative comparison (and any external market data that may be available).
The way in which the value of such contributions is measured will depend on the facts of each case. The determination of appropriate profit splitting factors is discussed in more detail below (see section 4.6.5.10 et seq). Note that if the relative value of the contributions can be determined, then calculating the actual value of the contribution of each enterprise may not be required.
Residual Analysis
While a contribution analysis takes the relevant profits in relation to the transaction and splits them between the parties in a single step, the PSM can be applied using a staged approach under a residual analysis. Such an approach is likely to be appropriate where one or more parties to the controlled transaction(s) makes a contribution(s) which is routine and could be benchmarked based on comparables.
Step 1: allocation of an arm’s length profit to each enterprise to compensate it for its routine or benchmarkable contributions. Typically this is done by the application of onesided transfer pricing methods such as the TNMM and consideration of the returns earned by independent enterprises engaged in activities which are comparable to those routine or benchmarkable contributions. In this first step, other contributions, such as those which are unique and valuable, are not taken into account. Each related party is allocated an appropriate ‘routine’ return from the pool of relevant profits.
In the example represented in Figure 4.D.1 above, this would involve two distinct questions: (i) whether Associated Enterprise 1 sells comparable bicycles to an unrelated party and (ii) whether Associated Enterprise 2 purchases comparable bicycles from one or more unrelated bicycle manufacturers. If the answer to either one of these questions is in the affirmative, then the next step in the analysis is to determine the degree of comparability between the controlled and uncontrolled transactions based on the comparability factors.
Step 2: allocation of residual profit (i.e. remaining relevant profits after the Step 1 allocation) on an economically valid basis. In the second step, other contributions not already accounted for, including those which are unique and valuable, are considered. As was described above in relation to a contribution analysis, this allocation must be done on an economically valid basis, and aim to achieve a reasonable approximation of the divisions that would have been agreed by independent enterprises in similar circumstances. The second step allocation will thus typically consider the relative value of the contributions of each party to the residual profits, supplemented where possible by external market information on how independent parties would have divided such profits in similar circumstances.
As has been noted above, since reliable, direct information on how profits would have been allocated in comparable uncontrolled transactions might not be available, care is required in applying the PSM. The residual approach to the application of the method aims to reduce possible subjectivity by confining, to the extent possible, the more difficult step 2 allocation (which is typically not based directly on comparables data).
| Company X manufactures components using unique and valuable intangibles and sells these components to a related party, Company Y. Company Y then uses the components, together with its own unique and valuable intangibles, to manufacture final products, which it sells to independent customers. The first step of the residual analysis would allocate a basic, ‘routine’ or benchmarkable arm’s length return to Company X for its manufacturing function, and a basic, ‘routine’ or benchmarkable arm’s length return to Company Y for its manufacturing and distribution functions. The relevant profits from the transactions, less the amounts of the basic or ‘routine’ returns to Company X and Company Y, will be the residual profit. This residual profit is then split between the parties based on the relative value of their respective unique and valuable contributions. This second step of splitting the residual profits need not, and typically does not, depend on the use of comparables. |
The following approaches have been specified in some jurisdictions to determine the relative value of each company’s contributions of intangibles:
► External market benchmarks reflecting the fair market value of the intangible property;
► The capitalized cost of developing the intangibles and all related improvements and updates, less an appropriate amount of amortization based on the useful life of each intangible;40 and
► The amount of actual intangible development expenditures in recent years if these expenditures have been constant over
time and the useful life of the intangible property of all parties involved is broadly similar.
A disadvantage of this approach is that cost may not reflect the market value of the intangible property. This example is intended simply to illustrate the mechanics of the application of a residual approach under the profit split method. No inference should be drawn from this example as to the appropriateness of the profit splitting factors (or other parameters) to any superficially similar cases. In particu-lar, the relative capitalized, amortized expenses of the intangibles may not always reflect the relative contributions to value made by the parties; where this is the case, an alternative means of evaluating those contributions will be required.
The residual approach is used more in practice than the contribution approach for two reasons. Firstly, the residual approach breaks up a complicated transfer pricing problem into two manageable steps. The first step determines a basic return for routine or benchmarkable functions based on comparables and the application of a onesided method or methods. The second step analyzes returns to unique and valuable contributions or other elements which are unbenchmarkable. Rather than trying to determine absolute values for these contributions based on comparables, the method focuses on their relative value which may often be determined more reliably. Secondly, potential conflict with the tax authorities is reduced by using the twostep residual approach since it reduces the amount of profit that is to be split in the potentially more controversial second step.
| XYZ is a corporation that develops, manufactures and markets a line of products for use by the police in Country A. XYZ’s research unit developed a bulletproof material for use in protective clothing and headgear (Stelon). XYZ obtains patent protection for the chemical formula for Stelon. Since its introduction, Stelon has captured a substantial share of the market for bulletproof material. XYZ licensed its Asian subsidiary, XYZAsia, to manufacture and market Stelon in Asia. XYZAsia is a wellestablished company that manufactures and markets XYZ products in Asia. XYZAsia has a research unit that adapts XYZ products for the defence market, as well as a welldeveloped marketing network that employs brand names that it has developed. XYZAsia’s research unit alters Stelon to adapt it to military specifications and develops a highintensity marketing campaign directed at the defence industry in several Asian countries. Beginning with the Y1 taxable year, XYZAsia manufactures and sells Stelon in Asia through its marketing network under one of its brand names. For the Y1 tax year XYZ has no direct expenses associated with the license of Stelon to XYZAsia and incurs no expenses related to the marketing of Stelon in Asia. For the Y1 tax year XYZAsia’s Stelon sales and preroyalty expenses are $500 million and $300 million, respectively, resulting in net preroyalty profit of $200 million related to the Stelon business. The operating assets employed in XYZAsia’s Stelon business are $200 million. Given the facts and circumstances, it is determined that a residual profit split is the most appropriate method and will provide the most reliable measure of an arm’s length result. Based on an examination of a sample of Asian companies performing functions similar to the routine functions of XYZAsia it is determined that an arm’s length return on XYZAsia’s operating assets in the Stelon business is 10 per cent, resulting in a profit on those routine functions of $20 million (10% x $200 million) for XYZAsia’s Stelon business, and a residual profit of $180 million. Since the first stage of the residual profit split allocated profits to XYZAsia’s contributions other than those attributable to unique and valuable intangibles, it is assumed that the residual profit of $180 million is attributable to the unique and valuable intangibles related to Stelon, i.e. the Asian brand name for Stelon and the Stelon formula (including XYZAsia’s modifications). To estimate the relative values of these intangibles, the ratios of the capitalized value of expenditures as of Y1 on Stelonrelated research and development and marketing over the Y1 sales related to such expenditures are compared. As XYZ’s protective product research and development expenses support the worldwide protective product sales of the XYZ group, it is necessary to allocate such expenses among the worldwide business activities to which they relate. It is determined that it is reasonable to allocate the value of these expenses based on worldwide protective product sales. Using information on the average useful life of its investments in protective product research and development, XYZ’s protective product research and development expenses are capitalized and amortized. This analysis indicates that the capitalized research and development expenditures have a value of $0.20 per dollar of global protective product sales in the Y1 tax year. XYZAsia’s expenditures on Stelon research and development and marketing support only its sales in Asia. Using information on the average useful life of XYZAsia’s investments in marketing and research and development XYZAsia’s expenditures are capitalized and amortized and from this it is determined that they have a value in Y1 of $0.40 per dollar of XYZAsia’s Stelon sales. Thus, XYZ and XYZAsia together contributed $0.60 in capitalized intangible development expenses for each dollar of XYZAsia’s protective product sales for Y1, of which XYZ contributed a third (or $0.20 per dollar of sales) and XYZAsia contributed two thirds (or $0.40 per dollar of sales). Accordingly, it is determined that an arm’s length split of the residual profits would see one third of those profits being allocated to XYZ and two thirds being allocated to XYZAsia. |
External comparables may be difficult to find in practice unless the transactions involve a fairly common and homogeneous product or service. However, the advantages of the CUP Method are great enough to warrant a significant effort to apply the method.
Comparable Profit Split Method (PSM)
In some countries, reference is made to the Comparable PSM. This application of the PSM relies on a comparison of the allocation of profits between independent enterprises engaged in comparable activities under comparable circumstances to those of the controlled transaction(s). That is, it relies heavily on external market data to determine how the relevant profits should be split between the related parties. As has been noted above, such information may be very useful, but is rarely available in practice.
The relevant profits to be split under the PSM are those which arise to the associated enterprises as a result of the controlled transaction(s) under examination. It will be important to consider the level of aggregation of transactions in this regard (see 3.3.3.1 to 3.3.3.5) and then to examine the relevant income and expense amounts of each party in relation to those transactions.
In most cases, since the relevant profits will be comprised of income and expense amounts from more than one related party in more than one jurisdiction, the relevant financial data of the entities will need to first be put on a common basis, including with regard to the accounting practice and currency used. As this can materially affect the application of the method, consistency over time is important in this regard.
Other than in cases where the profit split covers all the activities of each of the related parties, the financial data will need to be segmented in accordance with the accurately delineated transaction(s) covered by the profit split approach. In cases where reliable productline or divisional accounts are available, these may be useful to the determination of the relevant profits to be split.
Measures of Profit
The PSM is most commonly used to split net or operating profits. Applying the method in this way means that all the related parties are exposed to both the income and expenses associated with the relevant transactions in a consistent manner. However, depending on the accurate delineation of the transaction, other measures of profits may be appropriate. For own operating expenses. Such an application may be appropriate where the parties do not share the risks associated with the operating expenses relating to the controlled transaction, but do share the risks associated with the volume of sales and prices charged, as well as those associated with the production or acquisition of the goods or services.
|
Experience indicates that the CUP Method will be most useful where:
► One of the associated enterprises involved in the transaction is engaged in comparable uncontrolled transactions with an independent enterprise (i.e. an internal comparable is available). In such a case all relevant information on the uncontrolled transactions is available and it is therefore probable that all material differences between controlled and uncontrolled transactions can be identified; and
► The transactions involve commodity type products, and the differences between the products are minor or can be easily adjusted for.
Actual or Anticipated Profits
The PSM is most commonly applied to split the actual relevant profits of the related parties in relation to controlled transactions. Since actual profits will reflect the playing out of the risks which affect the transactions, such a split will typically result in each related party being subject to those risks. It would thus be appropriate where the accurate delineation of the transaction shows that each related party shares such risks. For example, where the parties to the controlled transaction share the assumption of the economically significant risks, or separately assume closelyrelated economically significant risks in relation to the controlled transactions, it would be expected that a split of actual profits would apply.
On the other hand, where the profit split is found to be the most appropriate method but the accurate delineation of the transaction shows that one or more of the related parties does not share in the assumption of the economically significant risks, a split of anticipated profits is likely to be more appropriate.
A common application of an anticipated profit split is in the use of a discounted cash flow valuation technique, which might be used, for example, to determine the present value of a transferred intangible or other asset. For example, Company A transfers all the rights in a fully developed unique and valuable intangible, intangible X, to Company B, its associated enterprise. Company B has its own unique and valuable intangibles which are expected to complement intangible X. Company A expects to have no ongoing involvement in the exploitation of intangible X, as these activities will be wholly undertaken and controlled by Company B. In this case, assume it is determined that the profit split is the most appropriate method since both Company A and Company B make unique and valuable contributions. However, since Company A will not be involved in the ongoing exploitation of the intangible after the transfer, and it does not assume any risks relating to those exploitation activities, at arm’s length, its return should not be subject to those risks. Instead, it should receive a share of the anticipated profits from Company B’s exploitation of the combined intangibles of Companies A and B, discounted to reflect its present value at the time of the transfer. This amount might be calculated using a discounted cash flow valuation technique which analyzes the present value of the likely income from the exploitation of intangible X. The ongoing risks relating to the exploitation of the intangibles are solely assumed by Company B and no adjustment to the remuneration due to Company A needs to be made should the intangible actually be more or less successful than anticipated.
It should be noted that measures of profits which vary to some degree with the playing out of risks, without being fully exposed to such risk, can also be used. In all cases, the measure of relevant profits to be split should be aligned with the accurate delineation of the transaction in order to produce an arm’s length outcome.
Even where a profit split of actual profits is used, the method should be applied without hindsight. That is, unless there are significant unforeseen developments which would have resulted in a renegotiation of the agreement had it occurred between independent parties, the basis for determining how the relevant profits should be calculated and how they should be split amongst the associated enterprises should ordinarily be determined based on information known or reasonably foreseeable at the time of, or prior to the transaction(s). This is the case even though it may only be possible to apply the actual calculations some time thereafter. For example, Company E and its associated enterprise, Company F are so highly integrated that the PSM is found to be the most appropriate method to evaluate the controlled transactions between them. The way in which the relevant profits from their transactions should be determined is established ex ante, that is, at or prior to the time they engage in the transactions. At that time, they also determine that the residual PSM of actual net profits should be applied, and that the residual profits should be split between them on the basis of the value of current year marketing expenses of each party, after having allocated basic or ‘routine’ returns on the routine sales and distribution activities conducted by both Companies E and F. In this example, the way in which the PSM is to be applied is determined at the start of the period. However, the agreed method can only be applied at year end, once the amount of sales, marketing expenses, and the amount of the relevant actual net profits has been determined. If, in a subsequent period, these intragroup transactions are subject to a transfer pricing audit, the tax administration would not be precluded from examining the selection of the transfer pricing method or the way in which it was applied in order to confirm compliance with the arm’s length principle. In doing this, the tax administration may also examine what information was actually known or reasonably foreseeable at the time of the transaction.
The process of screening, verification and selection of comparables will largely depend upon the availability of databases in the public domain in the country. Public databases may be available in some countries whereas other countries may not have these databases. In such cases, one of the options could be to rely on a database from a comparable economy with reasonable and reliable adjustments.
Profit Splitting Factors
The PSM aims to determine transfer prices by reference to the manner in which independent parties would have divided profits amongst themselves had they engaged in comparable transactions. However, information on comparable profit splits or similar arrangements is often not available, so the method is more often applied by reference to some other measure of the relative contributions to those profits of each associated enterprise, as a way of approximating the outcome that would have been achieved between independent parties.
It would not be appropriate to provide prescriptive guidance as to the measure or measures to be used to split the relevant profits, as this will depend on the facts of each case. However, whatever factor(s) are selected, they should be capable of objective measurement and not themselves subject to nonarm’s length pricing or valuation. The measures should also be verifiable and supported by data. While these considerations need to be borne in mind, amounts based on the taxpayer’s own internal information (e.g. from their financial accounts) are commonly used.
In some cases, a multifactor approach to splitting profits may be adopted. However, it may also be the case that a single measure of the key contributions to value of each enterprise to the transaction will be sufficient as a proxy for the relative value contributed.
In this regard, information from the functional analysis is likely to be particularly important. Other information in the taxpayer’s local file may also be useful. In addition, where the master file is available, the information therein on key valuedrivers, considered in the context of the business and industry environment, may also be helpful to the extent that the value drivers for the transactions under examination are similar to those for the MNE or business line that is the subject of the master file.
Depending on the circumstances, profit splitting factors might be based on the value of (certain types of) assets or capital, where there is a strong correlation between tangible assets or intangibles, or capital employed, and the creation of value in the controlled transaction. In such cases, care should be taken to ensure reliable and consistent measures of the value of the asset(s) concerned.
| MCO, a manufacturer, sells the same product to both controlled and uncontrolled distributors. The circumstances surrounding the controlled and uncontrolled transactions are substantially the same, except that the controlled sales price is a delivered price and the uncontrolled sales are made free on board (f.o.b.) MCO’s factory (which means the buyer takes responsibility for delivery costs of the goods for the remainder of their transit). Differences in the contractual terms of transportation and insurance generally have a definite and reasonably ascertainable effect on price, and adjustments are made to the results of the uncontrolled transaction to account for such differences. No other material difference has been identified between the controlled and uncontrolled transactions. As MCO is engaged in both controlled and uncontrolled transactions, it is likely that all material differences between the two transactions have been identified. In this case, the CUP Method is applied to an uncontrolled comparable with no product differences, and there are only minor contractual differences that have a definite and reasonably ascertainable effect on price. The results of this application of the CUP Method will therefore provide the most direct and reliable measure of an arm’s length result. |
In other cases, costbased factors may be found to be appropriate,
e.g. costs related to the unique and valuable contributions such as R&D, engineering, design, marketing, etc., or the development of unique and valuable intangibles. Note that although cost is often a poor measure of the absolute value of unique and valuable intangibles, the relative costs incurred by each party may provide a reasonable approximation of the relative value of their respective contributions. In some instances, it may be appropriate to adjust the cost amounts, e.g. where they are incurred in different periods, to ensure they represent reliable measures of the respective contributions of each party.
Other examples of profit splitting factors could include incremental sales, employee remuneration or bonus payments, time spent, headcount, etc. Such factors may be found to be appropriate where they provide a strong and sufficiently consistent correlation to the creation of value represented by the relevant (residual) profits.
| Company C, a related Company, distributes the electronic products to unrelated customers. An arm’s length transfer price for the transactions between Company B and Company C is determined based on the most appropriate method, the RPM. The PSM is found to be the most appropriate method to determine the arm’s length transfer price between Company A and Company B because the contributions of both companies are found to constitute unique and valuable intangibles. In step 1 of the residual analysis, a basic return for the respective manufacturing functions is determined for Company A and Company B. Specifically, a benchmarking analysis is performed to search for comparable independent manufacturers which do not own or use unique and valuable intangibles. The residual profit, which is the relevant profits of Company A and Company B in relation to the transactions after deducting the basic (arm’s length) return for the manufacturing functions, is then split between Company A and Company B. It is found in this case that an economically valid way to split the residual profits would be based on relative R&D expenses, since these are found to provide a reliable measure of the relative value of each company’s unique and valuable intangibles. Subsequently, the net profits of Company A and Company B are calculated in order to work back to a transfer price. Example: Profit Splitting Factors Company A is a designer, developer and manufacturer of construction and earthmoving equipment. Company B, an associated enterprise of Company A, has developed, by its own efforts a unique and valuable trademark and tradename to support the sale of the construction and earthmoving equipment. The brand developed by Company B hinges on the reliability of the equipment produced by Company A, as well as the extensive programme of customer support provided by Company B (including proactive maintenance, guaranteeing supplies of spare parts for equipment used in all, including remote, locations). A transfer pricing analysis determines that each party makes unique and valuable contributions and as a result, a residual profit split is found to be the most appropriate method. In determining how the relevant residual profits should be split, the key contributions of Companies A and B are considered. As a result of that analysis, reliable profit splitting factors based on those categories of R&D expenses (for Company A) relating to the unique and valuable intangibles embedded in the products; and marketing and customer support expenses (for Company B) are used. |
Transfer pricing rules require associated enterprises to price their intragroup transactions in accordance with the arm’s length principle. The five methods described at sections 4.2 to 4.6 inclusive of this Practical Manual are used to calculate or test the arm’s length nature of intragroup prices or profits earned from intragroup transactions. As described at 4.1.2.1, the starting point in selecting a transfer pricing method is an understanding of the controlled transaction (inbound or outbound) based on the comparability (including the functional) analysis. This is necessary regardless of which transfer pricing method is selected. The CUP Method is a suitable method when prices from comparable transactions of the same or similar products are available. For instance, the quoted prices on a commodities market or exchange may be comparable uncontrolled prices for transactions involving commodities performed by related parties under comparable circumstances.
Tax authorities may find themselves unable to successfully determine whether a controlled transaction between associated enterprises is comparable with uncontrolled transactions observed in the market if the taxpayer does not provide sufficient supporting documentation to its controlled transactions. For developing countries this concern may be even more pressing than for developed countries, as the former countries may not have data on companies doing business in their countries to perform a comparability analysis in addition to potentially having limited knowhow and resources to conduct transfer pricing studies.
In view of this difficulty, several countries have a rule in place that is generally referred to as the socalled “sixth method” or “commodity rule” although the name of the rule or the method applied may differ from country to country. Historically this approach has been used for commodities by several countries. The common feature of these rules is that they rely on the quoted prices on the commodities market to price commodity transactions between associated enterprises. For practical purposes, in this section the approach will be referred to as the “sixth method”.41
As the rule is referenced as the “sixth method” in Argentina where it seems to have originated, for all practical purposes this title and wording will be used in this section.
Because versions of the “sixth method” have been more widely adopted and applied in recent years, this section discusses the rationale for and country experiences with the “sixth method”. However, this section does not seek to address the relationship between the sixth method as implemented in any particular domestic legislation and the arm’s length principle as defined under Article 9 of UN Model Convention. The workings of the sixth method may resemble the Comparable Uncontrolled Price (CUP) Method. The sixth method generally considers certain characteristics and substance requirements, as defined in relevant domestic practices, for the method to be applicable to a particular transaction. Absent reliable and timely confirmation from the taxpayer about the relevant characteristics of the controlled transaction, some countries apply a default rule which includes the application of a transfer price based on publicly available pricing information and typically an assumption of the time the relevant tested transaction took place (which corresponds to the commodity price listing used). Despite its more general title, considering its operation, the sixth method—depending on how it is applied—could be considered as an antiabuse rule, an abusedeeming rule or even presumed to be a form of safe harbour. Some countries consider the sixth method an (imperfect) application of the CUP Method.42 This section will refer to the practice as “the sixth method” without addressing whether the term method, antiabuse rule or abusedeeming rule or safe harbour is more appropriate or legally more correct.
Brazil applies a similar sixth method approach to loan operations. For details, see chapter 15.
| The facts are the same as in Example 1 except that MCO affixes its valuable trademark to the property sold in the controlled transactions but does not affix its trademark to the property sold in the uncontrolled transactions. Under the facts of this case the effect on price of the trademark is material and cannot be reliably estimated. As there are material product differences for which reliable adjustments cannot be made the CUP Method is unlikely to provide a reliable measure of the arm’s length result. |
The sixth method approach has benefits and disadvantages. A benefit of the sixth method is its relative certainty and relative ease of application for the tax authorities and its tax collection efficiency. Some disadvantages of the sixth method include that it is not one of the traditional transaction methods or traditional transactional profit methods described in this chapter and thus may not be recognized by the country of the associated enterprise at the other end of the transaction. Disadvantages also include its inaccuracy considering the general standards of application of the arm’s length principle, that the method does not consider the economic circumstances of the actual transaction that is being tested, and that the method may result in overcompensation of one associated enterprise to the detriment of another associated enterprise and therefore may give rise to potential double taxation. Benefits and disadvantages are discussed further in section 4.7.5.
This chapter describes the socalled sixth method as it is observed in practice in several countries. It also discusses OECD guidance and an InterAmerican Center of Tax Administrations (CIAT) study relevant to this method or approach that generally is used to tackle abusive transfer pricing practices. The chapter aims to provide a basic description of the application of the socalled sixth method in case of commodity transactions and a description of steps that can be taken to mitigate some identified disadvantages of using the sixth method.
At the date of drafting this section, the sixth method has been adopted in countries such as Argentina, Bolivia, Brazil, Costa Rica, Dominican Republic, Guatemala, Honduras, Peru, Uruguay and some Caribbean countries. Practical experience with the rule exists mainly in Argentina, Brazil, Ecuador and Uruguay.43 However, it should be noted that the method is not applied unequivocally in the same manner in all these countries. In Argentina, the method was first introduced in 2004. Other countries have followed in implementing (a version of) the sixth method since its first implementation in Argentina.
According to CIAT, the rule may be in place in several countries but practi-cal experience with application of the rule is still quite limited.
The fact pattern traditionally targeted by the sixth method is one where associated enterprises engaged in the business of exporting commodities such as grains, oil and oilseeds, oil and gas, mining and fishing products, invoice an associated enterprise related to the sale of the commodities yet ship the commodities to a jurisdiction (and party) different from the associated enterprise that is being invoiced by the seller. The actual shipment date usually is at a later point in time than the date of the original sale between the associated enterprises and the intercompany invoice date. In general, the associated enterprise being invoiced is a trading entity that obtains title to the shipped goods only for a limited period of time and the later shipment is to a destination determined by an unrelated party that has bought the commodities from the associated trader (not to the residence of the associated trading entity).
If based on clear criteria that can be readily ascertained it is established that the associated trading entity has insufficient substance to perform relevant functions related to the acquisition and sale of commodities and the trading entity is located in a low tax jurisdiction, there is a risk that the associated trading entity transaction will erode the tax base of the jurisdiction of the seller of the commodities. This may result from paying a price for the commodities that is lower than that received by the associated trading entity from a thirdparty in a later sale, despite the fact that the trading entity does not have the substance to perform the trading functions. To curtail that risk, the sixth method determines the intragroup price by reference to the quoted price of the commodities on the shipment date, i.e. it looks through the intermediary trading entity as if the transaction had taken place between the seller and the thirdparty customer. The sixth method in some countries specifies that the intragroup sales price will be deemed to be the higher of either the exchange price of the commodity on the intragroup sale date or on the shipment date of the commodities to the unrelated buyer. Applied under these circumstances and in this way the sixth method can be considered to function as an antiabuse rule.
As stated earlier, several countries that have implemented the sixth method have implemented it differently. CIAT describes the respective permutations of the sixth method observed in practice related to the different aspects that make up the rule as follows:44
Table 4.T.10
Implementation of the Sixth Method
| Aspect | Adopted approach |
| Transactions covered |
|
| Nature of the measure |
|
| Products or goods subject to the measure |
appropriate. |
| Relation condition | The condition by which the exporter and the intermediary trader and/or the actual intended recipient of the goods are related parties may be established in some countries, but not in all. At least one country (Brazil) applies the method whenever the foreign company is resident in a listed jurisdiction (noncooperative, low tax jurisdiction, or under a privileged tax regime), regardless whether the companies involved are related enterprises. |
| Condition that there should be an international intermediary | The condition that there needs to be an international intermediary having no economic substance for the measure to be applied is expressly established in some countries, while it is not a requisite in others. |
| Hierarchy of the method |
|
| Prices to be considered |
intermediary;
(i) price on the transparent market on the loading or unloading date; (ii) average price over a 4month period or 120 days prior to unloading or after loading; (iii) price as of the date on which the agreement was executed; (iv) average price over a 30day term after the agreement was executed; (v) quoted price on the transparent market on the loading date, that of the prior date in which a quoted price was available or that of the first day the goods are loaded (the criterion adopted caries by country).
|
| Comparability adjustments | Some countries allow for comparability adjustments to the publicly available price so as to take into account market circumstances, contract terms and conditions, and product quality and specifications whereas other countries do not accept comparability adjustments. |
| Exceptions to applying the measure | Some measures implemented in the region provide the local taxpayer with the possibility to evidence that the intermediary has economic substance, even though the criteria are not the same in every case. |
CIAT (2013). The Control of Transfer Pricing Manipulation in Latin America and the Caribbean. Panama City: CIAT. Available from https://www.taxcompact. net/sites/default/files/resources/2013-05-ITC-CIAT-Control-Transfer-Pricing-Manipulation-LAC.pdf
Considering that the arm’s length principle requires prices between associated enterprises to be comparable with those used between unrelated parties, it would generally be required that market prices be used that would apply in the same or similar circumstances as those that apply to the transaction between associated enterprises. Where the sixth method offers taxpayers the opportunity to provide evidence that the intragroup transactions are not abusive and the prices are at arm’s length, and the method allows comparability adjustments as need be, it may be more generally consistent with the arm’s length principle and provide for legal certainty. It can also help by providing the tax authorities with more transparency as regards the transaction between the associated enterprises.
The following analytical needs and constraints should, however, be kept in mind:
The Group of Twenty (G20) and OECD countries have examined the transfer pricing aspects of crossborder commodity transactions between associated enterprises as part of Action 10 of the BEPS Action Plan. As a result, Chapter II of the OECD Transfer Pricing Guidelines has been amended to include new guidance especially applicable to commodity transactions.45 The new guidance includes a clarification of the existing guidance on the application of the CUP Method to commodity transactions. The new guidance states that:
1) The CUP Method would generally be an appropriate transfer pricing method for commodity transactions between associated enterprises;
2) Quoted prices can be used under the CUP Method, subject to a number of considerations, as a reference to determine the arm’s length price for the controlled commodity transaction; and
3) Reasonably accurate adjustments should be made, when needed, to ensure that the economically relevant characteristics of
the controlled and uncontrolled transactions are sufficiently comparable.
OECD (2015). OECD/G20 Base Erosion and Profit Shifting Project: Aligning Transfer Pricing Outcomes with Value Creation, Actions 8-10—2015, Final Reports. Paris: OECD Publishing.
The guidance also includes a provision on the determination of the pricing date for commodity transactions that, under certain conditions, provides for tax administrations to impute a pricing date. This provision acknowledges the difficulties that can arise for tax administrations in verifying the correct date for pricing the goods sold and serves to prevent taxpayers from using pricing dates in contracts that enable the adoption of the most advantageous quoted price. Although the pricesetting date used by the parties is the prima facie date, in certain circumstances, for example if there is no evidence available as to what that date really is, the tax authorities can impute a pricing date, (e.g. the shipment date) in a manner similar to the sixth method.
Tax authorities in developing countries may find it easier to test the arm’s length nature of intragroup commodity transactions if taxpayers are required to provide more information on such transactions. The OECD guidance referenced above emphasizes that taxpayers can assist tax administrations in conducting an informed examination of their transfer pricing practices related to commodity transactions by providing:46
► Documentation on the pricesetting policy for commodity transactions;
► The information needed to justify price adjustments based on the comparable uncontrolled transactions or comparable uncontrolled arrangements represented by the quoted price; and
► Any other relevant information, such as pricing formulas used, thirdparty endcustomer agreements, premiums or discounts applied, pricing date, supply chain information and information prepared for nontax purposes.
OECD (2017). Transfer Pricing Guidelines for Multinational Enterprises and Tax Administrations. Paris: OECD Publishing. Available from https://doi. org/10.1787/tpg-2017-en. See para. 2.21, section on commodity transactions.
The date of pricing commodity transactions is particularly relevant in determining whether such transactions between associated enterprises are priced appropriately. Tax administrations should determine the price for commodity transactions by reference to the pricing date agreed by associated enterprises, where the taxpayer can provide reliable evidence of the pricing date agreed by such associated enterprises in the controlled commodity transaction. Such evidence should include:
► The time the transaction was entered into (e.g. proposals and acceptances, contracts or registered contracts, or other documents setting out the terms of the arrangements may constitute reliable evidence), and
► That this is consistent with the actual conduct of the parties or with other facts of the case.
If the pricing date specified in any written agreement between the associated enterprises is inconsistent with the actual conduct of the parties or with other facts of the case, tax administrations may determine a different pricing date consistent with those other facts of the case and what independent enterprises would have agreed in comparable circumstances (taking into consideration industry practices). When the taxpayer does not provide reliable evidence of the pricing date agreed by associated enterprises in the controlled transaction and the tax administration cannot otherwise determine a different pricing date under the guidance on accurately delineating the transaction, tax administrations may deem the pricing date for the commodity transaction on the basis of evidence available to the tax administration. Such evidence may include the date of shipment as evidenced by the bill of lading or equivalent document depending on the means of transport. This would mean that the price for the commodities being transacted would be determined by reference to the average quoted price on the shipment date, subject to any appropriate comparability adjustments based on the information available to the tax administration. It would be important to permit resolution of cases of double taxation arising from application of the deemed pricing date through access to the mutual agreement procedure under the applicable treaty.47
Ibid. See para. 2.22, section on commodity transactions.
| The facts are the same as in Example 1 except that MCO, which manufactures business machines, makes minor modifications to the physical properties of the machines to satisfy specific requirements of a customer in controlled sales. MCO does not, however, make these modifications in uncontrolled sales. Only if the minor physical differences in the product have a material and reasonably ascertainable effect on prices should adjustments be made to the results of the uncontrolled transactions to account for these differences. These adjusted results may then be used as a measure of the arm’s length result. |
CIAT conducted a study to analyze the operation of the socalled sixth method 10 years after its introduction in Argentina.48 In particular, it conducted a comparative analysis of the implementation of the sixth method in other Latin American countries. The study notes that transfer prices are calculated using the methods developed under the OECD Transfer Pricing Guidelines and that the methods are based on comparability of the transactions under analysis and that of other similar transactions carried out between or with independent parties. It also notes that a main problem encountered is the difficulty in assessing useful and timely information for carrying out such a comparison.
Hereafter referenced as “the CIAT study”. Available from https://www.ciat. org/the-so-called-6th-method/?lang=en
The CIAT study notes that authorities may react differently to distortions caused by companies being under common control. Some authorities may wish to disregard a legal entity making use of a substanceoverform analysis in case an enterprise is under the control of another enterprise in economic, financial and corporate terms. Other authorities may wish to make use of transfer pricing rules and determine the intercompany price that should apply by eliminating any pricing distortions that result from the influence of being associated enterprises. Although the traditional approach to the arm’s length principle may be preferred, the CIAT study also notes that the complexity and practical difficulty in applying the transfer pricing methods and with finding comparables should allow for consideration of alternatives for developing countries, which may have limited resources to address the complexity that these exercises present or overcome practical difficulties in this respect.
When considering the legal nature of the sixth method, the CIAT study points out that the characterization of the method under domestic law may have consequences as regards the application of a treaty for the avoidance of double taxation. That is, to the extent the sixth method qualifies as a transfer pricing method, the workings of the Associated Enterprises article, usually Article 9 of a treaty for the avoidance of double taxation, may govern the international consequences of its application and to the extent it is seen as being a domestic antiavoidance rule it may fall outside the scope of such a treaty and taxpayers may be unable to successfully claim avoidance of double taxation. If the method is characterized as an antiabuse rule or a safe harbour, it will be relevant to get a treaty partner to acknowledge that, before a treaty can successfully be availed of to reduce any potential double tax.
In many cases, the sixth method may have been incorporated into domestic law to help prevent tax base erosion and facilitate the collection of corporate taxes. The method is most often applied to intragroup exports and/ or imports of commodities and applies the publicly available market price of the commodity on the actual date of shipment as the transfer price. The method generally disregards whether the buyer or seller pays for the shipping costs and at what date delivery of the goods finally takes place. The method may also apply a cruder standard of comparability, in that the grade or quality of the commodity and sometimes even the volume shipped may not need to be the same as applies in a standard contract traded on the exchange. However, some countries and authorities allow for comparability adjustments to correct for this. The lack of substance of the intermediary is generally a given for the method to apply, although in practice there also are countries where the method is applied to all exports and imports regardless of (i) foreign intermediaries and/or (ii) the involvement of associated intermediaries.
The CIAT study goes further than the original sixth method in that it considers the position of the associated intermediary that makes the thirdparty sale. It recommends that tax authorities try to obtain an understanding of the value chain related to the commodity and its subsequent processing or transformation to help with determining the arm’s length compensation for the functions performed, and risks assumed by the entities involved in that value chain.
Use of the sixth method offers some benefits but also carries with it some disadvantages as discussed above. The sixth method, in its most rudimentary form, operates as a pricesetting mechanism that may roughly resemble the CUP Method. However, depending on how it is applied, it may not meet the rather strict requirements that the CUP Method traditionally requires for its application. Some countries consider it a benefit that the method can be used when no exact transfer price or comparable transaction is available for the commodities or products involved. This approach may serve as a practical means to raise revenue and requires relatively limited audit activity related to taxpayers engaged in intragroup commodity trading activities. A disadvantage of the approach is that, depending on how the sixth method is applied, there is a potential risk of divergence from the arm’s length principle and resulting double taxation. Another disadvantage of the approach is that it does not apply a traditional transaction method or transactional profit method and hence may not be recognized by the country at the other end of the transaction. As a country’s tax system and tax authorities develop and benefit from more transfer pricing– related knowhow and resources, the sixth method may not or may no longer be necessary, or it may be adjusted or updated to achieve greater consistency with the arm’s length principle.
It should be unequivocally clear in what situations the sixth method applies; this will avoid disadvantaging taxpayers and will foster legal certainty. If a (lack of) substance test applies, clear and objective criteria should be provided. Where a substance test is applicable, only when the taxpayer clearly fails to meet the test should the sixth method approach be applied. Potential double taxation resulting from application of the sixth method approach can also be a disadvantage. This disadvantage could be mitigated to the extent tax authorities would allow any double taxation resulting from the application of the sixth method to be eligible for potential relief under an applicable treaty.
The person performing the search for comparables may have to use a variety of information sources for third-party or external comparables. These can include company-specific information sources including annual reports, regulatory and other government filings, product literature and securities analyst reports, as well as various trade and industry association materials. Once intermediate screening has been completed a complete set of company financial statement data should be generated and reviewed for adequacy, period coverage and general consistency. Sometimes details may even be obtained through telephone or personal interviews with company management and it is also possible to use the knowledge of internal operating personnel to identify comparables. For example, sales and marketing personnel can be asked to assist in identifying independent third-party resellers whose financial statements may be used as a basis for establishing comparable profit margins.
Publicly available prices may be based on standardized agreements setting forth basic aspects of the transaction, such as quality, quantity and terms of delivery of the commodities marketed. A reliable application of the CUP Method would require that the raw materials being compared are sufficiently similar. Therefore, a closer application of the arm’s length principle can be achieved to the extent that the sixth method allows for comparability adjustments to be made to the quoted prices for features such as physical characteristics and the quality of commodities as well as the volumes traded, the terms and conditions of the contracts, other relevant variables, the delivery date and conditions (CIF, FOB etc.) and whether the transaction between the associated enterprises is carried out at the same level of the supply chain as the one that served to set the publicly available price.
As stated earlier, the application of the sixth method in some countries is generally conditioned on the lack of (evidence on) substance of the intermediary trading entity. To the extent taxpayers may provide evidence as to the substance of (their associated) intermediary entities to opt out of the application of the sixth method, it could be expected that taxpayers will make an effort to provide the requisite additional information. As a result, the more accurate and arm’s length income allocation may become that which applies between the associated enterprises.
Allowing for evidence or proof of substance is not uncommon with this approach. Doing so adds an administrative burden on taxpayers and tax authorities, however. As an example, one country’s law and regulations provide in relevant part:
“the [sixth] method does not apply if and when: (a) the (associated) enterprise that constitutes the international intermediary, demonstrates effective presence in the jurisdiction of residence, having a commercial office or premises where the business is managed, complying with the legal inscription and filing of balance sheets; the assets, risks and functions undertaken by the international intermediary are adequate in view of its commercial operations; (b) the international intermediary’s main business does not consist of receiving passive income or the trading of goods to or from the country of origin of the commodities or with other members of the economic group49;
(c) the international intermediary’s crossborder trade with other members of the same multinational group does not exceed 30% of the total annual transactions conducted by the intermediary.”
“Economic group” may be more extensive than an MNE.
Considering the observations resulting from the CIAT study mentioned in the previous paragraphs and the guidance issued by the OECD with respect to commodity transactions, to encourage access to treaty provisions providing potential relief from double taxation two observations can be made: First of all, in those situations where the rule considers the status of (foreign) intermediaries, it would be preferable if taxpayers are allowed to present evidence that their intermediaries have the requisite substance in the other jurisdiction(s). Second, taxpayers could be allowed to provide evidence that their intragroup pricing is at arm’s length and appropriate and reasonable adjustments to publicly available commodity prices could be allowed in order to reflect possible transaction and product differences. This is important as commodity prices are known to fluctuate significantly and be highly dependent on grade, quality and specifics of the respective commodity. In addition, import/export conditions are likely to influence prices.
The less arbitrary the sixth method and its criteria for application can be, the more legal certainty may result and the more efficient and successful audits of transactions and taxpayers subject to the method can be. Clarifying the definition of intermediaries subject to the sixth method (if and when it refers to intermediaries), specifying the transactions subject to the sixth method and specifying the criteria for its application will assist in reducing uncertainty and potential tax disputes. To the extent taxpayers can provide evidence as regards to the necessary substance of intermediaries and what would constitute an arm’s length price, and the legislation includes provisions for adjustments to the publicly available commodity prices to assure improved comparability, the sixth method becomes more sophisticated and in line with the arm’s length principle. Taxpayers may benefit from (improved) access to avoidance of double taxation in that event as well.
| FM, a specialty radio manufacturer, sells its radios to a controlled distributor, AM, within the western region of Country A. FM sells its radios to uncontrolled distributors to serve other regions in Country A. The product sold in the controlled and uncontrolled transactions is the same and all other circumstances surrounding the controlled and uncontrolled transactions are substantially the same other than the geographic differences. If the geographic differences are unlikely to have a material effect on price, or they have definite and reasonably ascertainable effects for which adjustments are made, then the (adjusted) results of the uncontrolled sales may be used under the CUP Method to establish an arm’s length price. If the effects of the geographic differences would be material but cannot be reliably ascertained, then the reliability of the results will be diminished. However, the CUP Method may still provide the most reliable measure of an arm’s length result relative to the application of other transfer pricing methods. |
| Example: Information Technology Company The following hypothetical illustration is provided merely to demon-strate how a working capital adjustment can be calculated. It should not be construed as the only way in which such an adjustment may be calculated.
| ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Other adjustments are those proposed by the taxpayer or tax administrator to adjust for specific economic circumstances that affect the transactions being compared. There can be significant differences in the mix of functions performed by the potential comparables vis-à-vis the tested party, or in the assets used or contributed, risks assumed or capital employed. When such differences exist and are not adjusted, they may affect the reliability of the comparables in establishing an appropriate arm’s length profit range.
The financial results of the comparables may need to be adjusted to eliminate the effect of such differences. Such adjustment is possible only when reliable and accurate segmented detailed information is available. An adjustment is made to the revenue and costs relevant to the functions performed by the comparables but not by the tested party. If an arm’s length return is established for additional functions performed by the tested party, it is not necessary to adjust the comparables. That arm’s length return based on another set of comparables may be applied to the tested party for those functions. Care should be exercised while making a functional adjustment which involves a subjective assessment.
There can be significant differences in the mix of functions performed by the potential comparable vis-à-vis the tested party. For example, a controlled distribution company may differ from a set of independent distribution companies in that it performs import and regulatory functions not performed by the independent distributors (notwithstanding that the independent distributors have been determined to be the best available comparables); performs only first-tier distribution functions and performs limited manufacturing and assembly functions. To adjust for such differences, the financial results of the comparable may be adjusted to account for the revenue, costs, and associated profits associated with the functions performed by the comparable but not by the tested party, or vice versa.
Adjustments performed to compensate for material differences in the mix of functions performed by a controlled storage device distributor and a set of independent storage device distribution comparables is considered here to illustrate this point. It is assumed that the independent device distributors (determined to be the best available comparables) also perform manufacturing/assembly operations and downstream distribution functions that are not performed by the controlled storage device distributor. In this case, the financial results of the comparables may need to be adjusted to eliminate the profits associated with manufacturing/assembly operations and with downstream distribution functions based upon the profitability earned in uncontrolled comparable storage manufacturing and downstream distribution transactions. In other words, for comparability purposes, only the functions comparable to the functions carried out by the controlled storage device distributor should be taken into consideration.
To contrast the treatment above with a different set of circumstances, it could be assumed that the controlled storage device distributor above performs some import functions which are not performed by the independent distributors. The margins of those comparables that did not perform import functions could perhaps be adjusted to reflect an arm’s length profit associated with these functions if sufficient data exist to make an accurate adjustment.
Examination of the economically relevant characteristics of the accurately delineated controlled transaction will help in the selection of the most appropriate transfer pricing method and in developing search criteria to identify reliable comparables with which to apply the selected method. This examination is the primary focus of the functional analysis described above in section 3.4.4.
The RPM is one of the traditional transaction methods that can be used to determine whether a transaction reflects the arm’s length principle. The RPM focuses on the related sales company which performs marketing and selling functions as the tested party in the transfer pricing analysis. This is depicted in Figure 4.D.2 below.
The RPM analyzes the price of a product that a related sales company (i.e. Associated Enterprise 2 in Figure 4.D.2) charges to an unrelated customer (i.e. the resale price) to determine an arm’s length gross margin, which the sales company retains to cover its sales, general and administrative (SG&A) expenses, and still make an appropriate profit. The appropriate profit level is based on the functions it performs, the assets it uses and the risks it assumes. The remainder of the product’s price is regarded as the arm’s length price for the intragroup transactions between the sales company (i.e. Associated Enterprise 2) and a related company (i.e. Associated Enterprise 1). As the method is based on arm’s length gross profits rather than directly determining arm’s length prices (as with the CUP Method) the RPM requires less direct transactional (product) comparability than the CUP Method.
| Figure 4.D.2 Resale Price Method (RPM) |
Consequently, under the RPM the starting point of the analysis for using the method is the sales company. Under this method the transfer price for the sale of products between the sales company (i.e. Associated Enterprise 2) and a related company (i.e. Associated Enterprise 1) can be described in
Resale price = US$100
Resale price margin (25%) = US$ 25
Arm’s length transfer price = US$ 75
the following formula:
TP = RSP x (1GPM), where:
► TP = the Transfer Price of a product sold between a sales company and a related company;
► RSP = the Resale Price at which a product is sold by a sales company to unrelated customers; and
► GPM = the Gross Profit Margin that a specific sales company should earn, defined as the ratio of gross profit to net sales. Gross profit is defined as Net Sales minus Cost of Goods Sold.
Comparable search or “screening” criteria are developed based upon the results of the above-mentioned examination of the economically relevant characteristics in relation to the controlled transaction. These criteria must be defined so as to identify those external uncontrolled trans-actions that satisfy comparability vis-à-vis the controlled transaction and the tested party. The search criteria should be set so as to select the most reliable comparables. At the same time, the initial search criteria should not be overly restrictive, in order not to set unrealistic expectations in terms of comparability. Once potential comparables have been selected comparability adjustments should be considered, and in cases where they improve the reliability of the comparison, they should be made. The selection of the most appropriate transfer pricing method will primarily be driven by the nature of the accurately delineated transaction, but of course, the availability of reliable comparables will influence the choice.
| It is assumed that the resale price in Figure 4.D.2 is $100. This means that Associated Enterprise 2 resells the bicycle to Independent Enterprise for $100. If we determine, based on evidence from independent comparables, that an arm’s length gross profit margin that Associated Enterprise 2 should earn is 25 per cent, Associated Enterprise 2 should cover its SG&A expenses and make an appropriate profit with this 25 per cent gross margin. The resulting transfer price between Associated Enterprise 1 and Associated Enterprise 2 (i.e. the cost of goods sold of Associated Enterprise 2) is $75 (i.e. $100 (1−0.25). |
Other approaches are possible. For example, if the associated enterprise acts as a sales agent that does not take title to the goods, it is possible to use the commission earned by the sales agent (represented as a percentage of the uncontrolled sales price of the goods concerned) as the comparable gross profit margin. The resale price margin for a reseller should always be determined by taking into account the functions performed, assets used or contributed and risks assumed by the reseller.
A typical process of comparable searching may be divided into three screening phases, namely (i) database screening (primary screening), (ii) quantitative screening (secondary screening) and (iii) qualitative screening (tertiary screening). Potential comparables are reviewed in each of these phases to determine whether they qualify as comparables.
Figure 3.D.5
Database Screening (Primary Screening)
| GAMBAR |
The financial ratio analyzed under the Resale Price Method (RPM) is the gross profit margin. Gross profit is defined as net sales minus cost of goods sold. It is easiest to determine where the reseller does not add substantially to the value of the product. The net sales figure of a sales company is the sales revenue obtained from selling products to unrelated customers, while the cost of goods sold equals the cost of purchasing the goods sold plus certain additional nonoperating costs. Thus, if we are determining the gross margin for products purchased from a related company, the cost of goods sold will include the transfer price paid to the related party (often a manufacturer).
The determination of appropriate screening criteria will depend on the most economically relevant characteristics of the accurately delineated transaction. Typically, they will begin with the industry code and include screens to ensure the transactions engaged in by the potential comparables are indeed comparable and uncontrolled, and that sufficient financial information is available and can be relied upon. While screens based on industry codes and geographic market are commonly applied, it is always important to consider what characteristics are most economically relevant to the accurately delineated tested transaction(s). For instance, functional comparability may be more important than similarity of industry or market. In such cases, indiscriminate application of the less relevant criteria may be unhelpful, resulting in no comparables being left with which to apply the transfer pricing method.
Accounting consistency is extremely important in applying the RPM. Gross profit margins will not be comparable if accounting principles and/or practices differ between the controlled transaction and the uncontrolled transaction. For example, the comparable distributors may differ from the related sales company in reporting certain costs (e.g. discounts, transportation costs, insurance and costs of performing the warranty function) as operating expenses or as cost of goods sold. Differences in inventory valuation methods will also affect the gross margins. It is thus important that the analysis does not compare “apples with oranges” but rather “apples with apples”. Appropriate adjustments may need to be applied to the data used in computing the gross margin to make sure that “similar” gross margins are compared.
The arm’s length price or margin can result from looking at comparable functionality (distributors of broadly similar types of product) or from making a transactional comparison by looking at each transaction the tested party engages in involving comparable products (i.e. sales of different types of bicycles).
The arm’s length (range of) gross profit margin(s) to be earned by the sales company in the controlled transaction can therefore be determined in the following two ways:
► By transactional comparison: for example, one could determine the gross profit margin that Associated Enterprise 2 earns when reselling bicycles purchased from an independent manufacturer in a comparable uncontrolled transaction. This uncontrolled transaction may initially have been rejected as an internal comparable for purposes of applying the CUP Method because, for example, the transaction involves a different type of bicycle. If the sale of recreational bicycles is at issue, but the unrelated transactions involve bicycle rickshaws (pedicabs) or the like this may involve broadly similar products with comparable accounting measures of Costs of Goods Sold (COGS) making gross margin comparisons sufficiently reliable; and
► By functional comparison: the gross profit margins earned by independent companies in comparable uncontrolled transactions performing functions, using assets and assuming risks comparable to the functions performed, assets used or contributed and risks assumed by Associated Enterprise 2. Functional comparison thus involves a search for comparable distribution companies rather than comparable transactions. This could, for example, include comparable distributors of wheelbarrows and carts.
In practice, transactional comparisons are more likely to achieve broad product and accounting consistency than functional comparisons. However, it is sometimes not necessary to conduct a resale price analysis for each individual product line distributed by a sales company under this method. Instead, the RPM is used in those situations to determine the gross margin a sales company should earn over its full range of (aggregated) products.
Information derived from external comparables should reflect the economic environment at the time the controlled transaction was undertaken.
In principle, information from external comparables contemporaneous with the controlled transaction might be expected to reflect the same economic environment, but there can be practical difficulties in obtaining contemporaneous information given the time required for such information to be prepared, reported, and uploaded on to databases. For a discussion on timing issues, see section 3.6.2.
An uncontrolled transaction is considered comparable to a controlled transaction if:
► There are no differences between the transactions being compared that materially affect the gross margin (for example, contractual terms, freight terms etc.); or
► Reasonably accurate adjustments can be performed to eliminate the effect of such differences.
As noted above, the RPM is more typically applied on a functional than on a transactional basis so that functional comparability is typically more important than product comparability. Product differences will probably be less critical for the RPM applied on a functional basis than for the CUP Method, because it is less probable that product differences will have a material effect on profit margins than on price. One would expect a similar level of compensation for performing similar functions across different activities.
While product differences may be more acceptable in applying the RPM as compared to the CUP Method, the property transferred should still be broadly similar in the controlled and uncontrolled transactions. Significant differences between the nature of the products sold in the controlled and uncontrolled transactions may reflect differences in functions performed, assets used or contributed or risks assumed. Such differences might suggest differences in arm’s length gross margins.
The compensation for a distribution company should generally be the same whether it sells washing machines or dryers, because the functions performed (including risks assumed and assets used or contributed) are similar for the two activities. It should also be noted, however, that distributors engaged in the sale of markedly different products cannot be compared. The price of a washing machine will, of course, differ from the price of a dryer, as the two products are not substitutes for each other. Although product comparability is less important under the RPM, greater product similarity is likely to provide more reliable transfer pricing results. It is not always necessary to conduct a resale price analysis for each individual product line distributed by the sales company. Instead, the RPM can be applied more broadly, for example based on the gross margin a sales company should earn over its full range of broadly similar products.
As the gross profit margin remunerates a sales company for performing marketing and selling functions; the RPM especially depends on comparability regarding functions performed, risks assumed and assets used or contributed. The RPM thus focuses on functional comparability. A similar level of compensation is expected for performing similar functions (using similar assets and assuming similar risks) across different activities. If there are material differences that affect the gross margins earned in the controlled and the uncontrolled transactions, adjustments should be made to account for such differences. In general, comparability adjustments should be performed on the gross profit margins of the uncontrolled transactions. The operating expenses in connection with the functions performed, assets used or contributed and risks assumed should be taken into account in this respect, as these differences are frequently reflected in different operating expenses.
The following issues should be considered in determining whether the functions performed, assets used or contributed and risks assumed by an uncontrolled entity are comparable to those of a controlled entity for purposes of applying the RPM:
► In contrast to the CUP Method, the reliability of the RPM can be influenced by factors that have less effect on the price of a product than on the costs of performing functions. Such differences could affect gross margins even if they do not affect the arm’s length prices of products (e.g. the composition of COGS). These factors could include cost structures (e.g. accounting practices), business experience (e.g. startup phase or mature business) or management efficiency;
► A resale price margin requires particular attention where the reseller adds substantially to the value of the product, for example by assisting considerably in the creation or maintenance
of intangibles related to the product (e.g. trademarks or trade names) or where goods are further processed into a more complicated product by the reseller before resale;
► The amount of the resale price margin will be affected by the level of activities performed by the reseller. For example, the distribution services provided by a reseller acting as a sales agent will be less extensive than those provided by a reseller acting
as a buysell distributor. The buysell distributor will obviously obtain a higher compensation than the sales agent;
► If the reseller performs a significant commercial activity in relation to the resale activity itself, or if it employs valuable and unique assets in its activities (e.g. valuable marketing intangibles of the reseller), it may earn a higher gross profit margin;
► The comparability analysis should try to take into account whether the reseller has the exclusive right to resell the goods, because exclusive rights may affect the resale price margin;
► The analysis should consider differences in accounting practices that apply to the reseller and to comparable companies in order to make appropriate adjustments to enhance comparability; and
► The reliability of the analysis will be affected by differences in the value of the products distributed, for example, as a result of a valuable trademark.
It should be recognized that returns to similar functions (bearing in mind assets used or contributed and risks assumed) may not be the same in different markets. Generally, reliability is enhanced when the reseller and the comparable companies are operating in the same market.
Where a significant part of the potential comparables profits is attributable to significant, unique intangibles, such as unique product design or unique engineering, that are not present in the tested party, it may not be possible to eliminate the effects of such intangibles on operating profits by performing reliable comparability adjustments. If accurate adjustments cannot be made, the potential comparable may need to be rejected.
The degree of comparability between a tested party and an uncontrolled taxpayer is impaired when the entities assume different economically significant risks which may require making a risk adjustment. For example, a contract manufacturer in certain circumstances may not assume the market risks that fully-fledged manufacturers customarily do and therefore might be expected to earn lower profit margins.
There is no universally accepted method for risk adjustment. However, in practice MNEs carry out risk adjustment through the application of certain methods that attempt to quantify on an ex ante basis (i.e. before the event) the effect of risk on anticipated profitability based on, for example, the weighted average cost of capital/capital asset pricing model. However, it is worth mentioning that both models are based upon risk models used mainly in relation to the risk of securities. Most statistical methods have their inherent limitations. Therefore, risk adjustment must be made carefully, only where needed and only if a reasonable and accurate adjustment is possible.
It has to be recognized that problems can arise due to significant differences in the transactional structure between associated party sales in a controlled company and similar transactions involving independent companies.
In some cases material differences may exist in the way transactions are structured by potential comparables and by the tested party, due to the fact that the latter operates with associated enterprises in an MNE. In such cases it may not be possible to find comparable transactions that have the same transactional structure as the controlled transaction. In these circumstances, adjustments may be needed to eliminate the effects of these differences. For example, the margins of independent distributors operating on short-term contracts may not be comparable to those of associated enterprises on long-term contracts, unless an adjustment is made to account for the short duration of the former.
It has to be stressed that comparability adjustments should be considered if and only if they are expected to increase the reliability of the results. Relevant considerations in this regard include the materiality of the differences for which an adjustment is being considered, the quality of the data used in the adjustment, the purpose of the adjustment and the reliability of the approach used to make the adjustment.
Comparability adjustments are only appropriate for differences that have a material effect on the comparison. A comparison may be appropriate despite an unadjusted difference, provided that the difference does not have a material effect on the reliability of the comparison.
No specific rules or guidelines can be given that may be applicable to every transaction. In each case, the critical factors that have a material impact on the price of the product (if the CUP Method is used) or on profit (if the RPM, CPM, TNMM or PSM is used) should be identified. Ultimately, decisions regarding whether adjustments are required depend entirely on the facts and circumstances surrounding the transactions, on the availability of information needed for the analysis and on the accuracy and reliability of any adjustments that may be made.
Available information is often not complete enough to enable a review to be made of each possible comparability factor. The analysis almost always takes place with imperfect information. That realization can be helpful in deciding whether a particular difference is material enough to make adjustments, or whether the comparability difficulties should affect the selection of the most appropriate method.
See Chapter 4 for an explanation of transfer pricing methods and selection of a suitable method.
A comparability analysis may result in an “arm’s length range” of financial indicators (prices or margins), all of which may considered to be equally reliable. It should be noted that the domestic law in some countries will specify how such a range is to be derived from the final results of the comparables, for instance by the use of particular statistical techniques. Where the transfer price is within this range, it is normally accepted as arm’s length.
However, it may be difficult to determine whether the search process has indeed resulted in a range of results, all of which are equally reliable. Uncertainty may also arise in cases where the range of results from a comparables search is very wide. Where such concerns exist therefore, it can be helpful to consider whether it is possible objectively to determine whether some potential comparables are more reliable than others. The (further) use of diagnostic ratios and qualitative screening can sometimes be helpful in this regard.
The search for reliable comparables is at the heart of most transfer pricing analyses. In many cases, it may not be straightforward, but rather, require the application of judgement. Care should thus be taken to consider potential screening criteria as objectively as possible, and avoid “cherry-picking” data. Similarly, absent factual changes, it would be expected that such criteria would be used consistently over time.
The degree of comparability between the controlled and the uncontrolled transactions, including the reliability of comparability adjustments needed and the availability of reliable information (especially on uncontrolled comparables) are key factors in selection of the most appropriate transfer pricing method. Other factors include the strengths and weaknesses of the method, the appropriateness of the method in the light of the nature of the controlled trans-action (based upon a functional analysis) etc. See further Chapter 4, Methods.
Once the transfer pricing method is selected, the next step is to apply the selected method to arrive at the correct arm’s length price or profit (or range of prices or profits) and to document the results of the analysis. The topics mentioned in this section are discussed in greater detail in Chapter 4 and 12.
The comparability analysis should be as reliable as possible. However, on many occasions a careful comparability analysis will not yield perfect matches in terms of comparable enterprises or comparable transactions to those carried out by the associated enterprises. The nature, type, quality etc. and number of comparables along with the adjustments made during a comparability analysis may be the subject of debate, interpretation and contention between the taxpayer and tax authorities. Some of the key concerns surrounding comparability analysis are described below.
Timing of origin of the transactions needs to be considered. In principle, information relating to the conditions of comparable uncontrolled transactions undertaken or carried out during the same period of time as the controlled transaction (“contemporaneous uncontrolled transactions”) is expected to be the most reliable information to use in a comparability analysis, because it reflects how independent parties have behaved in an economic environment that is the same as the economic environment of the taxpayer’s controlled transaction.
Timing of collection of the relevant comparable data is also a potential issue. In some cases, taxpayers implement transfer pricing documentation to demonstrate that they have made reasonable efforts to comply with the arm’s length principle at the time their intragroup transactions were undertaken, i.e. on an ex ante basis (hereinafter “the arm’s length price-setting” approach), based on information that was reasonably available to them at that point. Such information includes not only information on comparable transactions from previous years, but also information on economic and market changes that may have occurred between those previous years and the year of the controlled transaction. In effect, independent parties in comparable circumstances would not base their pricing decision on historical data alone. This ex ante analysis of the arm’s length price is, however, not the most common approach.
In other instances, taxpayers might test the outcome of their controlled transactions to demonstrate that the conditions of these transactions were consistent with the arm’s length principle, i.e. on an ex post basis (hereinafter “the arm’s length outcome testing” approach). This test typically takes place as part of the process for establishing the tax return at the year-end. An ex post (after the event) analysis is the most commonly used method to test the arm’s length price of international transactions.
The arm’s length price setting and the arm’s length outcome testing approaches, as well as combinations of these two approaches, are found among countries that have implemented transfer pricing rules. Country views differ as to whether data on contemporaneous transactions which only become available to the taxpayer and tax administration at the time of filing of the tax return, or conducting ex post analysis of transfer pricing, is permitted or represents improper use of hindsight.
Another potential question is whether and how to take into account future events in the transfer pricing analysis. Such events were not predict-able at the time of the testing of a controlled transaction, in particular where valuation at that time was highly uncertain. The question should be resolved, both by taxpayers and tax administrations, by reference to what independent enterprises would have done in comparable circumstances to take account of the valuation uncertainty in the pricing of the transaction.
The main issue is to:
Where this is the case, the tax administration would be justified in deter-mining the arm’s length price for the transaction on the basis of the adjustment clause or re-negotiation that would be provided at arm’s length in a comparable uncontrolled transaction. In other circumstances, where there is no reason to consider that the valuation was sufficiently uncertain at the outset that the parties would have required a price adjustment clause or would have renegotiated the terms of the agreement, there is no reason for tax administrations to make such an adjustment as it would represent an inappropriate use of hindsight. The mere existence of uncertainty should not require an ex post adjustment without consideration of what independent enterprises would have done or agreed between them.
Data from years following the year of the transaction may also sometimes be relevant to the analysis of transfer prices, but care must be taken to avoid the use of hindsight, perceiving the significance of facts and events with the benefit of knowledge accruing after they have occurred.
One of the most frequent problems taxpayers and administrations face with comparability analysis is the lack of reliable comparables with respect to the transaction(s). This issue can be particularly acute in devel-oping countries. Issues relating to lack of reliable comparables are discussed above and in the PCT Transfer Pricing Toolkit (see 2.5.3.2).
When products, property or services are offered by first-movers in specific segments there may be a dearth of comparables. These transactions typically involve use of new technology, cutting-edge research, bundled intangibles etc. which may not have satisfactory comparables. An example is intellectual property content relating to high-tech computer software. Such situations may be dealt with either by using a one-sided method (CPM, RPM or TNMM) for which the tested party is the one that does not contribute such intangibles; or, in those cases where unique intangibles are contributed by both parties to the transaction, by using a profit split method.
Owing to business consolidation and vertical integration, it may be extremely difficult in some industries to find reliable internal or external comparables. An example is the pharmaceutical industry where there exists a high level of vertical integration and consolidation in order to drive up efficiencies. In such scenarios the controlled transactions are part of a larger global supply-chain and it can be difficult to find comparable transactions between independent enterprises. In such cases also, it may be possible under certain circumstances to use comparables from other industries, possibly adjusted, in order to address this issue.
It is frequently not possible to obtain information on perfect comparables in practice, and it is therefore often necessary to use broad search criteria when identifying third-party comparables. It must be ensured that potentially relevant external comparables are not excluded because of “cherry picking” of favourable third-party information by either the taxpayers or the tax authorities, ignoring other information that does not support the position argued for.
For example, extreme results may be rejected as comparables after careful consideration by the tax authorities as they tend to skew the data. While this could be a correct application of the arm’s length principle in certain circumstances, in other cases the reasons for the extreme result may be genuine and may not always justify rejecting the company from the pool of comparables.
The need for careful consideration can be particularly important for a comparable company that loses money in a given year. This may occur because of a recession year which hit the controlled and uncontrolled trans-actions in the same way, but the loss may also be attributable to unique factors with the potentially comparable company which may warrant a conclusion that strict comparability standards are not satisfied.
To come to a correct conclusion, an unbiased analysis of the facts and circumstances surrounding the transactions should be carried out. Where one or more of the potential comparables is loss-making, further examination would be needed to understand the reasons for such losses and confirm whether the loss-making transaction or company is a reliable comparable.
Well-documented search procedures and comparability criteria make the application of the comparability standard transparent, in that the comparability standard that was applied is clearly stated and its scope can be evaluated. This will ensure that results are less susceptible to “cherry picking” since the reasons for rejection of each potential comparable are provided.
A deliberate or intentional set-off occurs when an associated enterprise has provided a benefit to another associated enterprise within the MNE group and is compensated in return by that other enterprise with some other benefits. These enterprises may claim that the benefit each has received should be set-off against the benefit each provided and that only the net gain or loss if any on the transactions needs to be considered for tax assessment.
Set-offs can be quite complex. They might involve a series of trans-actions and not just a single transaction or they may involve several members of the MNE group. Ideally the parties identify and disclose all set-offs accurately and have enough documentation to substantiate their set-off claims so that after taking account of these the conditions governing the transactions are consistent with the arm’s length principle.
The tax authorities may evaluate the transactions separately to deter-mine whether the transactions satisfy the arm’s length principle. However, the tax authorities may also choose to evaluate the set-off transactions together, in which case comparables have to be carefully selected. Set-offs in international transactions and in domestic transactions may not be easily comparable due, for example, to the asymmetries in the tax treatment of the set-offs under the taxation systems of different countries.
The price paid or payable for the goods (which under certain limited circumstances may also include the costs of services and royalties) in import transactions is the starting point for determination of any applicable customs duties. A higher price on import reduces the profit of the importer (all other things being equal) and thus the direct tax that might be due in the importing country. However, where customs duties apply, this would also result in higher duties being payable. Accordingly, there may be an inherent conflict between the revenue implications and the motivation of the customs and direct tax authorities. While the direct tax authority would focus on overvalued import prices, the customs authority will seek to ensure that the declared customs value has not been undervalued to reduce duty liability.
The WTO Agreement on Implementation of Article VII of the General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade 1994 (“the WTO Valuation Agreement”) sets out the methodology for determining the customs value of imported goods. Customs valuation is the procedure applied to determine the customs value of imported goods for the purpose of calculating ad valorem customs duties. Article 22 of the WTO Valuation Agreement requires that each Member of the WTO shall ensure the conformity of its laws, regulations and administrative procedures with the provisions of the Agreement. In contrast, for direct tax purposes, the tax authorities in most countries use the “arm’s length principle” as a standard for valuing cross-border related party transactions.
Both customs valuation and transfer pricing approaches aim at determining an appropriate price for cross-border transactions. However, the approaches differ and in some cases may be incompatible due to different motivations, theoretical frameworks, documentation requirements or other factors, causing practical difficulties for importers. Therefore, better coordination and exchange of information between direct tax and customs authorities is encouraged. However, the extent to which this is possible may depend on how the customs services and tax administrations are organized in each country. For some countries the two organizations are more integrated, and for others they are completely separate.
In appropriate circumstances the verified customs value may be useful to tax administrations in evaluating the arm’s length character of the transfer prices of imported goods in international transactions between associated enterprises. In particular, customs may have contemporaneous information regarding the transaction that could be relevant for transfer pricing purposes, while tax authorities may have transfer pricing documentation which provides detailed information on the circumstances of the transaction.
Some customs administrations are now also making use of transfer pricing data, where relevant, to ensure that the price of an associated party transaction has not been affected by the special relationship between the parties.
There are similarities between customs valuation and transfer pricing methods, for instance, one method permitted for the purposes of verifying customs values uses a comparison between the value of the goods imported by a related party with the value of identical or similar goods imported by independent parties, which may be considered as analogous to the application of a CUP Method for transfer pricing. Examining customs values may thus provide relevant information and a useful starting point for transfer pricing purposes in some cases and may also help in reducing the compliance burden for taxpayers. However, it should be borne in mind that customs valuation methods are highly prescriptive and may not be fully aligned with the arm’s length principle as it applies for direct tax purposes.
There has been a great deal of focus internationally on the inter-play between transfer pricing and customs valuation methods. Following two joint World Customs Organization (WCO)– OECD conferences in 2006 and 2007, it became clear that harmonization of the two systems was not a realistic proposition; particularly given the fact that the WTO Valuation Agreement is not expected to be updated in the short to medium term. Discussions have therefore focused on the extent to which Customs may use transfer pricing information when carrying out examination of related party transactions. The principle of the customs valuation in cases involving related party exporters and importers and where there are doubts as to the reliability of the price paid or payable for the goods, is to judge whether the special relationship between the parties influenced the price by exam-ining “the circumstances surrounding the sale” (WTO Valuation Agreement Article 1, paragraph 2(a)).
The WCO’s Technical Committee on Customs Valuation, which has the mandate for ensuring, at the technical level, uniformity in interpretation and application of the WTO Valuation Agreement, has issued several instruments on this topic.26 These are briefly summarized below.
WCO (2018). Guide to Customs Valuation and Transfer Pricing. Brussels: WCO. Available from http://www.wcoomd.org/-/media/wco/public/global/pdf/ topics/key-issues/revenue-package/wco-guide-to-customs-valuation-and-transfer-pricing.pdf?la=en. Annex III, VI and VII.
Commentary 23.1 recognizes the principle that a transfer pricing study may, in some cases, be used by customs as a basis for examining the circumstances of the sale. Following this general principle, Case Study 14.1, sets out a scenario where customs use transfer pricing documentation, based on the TNMM, to confirm that the prices applicable in a related party trans-action have not been influenced by the relationship between those parties.
Case Study 14.2 also provides an example of customs authorities making use of transfer pricing information (based on the RPM) but in contrast concludes that the declared import price was not settled in a manner consistent with normal pricing practices of the industry but rather had been influenced by the relationship between the buyer and seller.
The WCO has produced the WCO Guide to Customs Valuation and Transfer Pricing (2018) mentioned in 3.6.6.8 above, which includes all relevant technical information on the two methodologies and explores the interaction between them. It includes good practices for customs and tax administrations, and businesses. In particular, customs and tax administrations are encouraged to work more closely together and the guide emphasizes that businesses should consider customs’ needs when developing transfer pricing strategies. To this end, the WCO has produced Guidelines for Strengthening Cooperation and the Exchanging of Information between Customs and Tax Authorities at the National Level (October 2016).27 These Guidelines endeavour to provide guidance and ideas to customs and tax authorities for formalizing the contacts and strengthening the existing cooperation at the national level, on a range of issues of mutual interest.
WCO (2016). Guidelines for Strengthening Cooperation and the Exchanging of Information Between Customs and Tax Authorities at the National Level. Brussels: WCO. Available from http://www.wcoomd.org/~/media/wco/public/global/pdf/ topics/facilitation/instruments-and-tools/tools/customs-tax-cooperation/customs_ tax_guidelines_en_final2.pdf?db=web
Concern is often expressed by taxpayers, especially MNEs, over aspects of data collection by tax authorities and its confidentiality. Tax authorities have access to, as they need to, very sensitive and highly confidential information about taxpayers, such as data relating to margins, profitability and business contracts. Confidence in the tax system means that this information needs to be treated carefully, especially as it may reveal sensitive business information about that taxpayer’s profitability, business strategies and so forth.
A secret comparable generally refers to the use of information or data about a taxpayer by the tax authorities to form the basis of transfer pricing scrutiny of another taxpayer. The taxpayer under scrutiny is not given access to that information — it may, for example, reveal confidential information about a competitor (i.e. the first taxpayer— to which the data relates).
There is a need to exercise caution against the use of secret comparables unless the tax administration is able, within the limits of its domestic confidentiality requirements, to disclose the data to the taxpayer whose transactions are being reviewed. This would enable an adequate opportunity for the taxpayer to defend its own position and to safeguard effective judicial control by the courts. Taxpayers contend that the use of such secret information is against the basic principles of equity, as the taxpayer is required to benchmark its controlled transactions with comparables not available to it, without the opportunity to question comparability or argue that adjustments are needed. Taxpayers contend that it would be unfair if they face the consequences of adjustments made on this basis, such as additions to income, typically coupled with interest, penalties etc. Furthermore, double taxation may not be relieved if secret comparables cannot be disclosed to the compe-tent authority of another country.
Comparability analysis looks simple in theory but in practice it can be a laborious, difficult, time-consuming and, more often than not, expen-sive exercise. Seeking information, analyzing all the data from various sources, documenting the analysis and substantiating adjustments are all steps that require time and money. It is therefore important to put the need for comparability analyses in perspective. The aim should be to ensure that the compliance burden and costs borne by a taxpayer to identify possible comparables and obtain detailed information thereon are reasonable and proportionate to the complexity of the transaction. It is recognized that the cost of obtaining information can be a real concern, especially for small to medium-sized operations, but also for those MNEs that deal with a very large number of controlled transactions in many countries. However, it should be observed that the burden of cost cannot be a reason for the dilution of comparability standards.
These resource considerations apply at least as much to many devel-oping countries, and efforts must be made to ensure that their position is not prejudiced by a lack of such resources in ensuring the arm’s length pricing of transactions in their jurisdictions.
When undertaking comparability analysis there is no requirement for an exhaustive search of all possible relevant sources of information. Taxpayers and tax administrations should exercise judgment to determine whether particular comparables are reliable.
Transfer pricing theory meets practice in comparability analysis— the translation of the arm’s length principle into the selection of reliable comparables and of the appropriate transfer pricing method, eventually yielding the transfer price. This is all facilitated by comparability analysis.
A good comparability analysis is an essential step in any transfer pricing analysis in order to gain a correct understanding of the economically significant characteristics of the controlled transaction, and of the respective roles of the parties to the controlled transaction. This will assist in the selection of the most appropriate transfer pricing method in the circumstances of the case. This part of the process is fact-based and requires the taxpayer or tax administration to demonstrate an understanding of how business operates.
In most cases, the application of the selected transfer pricing method will then rely on the identification of uncontrolled comparable transactions. This part of the process may be particularly complicated, especially in countries that have limited access to information on potential comparables. It is worth emphasizing that solutions exist to deal with this problem, including the collection of information on internal comparables (i.e. transactions between the taxpayer or its associated enterprise and a third party) where they exist; the collection of public information on third parties (e.g. competitors) that are likely to be involved in uncontrolled transactions comparable to the taxpayer’s controlled transaction, or the possible use of databases from other countries.
It is clear that the comparability analysis should be as reliable as possible so as to arrive at the correct arm’s length price or profit (or range of prices or profits). In performing this comparability analysis, it may be necessary for the taxpayer or the tax authorities to undertake a detailed functional analysis taking into consideration a wide variety of data sources, other factors and, if necessary, a series of comparability adjustments while arriving at a suitable set of benchmarks (or comparables). The choices made in the course of this analysis have to be substantiated and the overall process has to be thor-oughly documented.
Further, as noted in the introduction, the lack of comparables for a given controlled transaction does not mean that it is or is not at arm’s length or that the arm’s length principle cannot be applied. This is especially important given the growing importance of integrated business models and of transactions involving unique intangibles for which comparables may not be available. The need for a reliable analysis must therefore be balanced with a pragmatic approach and one should not set unrealistic expectations for comparability analyses.
Financial transactions between independent enterprises are based on various commercial considerations. Members of an MNE, however, have the flexibility and discretion to decide the conditions that will apply to financial transactions within the group. As a result, in an intragroup situation, the tax consequences may be a consideration which has an influence on the nature or structure of those financial transactions.
Financial transactions are an important part of the operations of MNEs. Typically, financial transactions play a role in supporting the value creation process of MNEs. The responsibilities of corporate treasurers include managing cash to help MNEs meet their financial and busi-ness obligations and objectives. The aims of the corporate treasury function will include ensuring the availability of necessary cash flows, and will often extend to evaluating investment strategies to achieve an appropriate balance of risk and reward. Debt management is an integral part of their responsibility, as it is common for MNEs to finance part of their operations through loans. Similarly, the corporate treasury function may also manage the costs of external funding through the use of intragroup guarantees or through cash pooling arrangements. MNEs may operate on a decentralized basis with respect to their treasury management whereby each entity or group of entities within the group is responsible for its own financing arrangements; or it may instead centralize the treasury function at a regional or global level.
Intragroup financial transactions are subject to the arm’s length principle just as intragroup services, intragroup sales of products and components, and other intragroup transactions are. As is the case in any other intragroup arrangement, the application of the arm’s length principle to financial transactions first requires the accurate delineation of the actual transaction (see 3.3.2), including consideration of the purpose of the financial transaction in the context of the business of the MNE. Guidance on these matters is provided in section 9.6.
Regulated financial institutions like banks and insurance companies are governed by supervisory authorities, central banks and multinational banking institutions and require a license to operate. Such institutions are subject to a strict regulatory regime (Basel III rules) which may influence the intragroup financial transactions they can enter into. This chapter does not address transfer pricing of financial transactions conducted within a regulated financial institution. Instead, the discussion and guidance in this chapter are tailored to non-financial services MNEs that engage in intragroup financial transactions. The chapter does not attempt to cover the full range of financial transactions that may occur. However, as a general principle, the transfer pricing analysis of any intragroup financial transaction follows the same analytical framework as would apply to any other intragroup transaction. These are the principles laid out in Chapter 3 (Comparability Analysis), which describes the process by which the actual transaction can be accurately delineated and priced by reference to the arm’s length principle.
Several factors combine to make intragroup financial arrangements important for both taxpayers and tax administrations:
For the above reasons, many countries have introduced tax measures aimed at reducing the tax advantages of debt financing.
This chapter will introduce the transfer pricing considerations for intragroup financial transactions. First, it will describe the commercial considerations relating to corporate financing decisions. It will then present some of the more common types of intragroup financial transactions (section 9.3) as well as describing the operations of group financing departments/entities (section 9.4). The chapter goes on to describe various relevant corporate income tax approaches taken by tax administrations (section 9.5). Next, the chapter discusses the application of the arm’s length principle to financial transactions in general (section 9.6 to 9.11), and finally, there are sections specifically covering intragroup loans (section 9.12) and intragroup financial guarantees (section 9.13).63
This chapter does not discuss performance guarantees.
Corporate financing decisions are of fundamental relevance for an MNE. When an MNE identifies a business opportunity for which it requires funding, it will need to consider whether it should make use of internal funding (to the extent it is available) and /or external funding. Where external funding is used, consideration of the balance between equity financing and debt financing may also be required. Each has its own advantages and disadvantages that extend beyond tax considerations. Interest payments deriving from debt financing are generally deductible for the borrower (payer) and taxed as ordinary income in the hands of the lender (payee), whereas dividend payments, or other equity returns are generally not tax deductible to the payer and are often subject to some form of tax relief (exemption, credit, etc.) in the hands of the payee. It is beyond the scope of this Chapter to address the economic benefits or disadvantages of corporate financing decisions.
Although there are many theories that have attempted to hypothesize the relevant factors defining an optimal corporate capital structure, it should be noted that numerous factors influence the decision of a company’s Management Board when defining the capital structure of their firm. Transfer pricing considerations do not serve to determine what capital structure is optimal for a company.
However, the capital structure of an entity that is a part of an MNE may impact the transfer pricing analysis of intragroup financial transactions. That is, to assess the impact of an entity’s capital structure on intragroup financial transactions, it may be important to analyze the entity’s debt capacity. This specific aspect is not discussed further in this Chapter. The commentary to Article 9 is relevant in this respect.
Many ordinary activities of an MNE require consideration of funding. These include: assuring cash flow for day-to-day operations, funding mergers or acquisitions, or making available credit facilities for operating companies seeking to purchase plant or equipment. Different financial instruments may be utilized, depending on the amount of funding needed and length of time for which the funding is required. A wide range of instruments can be regarded as financial transactions. Typical examples include equity instruments (e.g. common stocks), debt instruments (e.g. ordinary and special bank loans, ordinary and special bonds, commercial paper and money market instruments, debentures, government securities), and financial derivatives (e.g., foreign exchange transactions, stock options, futures, forward contracts, notional principal contracts, investment derivatives and other hybrids).
In an intragroup context, more common financial transactions include intragroup loans, financial guarantees by a parent or group financing company for third-party loans to subsidiaries, cash pooling arrangements, hybrid financing, derivatives, and treasury services (e.g. foreign exchange risk management, factoring and forfeiting, netting arrangements, payment factories, commodity risk management, captive insurance, asset management, carbon trading, etc.). Intragroup loans and financial guarantees are discussed in more detail in sections 9.12 and 9.13, respectively.
Company treasurers are generally concerned with how to ensure MNEs have access to cash to meet their anticipated needs, to secure cost-effective financing, and to provide financial risk management appropriate to the level of risk the MNE wishes to assume. For example, if an MNE operates internationally, it is likely to receive payments in different currencies. For planning and budgeting purposes, different currencies present variability of future cash flows (usually at a cost). Entering into a forward contract can hedge (and effectively fix) future cash flows. Not hedging would leave the company exposed to currency fluctuations and to uncertainty as to the actual cash flows in the future. Group treasury functions may monitor these risks, evaluate any natural hedges that may exist within the MNE, and price hedging contracts where appropriate. Similarly, the need to buy inputs for production such as commodities that are subject to price fluctuations can cause substantial profit and loss volatility for a company. It is not always possible to enter into fixed price contracts for commodities; when it is possible, fixed price contracts may exclude the possibility to obtain further cost savings. The company’s procurement and treasury departments may therefore work together to evaluate hedging arrangements. This chapter on financial transactions does not discuss hedging transactions.
In addition to management of cash flows, entering into intragroup loans or using revolving lines of credit, MNEs may also issue bonds or securities in the market to fund activities or to refinance existing loans. To make securities issued by the company more attractive to external investors, a parent company guarantee may be provided in support of the subsidiary that is the issuer of record. Similarly, a parent company may issue a guarantee to an independent bank that provides funds to a subsidiary company which has a low credit rating, in order to improve the terms and conditions of the subsidiary’s bank loan (e.g. to reduce interest expenses). Intragroup financial guarantees come in many forms and are discussed in more detail in section 9.13.
Where an MNE has subsidiaries in different countries, the different parts of the business may be independently responsible for the cash management functions of each entity or group of entities. If these areas each act prudently, ensuring they have adequate cash, the group may, as a whole, end up holding more cash than they would have needed for operating purposes had they pooled their resources. Where these individual cash requirements are managed through a centralized treasury department which has a revolving credit facility with a third-party bank, the total amount drawn down will be greater than it would otherwise need to be. The MNE’s treasurer may decide to implement a centralized cash pooling arrangement to net off the facility (i.e. a target-balancing or zero-balancing cash pool). This would reduce the cost of the credit facility (or avoid having to take out a loan for other needs) and make optimal use of the average cash balances sitting idle in the accounts of each area.
There are also cash pooling arrangements where a bank combines the debit and credit balances of different entities or departments of the MNE to derive net balances on a real or notional basis. As a result, interest is credited on a positive overall balance and debited on a negative overall balance (i.e. notional or interest compensation cash pool).
An intragroup cash pooling arrangement can generate numerous advantages for participants in the arrangement. These include minimizing the liquidity requirements, minimizing external interest costs, ensuring flexible day-to-day financing, reducing transaction costs related to local bank accounts, increasing the participants’ bargaining power relative to external banks and thus helping them to obtain more advantageous conditions (e.g. interest rates) on the common bank account, and helping to centralize financing decisions. This chapter does not however discuss cash pooling transactions in further detail.
Another common type of intragroup financial transaction is captive insurance. An MNE may create an insurance company to provide coverage for participating MNE entities. Typically, the main purpose for doing so is to avoid using third-party insurance companies, which may have volatile pricing, or may not meet the specific needs of the company. By creating its own insurance company, the MNE may aim to stabilize premiums, reduce costs, cover difficult-to-insure risks, have direct access to reinsurance markets, and increase cash flow. When a company creates a captive insurer, it is indirectly able to evaluate the risks of subsidiaries, write policies, set premiums and ultimately either return unused funds in the form of profits, or invest them for future claim pay-outs. Captive insurance companies are also sometimes set up to insure the risks of the MNE’s customers. This is an alternative form of risk management. This chapter on financial transactions does not discuss captive insurance transactions in any detail.
The scope of this chapter will be limited to the analysis of intra-group loans and intragroup financial guarantees, since they are the most commonly seen financial transactions in practice. However, the general guidance on these transactions may also be relevant to other types of financial transactions.
Financial transactions can be performed and organized in different ways within an MNE. The organization of the treasury function will depend on the structure of a given MNE and the complexity of its operations. Different treasury structures involve different degrees of centralization. In its most decentralized form, each entity within the MNE has full autonomy over its own financial resources. At the other end of the spectrum, a centralized treasury has full control over the financial resources of the entire group. That is, it centralizes some or all activities relating to cash and liquidity management, management of foreign exchange risk and interest rate risk, etc. In these situations, individual group members remain responsible for operational matters, while responsibility for financing matters is held by the central treasury. Centralization of financing and treasury functions can offer significant scale benefits and financing cost savings for an MNE.
There are several models of treasury departments/entities:
In practice, a combination of the profiles above is often seen.
The category of treasury department/entity that renders the specific financial transactions that are in place may be relevant and provide an initial indication of the most appropriate method to be used to assess the arm’s length nature of intragroup financial transactions. To determine an arm’s length remuneration for services rendered, an accurate delineation of the actual transaction (including a functional analysis) is required. See further Chapter 5 on Intragroup Services.
Treasury departments/entities operating as service centres are typically remunerated by applying the CUP Method, the CPM, or the TNMM based on cost. In contrast, treasury departments/entities operating as profit centres are typically remunerated based on pricing the transactions conducted and allocating the credit risk of those transactions to the treasury department. Consequently, it may be appropriate for the ‘spread’ between costs of funding and return on cash invested to be largely allocated to that treasury department/entity. To determine the arm’s length remuneration for financial transactions such as loans and guarantees, reference is made to sections 9.12 and 9.13. It should also be remembered that the ‘substance’ of centralized activities generally requires careful review and is an important element of the accurate delineation process.
Raising corporate tax revenue can be especially important for devel-oping countries. To the extent that a country’s tax systems provide for income tax deductions for interest and not for dividends or other returns to equity capital, there is an economic incentive for companies doing business in those countries to use debt financing.
To reduce the base erosion effect of debt financing and the relevance of the tax factor in choosing between equity and debt financing, some countries have made the tax policy choice to introduce in their domestic tax laws measures aimed at either reducing the advantage of debt financing or increasing the advantages of equity financing. Measures which seek to limit base erosion associated with excessive debt financing can be broadly grouped into General Anti-Avoidance Rules (GAARs) and Specific Anti-Avoidance Rules (SAARs). For a more in-depth discussion on the specific available measures to counter excessive interest deductions claimed by residents, reference is made to the UN Practical Portfolio on Protecting the Tax Base of Developing Countries against Base-eroding Payments: Interest and Other Financing Expenses.64 The Practical Portfolio includes a discussion of the pros and cons of various measures65 to counter excessive interest deductions.
Prepared by Professor Brian J. Arnold, Canadian Tax Foundation, Toronto, Canada and Peter Barnes, Duke Center for International Development, USA.
These measures may include transfer pricing rules, treating shareholder debt as equity, thin capitalization rules, earnings-stripping rules, preventing tax treaties from inhibiting the application of thin capitalization or earnings stripping rules, and other measures.
One common approach is to implement a rule that would limit net interest expense deductions based on their ratio to earnings before interest, taxes, depreciation and amortization (EBITDA).66 Banks, insurance companies and other financial businesses (leasing companies, asset management companies, companies subject to special tax regimes) might require special consideration under such regimes.67 Another common approach is to implement thin capitalization rules which limit interest deductions by reference to a maximum allowable debt to equity ratio.
As recommended by the OECD BEPS Action 4 Final Report. The following measures might complement this rule:
As recommended by the OECD BEPS Action 4 Final Report.
The interaction between the corporate income tax measures addressing financing decisions such as rules on thin capitalization and the transfer pricing rules might need careful consideration under domestic law, since both sets of rules might address similar issues and result in completely or partially denying deductions for interest and similar expenses.
The assessment of the arm’s length nature of an intragroup financial transaction essentially follows the same approach that applies for other intra-group transactions discussed in section 3.2. It requires the identification of the commercial or financial relations (including an understanding of the economically significant characteristics of the controlled transactions) leading to the accurate delineation and recognition of the actual transaction, and, after that, the selection and application of the most appropriate transfer pricing method. In this chapter, for practical purposes, references are often made to loan transactions since they are a common type of intragroup financial transaction. However, similar considerations apply to other types of intra-group financial transactions.
From a policy perspective the question regularly arises as to whether base erosion through excessive debt may be tackled through application of the arm’s length principle. Article 9 of the UN Model Convention embodies the arm’s length principle. The commentary to this Article references the OECD Commentary on Article 9, which in turn clarifies that the Article is relevant not only in determining whether the rate of interest provided for in a loan contract is an arm’s length rate but also whether a prima facie loan can be regarded as a loan or should be regarded as some other kind of payment, in particular a contribution to equity capital. Based on the analysis in the UN Article 9 Commentary, (developing) countries have expressed the desire to use the concepts of Article 9 as embodied in their domestic transfer pricing rules for purposes of analyzing the arm’s length nature of intragroup financial transactions and determining not only whether interest charges are excessive, but also whether the financial transaction is accurately delineated as debt. In this respect, reference is also made to paragraphs 3.1.4 to 3.1.9.
The decision to characterize a transaction that is presented as a loan (in its entirety or partly) as something other than a loan requires careful analysis and should be based on adequate information, as such a conclusion may lead to double taxation (see section 3.3.2.2). The approach taken to analyzing financial transactions is up to the tax authorities of the relevant jurisdiction, although it is recommended that they clarify which approach is routinely followed under their domestic transfer pricing rules and guidance.
Considering the above, the analysis of the arm’s length nature of financial transactions can arguably be conducted from several perspectives. First, it could be undertaken by initially accepting the taxpayer’s characterization of the transaction as a loan at face value, until the facts and circum-stances of the transaction (including any additional available evidence or conduct of the parties) leads to a conclusion that the transaction is commercially irrational. If the latter conclusion is arrived at, the transaction may be disregarded as a loan for transfer pricing purposes. That conclusion does not necessarily affect the civil law or common law denomination of the transaction; it only affects the transfer pricing analysis. In this first scenario, the transaction essentially is treated as it is presented, until and unless it can be considered commercially irrational.
Alternatively, a second possibility is that the analysis of the financial transaction could be conducted from the perspective of determining whether the economically significant characteristics of the transaction lead to the conclusion that it sufficiently resembles and has the features or hallmarks of a loan, or alternatively, it more resembles something other than a loan. At a certain point, the review of the characteristics (together with the conduct of the parties or any additional evidence) may lead to the conclusion that the financial transaction is not a loan. If so, it may be that for transfer pricing purposes, the transaction ought to be treated as something other than a loan. This conclusion does not necessarily affect the civil law or common law denomination of the transaction, or its classification for accounting purposes; it only affects the transfer pricing analysis. Furthermore, if the facts and circumstances of the transaction lead to the conclusion that the transaction is commercially irrational, it may be disregarded as a loan for transfer pricing purposes.
A third possibility involves the same process as the second in terms of determining the characteristics of the financial transaction, however it also considers whether only part of the transaction should be treated as a loan. Relevant evidence might, for example, include a debt capacity analysis of the borrower. In such cases, it may be that for transfer pricing purposes the transaction is treated partly as a loan and partly as something other than a loan, such as a contribution to equity (see also the guidance at 3.1.8). Once again, this conclusion does not necessarily affect the civil law or common law characterization of the transaction or its classification for accounting purposes; it only affects the transfer pricing analysis. Furthermore, if the facts and circumstances of the transaction lead to the conclusion that the transaction as a whole is commercially irrational, the transaction may be disregarded as a loan for transfer pricing purposes.
Before deciding to question the nature of a financial transaction and split it into its component parts, tax authorities would be expected to have conducted a detailed analysis of the transactions and relevant associated enterprises. This may include consideration of the purpose to which they intend to put the borrowed funds, their economic circumstances, relevant business strategies, creditworthiness, debt capacity and security offered, etc. as outlined at 9.7.2.2 below. In all three scenarios mentioned above, the treatment of a transaction as something other than a loan would, for tax purposes, result in a limitation in the deductibility of interest expenses (entirely or partially) and not necessarily imply characterizing the transaction as some-thing else (e.g. an equity instrument).
The following section provides an overview of economically significant characteristics of a financial transaction that may be considered when assessing such transactions for transfer pricing purposes.
Some of the economically significant characteristics of a financial transaction include the following:
The above analysis should consider how those functions relate to the wider generation of value by the MNE to which the parties belong, the circumstances surrounding the transaction, and industry practices such as:
|
It should be noted that the listed contract clause examples are not exhaustive.
Determining the arm’s length nature of a financial transaction requires that the perspectives of both parties to the transaction are considered. With respect to an intragroup loan, for example, this means that the economically relevant characteristics of the transaction should be analyzed from the perspective of both the lender and borrower. At arm’s length, a lender will conduct a credit assessment of the borrower to make the decision on whether to provide a loan, as well as on the amount and the terms of the loan. A borrower will generally assess whether the term of the loan will meet its commercial needs and fall within its debt capacity. It will also need to have the capability to make decisions relating to the risks it is purported to assume.
The arm’s length nature of a transaction should initially be considered by reference to the transaction actually undertaken by the associated enterprises as it has been structured by them. Tax administrations should examine the conduct of the parties and base the analysis of the financial transaction under review on the actual conduct of the parties. Based on domestic law or tax treaty considerations, it may be that the “label” applied to an intragroup financial transaction is not correct. Where this is the case, as discussed in 9.7.1 above, the arm’s length principle may be applied to characterize an intragroup financial transaction as being different from that which was initially presented by the taxpayer.
Separately, it should be noted that in many jurisdictions there may be domestic jurisprudence on the above aspects as well, and this may impact on the nature of transactions involving funding. Domestic jurisprudence may be relevant or even determinative for the characterization of a financial transaction. However, in instances where the character of a financial transaction as debt or equity is not clear and where jurisprudence does not provide persuasive guidance, consideration of the relevant aspects mentioned in this chapter may be useful to the analysis of the transaction.
Once the financial transaction is accurately delineated, the most appropriate transfer pricing method can be selected and applied. Within this process, potentially comparable financial transactions can be identified, and comparability adjustments might be applicable, to determine the arm’s length price or profit (or range of prices or profits) for the financial transaction(s) under review.
| Borrowing Company, BCo, receives funds under a loan agreement from Lending Company, LCo. BCo and LCo are associated enterprises. The loan agreement does not include a maturity date, no security is provided, and interest is contingent on specified levels of profits being achieved by BCo. While these features on their own should not be taken as indicating that the advance of funding is not a loan, on further examination of the facts, it is found that BCo uses the advance to fund the development of a new business concept, that its existing business is weakening, that both its existing and new businesses are not projected to be able to generate sufficient cashflows over a relevant period to service the loan, and that, consequently, lower amounts of interest will in fact be paid than pro-vided for in the agreement. The guidance in section 9.7.1 is relevant to this example. Some features of the arrangement suggest hallmarks of equity rather than debt, and, together with the analysis of all the circumstances (e.g. BCo’s businesses), may lead to a determination that for transfer pricing purposes the arrangement might not be delineated as a loan, with the result that interest deductions would be denied or restricted. Moreover, even if the arrangement is delineated on the evidence as a loan, the commercial rationality of the transaction might be questioned and may prevent determination of a mutually acceptable price. In particular, it is doubtful that BCo and a third-party lender would have been able to agree terms for a loan given the very high level of risk to the lender. This evidence may lead to the determination under the guidance of sections 3.3.2.1 to 3.3.2.6 that the loan arrangement might not be recognized as an interest-bearing loan for transfer pricing purposes.
|
| AE Co 1 is organized in Country A where it maintains an office and has numerous employees. AE Co1 engages in a manufacturing business in Country A. It acquires raw materials from unrelated suppliers located in Country C. Before the events described below, raw materials purchased by AE Co1 were typically shipped from suppliers in Country C to AE Co1’s manufacturing facilities in Country A via independent shipping companies. After thorough review of alternatives, AE Co 1’s management concludes that it could reduce its costs by commissioning the construction of a specially designed vessel and by using that vessel to meet its raw material shipping needs rather than relying on independent shipping companies to transport purchased raw materials. AE Co1 commissioned a design firm to prepare a unique vessel design suited to AE Co1’s specific needs and identified an unrelated construction firm in Country C to build the vessel. After the construction contract was negotiated by AE Co1 employees, but before it was executed, AE Co1 registered AE Co2 in Country C. AE Co1 contributed the minimum statutory capital under Country C law of $1,000 to AE Co2 in exchange for 100 of $10 par AE Co2 shares. AE Co 2 was to become the party contracting for the construction of the new vessel, and upon completion of the vessel would become the vessel’s owner and the shipper of record for all of AE Co1’s raw materials procured from suppliers in Country C. Immediately after AE Co2 was registered, AE Co1 entered into a loan agreement with AE Co2 in which AE Co1 agreed to advance $100 mil-lion dollars to AE Co2 as required to (i) fund AE Co2’s obligations to the construction firm under the construction contract and (ii) fund AE Co2’s day-to-day operating expenses during the period the vessel was under construction. The loan agreement did not call for AE Co2 to make any periodic interest payments. The loan agreement provided AE Co1 with the option to convert the debt obligation to additional equity shares of AE Co2 at a conversion price of $10 per share at any time within five years. The agreement also permitted AE Co2 to retire the debt at any time within three years of the execution of the loan agreement in exchange for a payment of $105 million. AE Co1 advanced the $100 million loan amount entirely from its own internally generated funds. Funds were advanced to AE Co2 during the year following execution of the loan agreement as the funds were required by AE Co2 to make payments to the construction firm or for other operating expenses. AE Co1 did not borrow from any other party to finance the loan. At the same time as the loan agreement was executed, AE Co2 signed the construction agreement. In conjunction with the execution of the construction agreement, AE Co1 executed a detailed written guarantee of AE Co2’s obligations under the construction agreement in favour of the construction firm. The construction of the vessel was completed on schedule and the vessel was placed in service by AE Co2 one year after the loan agreement and construction agreement were signed. At the time it was placed in service, the vessel had a market value of $110 million. At the end of Year 3, AE Co1 exercised its option to convert the entire loan principal to additional equity shares in AE Co2. AE Co2 never made any payment of principal or interest on the loan to AE Co1. Countries A and C conducted a simultaneous audit of the tax returns of AE Co1 and AE Co2 for the three-year period following execution of the construction agreement and loan agreement. In the course of the audit, Country A tax authorities suggested that the $100 million advance should properly be characterized as a loan and that a transfer pricing adjustment should be made to attribute an arm’s length rate of interest income to AE Co1 in each of the three years under audit. Country C tax authorities took the position that the advance should be accurately delineated for transfer pricing purposes as a contribution by AE Co 1 to the equity of AE Co2 from the outset and that no interest payments to AE Co1 should be imputed under transfer pricing rules. In seeking to resolve the differences of view between the tax authorities of countries A and C, and in determining whether the advance of funds from AE Co1 to AE Co2 should be treated wholly or in part as interest-bearing for transfer pricing purposes, the answers to the following questions may help to illuminate some of the relevant considerations: (i) are there features of the arrangements in their totality that suggest there were commercial pressures or legal requirements for the party to the construction contract to be located in the same territory as the construction firm, and that AE Co2 was created as the proxy in Country C for AE Co1 in order to fulfil these requirements? (ii) are there features of the advance that indicate whether it has hallmarks of debt or equity? Relevant considerations might include the stated absence of interest requirements or repayment terms, the lack of interest payments, and the convertibility option. What evidence exists about the circum-stances and motivation in Year 3 that resulted in conversion? (iii) what is the debt capacity of AE Co2, that is, would a third party have provided a loan to AE Co2 in the circumstances described? Relevant matters might include the potential future cash flows arising to AE Co2 from its chartering of the vessel to AE Co1 upon completion that may be taken into account by third-party lenders, including the contractual rights to such cash flows; the length of the future period over which they may be expected to arise; the risk that they might not materialize; the potential for alternative chartering; and the risk that the completion date may be delayed (with the result that the cash flows are deferred). It may also be relevant to consider the security that may be taken into account by third-party lenders represented by the work in progress of the vessel at stages of construction as well as by its fully completed status. The special design of the vessel to meet the particular needs of AE Co1 may affect its perceived security valuation. (iv) what are the risks of additional costs under the construction contract? AE Co1 has provided a guarantee to the construction firm, and this provides the construction firm with some protection against non-payment. However, the guarantee does not mean that, in an arm’s length situation, AE Co1 would not seek to recover additional amounts from AE Co2, potentially leading to the need for AE Co2 to raise additional funds. The inability of AE Co2 to raise additional funds could increase the risk of default. Should risks of cost overruns be factored into the debt capacity of AE Co2, or is the construction contract a fixed price contract? Are potential delays in completion subject to penalties payable by the construction firm which would help to offset the delays in commencing chartering income? (v) is it possible to compute a price for the loan that AE Co2 would reasonably be able to pay (taking into account its potential future cash flows) and that would properly remunerate AE Co1 for the risk it is taking on? The circumstances suggest that any standalone credit rating of AE Co2 would be below investment grade and that AE Co2 would present a significant credit risk. If not, is it possible to compute a price on the basis that part of the advance is treated as equity? The guidance in section 9.7 is generally applicable to the considerations outlined above, and the guidance in section 9.7.1.2 is particularly relevant to this example. |
To accurately delineate the actual transaction and to be able to seek reliable comparables to test the arm’s length nature of the intragroup financial transaction, the creditworthiness of the associated enterprises involved in the transactions may need to be considered. The creditworthiness of an enterprise has regard to the potential that the enterprise will not be able to meet its payment obligations in accordance with the terms of the transaction (in this respect mention is also made of “debtor” or “issuer” credit ratings, where the term “issuer” indicates the debtor). In the case of intragroup loans, this essentially involves, inter alia, consideration of the security of the lending (that is, what collateral the borrower can offer) and consideration of the borrower’s likely future cash flows to pay interest and repay the principal amount of the debt. One way to assess debt capacity is to look at the credit rating of the debtor, which reflects the credit risk for a creditor extending debt to the debtor.
Credit risk may be measured by assigning a rating (i.e. credit rating) to the debtor or to a specific instrument issued by a debtor. In some cases, these ratings may be derived from independent commercial credit rating agencies. The rating expresses the probability of default and thus the risk to the potential lender. In addition to specialist credit rating agencies, some companies have also developed in-house commercial tools that are intended to be used for credit rating purposes. Credit ratings provided by independent credit rating agencies generally consider both qualitative and quantitative factors. Whereas credit rating methodologies used in in-house commercial tools generally prioritize quantitative factors and may not include qualitative factors such as industry forecasts, MNE strategies or the risk profile resulting from the MNE’s management style.
Determining a credit rating is not an exact science and can be particularly difficult for certain types of issuers such as start-ups, special purpose vehicles, or indeed for members of an MNE. In the case of a credit rating determination for a member of an MNE, the financial metrics used in the process may be influenced by related party transactions.
A robust process for determining a credit rating will typically include consideration of both quantitative and qualitative factors. It is important to remember even amongst issuers with the same credit rating there is likely to be a range of creditworthiness represented. It should be considered that, while they can be useful, credit ratings are only an indication of an entity’s probability of default and they may not be perfect. For example, in the 2009 financial crisis, some entities with high credit ratings defaulted on their debts and ended up bankrupt. Furthermore, in some developing countries the government may have official prescribed interest rates in place and no use is made of international commercial credit rating approaches.69
Reference can be made to credit rating rules that are applicable in Mexico and China.
A summary of the credit rating categories used by the credit rating agen-cies Moody’s, Standard and Poor’s and Fitch is provided in the following table.
Table 9.T.1
| Moody’s | S&P | Fitch | Interpretationsa | |||
| Investment Grade Ratings | ||||||
| Aaa | AAA | AAA | Highest quality; extremely strong, highly unlikely to be affected by foreseeable events. | |||
| Aa1 | AA+ | AA+ | Very high quality; capacity for repayment is not significantly vulnerable to foreseeable events. | |||
| Aa2 | AA | AA | ||||
| Aa3 | AA- | AA- | ||||
| A1 | A+ | A+ | Strong payment capacity; more likely to be affected by changes in economic circumstances. | |||
| A2 | A | A | ||||
| A3 | A- | A- | ||||
| Baa1 | BBB+ | BBB+ | Adequate payment capacity; a negative change in environment may affect capacity for repayment. | |||
| Baa2 | BBB | BBB | ||||
| Baa3 | BBB- | BBB- | ||||
| Below Investment Grade Ratings | ||||||
| Ba1 | BB+ | BB+ | Considered speculative with possibility of develop-ing credit risks. | |||
| Ba2 | BB | BB | ||||
| Ba3 | BB- | BB- | ||||
| B1 | B+ | B+ | Considered very speculative with significant credit risk. | |||
| B2 | B | B | ||||
| B3 | B- | B- | ||||
| Caa1 | CCC+ | CCC | Considered highly speculative with substantial credit risk. | |||
| Caa2 | CCC | CCC | ||||
| Caa3 | CCC- | CCC- | ||||
| Ca | CC | CC | May be in default or wildly speculative. | |||
| Ca | C | C | In bankruptcy or default. | |||
| C | D | DDD | ||||
Source: Bhatia, A. V. (2002). Sovereign Credit Ratings Methodology: An Evaluation. IMF Working Paper 02/170. Washington: International Monetary Fund. Table 2, p.8
Note that the interpretations provided in the column are only an indication and not a definition of the mentioned rating. The ratings provided are an illustration of long-term issuer rating/debtor ratings, from 3 public rating agencies. Ratings may be different for short-term debts.
When applying the arm’s length principle, the starting point is that the related parties involved in the financial transaction should be treated as if they were entities independent of each other, but otherwise in the same circumstances. However, “the same circumstances” must include any incidental benefits and group synergies that derive from the fact that the related entities belong to an MNE. This would include the impact of any implicit support (sometimes also referred to as ‘passive association’, ‘parental support’, or ‘group support’). To the extent that a borrower that is a member of an MNE benefits from an improved credit rating solely on the basis of implicit support, no payment is required for this benefit.
Credit ratings from independent professional rating agencies such as Standard & Poor’s, Moody’s or Fitch, are typically only available for the parent company of a group. Where no such independent credit rating is available for the borrower of the funds, consideration will therefore need to be given as to how to evaluate the credit risk of that borrower. The following approaches may be considered:70
The effect of any implicit support available to the borrower would need to be factored into the analysis irrespective of the approach taken.
There are additional approaches used in practice that may lead to an approximate credit rating for the borrower such as looking at third-party loans of the borrower as a basis for deriving the credit rating of the borrower.
When assessing the credit rating of the associated enterprise and the extent of any implicit support that needs to be taken into account, consideration should be given to the specific circumstances, including (i) that the associated enterprise belongs to an MNE (which may have a higher credit rating than the enterprise) and (ii) that the parent or other group companies may be reasonably expected to support their affiliates (especially core affiliates) in their financial needs (referred to as ‘stewardship by the parent company’). These factors may significantly influence the analysis of the arm’s length conditions of the overall transaction. An improved credit rating for an associated enterprise based merely on implicit support or passive association does not require a return or payment at arm’s length.
Expanding on the considerations of implicit support presented above, it might be relevant to consider the following questions:
In practice, the answers to the above questions will depend in large part on the level of strategic importance that the borrower has in the MNE (including the potential consequences of a default by the borrower on the rest of the MNE). In this regard, the following aspects could be considered:
The following table is an example of the possible effects on the credit rating of an MNE entity borrower based on its level of strategic importance to the MNE:71
Table 9.T.2
| Strategic importance of the borrower entity to the MNE | Brief explanation of the strategic importance | Potential long-term credit rating of the borrower entity |
| “Top down” approaches | ||
| Core | Integral to the MNE’s current identity and future strategy. The rest of the MNE is likely to support these entities under any foreseeable circumstance. | Generally equiva-lent to MNE level credit rating |
| Highly strategic | Almost integral to the MNE’s cur-rent identity and future strategy. The rest of the MNE is likely to support these entities under almost all foreseeable circumstances. | Generally, one notch below MNE level credit rating |
| “Bottom-up” approaches | ||
| Strategically important | Less integral to the MNE than highly strategic entities. The rest of the MNE is likely to provide additional liquidity, capital or risk transfer in most foreseeable cir- cumstances. However, some factors raise doubts about the extent of MNE support. | Generally, three notches above the borrower entity’s ‘stand-alone’ rating |
| Moderately strategic | Not important enough to warrant additional liquidity, capital or risk transfer support from the rest of the MNE in some foreseeable circumstances. Nevertheless, there is potential for some support from the MNE. | Generally, one notch above stand-alone rating |
| Non-strategic | No strategic importance to the MNE. These entities could be sold in the near to medium term. | Generally, the entity’s stand-alone rating |
| b The ‘stand-alone’ credit rating for a member of the MNE as referred to in this table is the rating that would be derived for the borrower entity (e.g. using credit scoring models etc.) on the basis that it was not a member of an MNE, i.e. that it received no implicit support. | ||
It should be noted that implicit support is not equivalent to an explicit guarantee and is generally unenforceable by a creditor of the borrower. See 9.13 which deals with financial guarantees.
Table 9.T.2 is based on Standard & Poor’s (2019). General Criteria: Group Rating Methodology. Available from https://www.maalot.co.il/Publications/ GMT20190702155208.PDF. Table 2 is merely an example for evaluating ratings and should not be regarded as prescriptive or definitive guidance. Note that implicit support may also be considered and determined based on quantitative data.
It is also important to note that although implicit support is typically associated with improving the credit rating of the borrower, it might also be the case that the borrower’s credit rating is negatively influenced by the MNE’s credit risk (i.e. as a result of negative synergies).
In addition to the credit rating of the borrower entity, for accurate delineation purposes the credit rating of the specific debt instrument is also relevant. See 9.12.72
For additional information on how to measure credit risk and how to consider credit risk components, reference is made to Petruzzi, R. (2013). Transfer Pricing Aspects of Intra-group Financing. Amsterdam: Kluwer Law International.
Where there are significant difficulties in determining the extent and effect of any implicit support, and in cases where there is substantial information asymmetry, challenges may be created in the transfer pricing analysis which, if not resolved, may result in outcomes that are not reliable. In such cases, the credit rating of the MNE may also be used for pricing the accurately delineated loan where the facts so indicate, particularly in situations such as where the borrower entity is important to the group, and where the borrower’s indicators of creditworthiness do not differ significantly from those of the MNE.
A further question arises as to whether the credit rating of the borrower entity should be established based on its creditworthiness before the financial transaction under review is put in place or afterwards. In most cases, the situation after the new financing transaction takes place should be considered.
In addition to the considerations above in determining the credit rating of a borrower entity it may also be relevant to consider the risk of an entity operating in a particularly risky country (i.e. the risk deriving from a country’s business environment including legal environment, levels of corruption, and socioeconomic variables such as income disparity), to the extent that this is not already reflected in the credit rating of that entity. The country risk for developing countries tends to be higher than for developed countries due to greater perceived or real risk of currency fluctuations; political instability; economic instability such as recessions or higher inflation; the risk of default by the government on sovereign debt and the effect of foreign exchange and other controls. A high level of country risk will impact the business risk of a borrower located in that country and therefore also (likely decrease) its credit rating.
| A group entity’s strategic importance might be impacted by facts such as whether it operates under the same commercial group identity as other MNE members or whether it is engaged in the same business as other MNE members. For example, assume an MNE named “ABC” is widely known and respected for its safe handling and transportation of cash and valuables, an activity it performs globally. The MNE is also financially strong.
Assume ABC has a subsidiary operating under the same global MNE identity (ABC Concordia Limited) that is associated with the safe handling of cash and valuables in Concordia. Due to Central Bank policies reducing the use of cash in Concordia, as well as a high level of organized crime in Concordia and the rise of competitor business in that country, the subsidiary’s expected future profitability is low or even negative. ABC Concordia Limited has difficulty servicing a third-party loan and defaults on the loan. This default, if unresolved, may have a negative impact on the credit rating of the ABC group, because it may have been expected by third party lenders that the ABC parent company would have rescued its subsidiary that operates in the same business under the same MNE identity for fear of damaging the MNE’s reputation and core business.
On the other hand, if the subsidiary had instead operated under a different group identity, XYZ Limited, and was engaged solely in the servicing of cash sorting machines, a minor and insignificant commercial activity that the ABC group does not perform in other markets, and was not engaged in the core business of picking up cash and valuables for safe transportation, the impact of a default might be less significant for the reputation or core business of the ABC group.
In these scenarios, the relevance and impact of implicit support is likely to be more significant in the case of ABC Concordia Limited and much more limited in the case of XYZ Limited. |
In addition to considering the creditworthiness of the borrower, in order to accurately delineate the actual transaction and to be able to seek reliable comparables, the specific features of the financial instrument must also be taken into account. For example, if ACo makes available a loan to associated enterprise BCo, but BCo already has three other loans (regardless of their sources), and the loan from ACo is subordinated to the earlier loans, then the “status” of the loan from ACo is lower than that of the other three loans. That is, if, in the event of BCo’s bankruptcy, ACo is only entitled to claim repayment from BCo after the repayment of the other three loans, ACo holds a subordinated loan instrument with a higher risk. It may therefore be relevant to consider the credit rating for a specific financial instrument (e.g. a specific loan) and not just the credit rating of a borrower more generally.
Note that in the case of bonds (which are often used as comparables for intragroup loans) this risk “status” is generally expressed as the “issuance credit rating”, that is the credit rating that applies to a particular bond issue rather than to an entity.
In practice, the credit rating of a particular financial instrument is generally notched down from the credit rating of the borrower entity, (usually) based on methodologies provided by credit rating agencies. That is, when comparables are sought for the financial instrument, first the credit rating of the borrower is considered, and subsequently the credit rating of the particular financial instrument is estimated by adjusting the credit rating of the borrower, taking into account the features of the instrument.
For example, assume that the credit rating of BCo is BBB, and the financial instrument provided by ACo to BCo is subordinated. Assume also that in line with the methodology provided by credit rating agencies, it is considered appropriate to apply a one-notch credit rating downgrade to reflect the subordinated nature of this financial instrument. Now, the credit rating of this financial instrument is BBB-, which is a one-notch credit rating downgrade based on the investment grade ratings (in this example of S&P and Fitch) presented in Table 9.T.1. Note however that different rating agencies have different approaches. While there is no universal approach, the effect of subordination merits consideration. See also 9.7.2.2.
Any of the transfer pricing methods described in this Manual can be used to price financial transactions. With respect to intragroup loans, the most commonly used transfer pricing method is the CUP method. The CUP method may be employed when comparable transactions exist between one party to the intragroup loan transaction and an independent party (“internal comparable”) or between two independent parties, neither of which is a party to the intragroup loan transaction (“external comparable”). This is discussed further in section 9.12.
Separate and apart from the pricing of individual financial transactions or instruments, treasury services provided within an MNE are likely to require an arm’s length remuneration (see section 9.3.3). For these services, the CPM or a cost-based TNMM may be appropriate (or, if the treasury services entity is simply a conduit and adds no value, remuneration at cost). It is common that one entity of the group (e.g., the financing department/ entity) acts as a general treasury service provider or intermediary for other entities in the group. See chapter 5 on intragroup services. However, if a financing department/entity provides financing to group members and refi-nances these with deposits from other group members or external sources and therefore is exposed to a mismatch in timing and/or currencies as well as credit risk exposure, the CPM might not be the appropriate transfer pricing method to reward the financing function.
Another method that could be appropriate in some cases is the transactional PSM. However, in practice, the use of this method for financial transactions is quite limited (some exceptions being for global trading of financial instruments or for certain cash pooling transactions).
To simplify the determination of the arm’s length price for intra-group financial transactions, some countries have introduced safe harbours, most of which concern interest rates. More specifically, some countries issue annual official interest rates or margins that, if applied to intragroup loans, extinguish the obligation for the taxpayer to prove that the compensation related to those transactions is arm’s length, while providing some assurance that the rate applied will not pose a significant risk of base erosion.73 See also section 9.12.2.8 on the application of “sixth method” approaches to intra-group loans.
As an example, Singapore provides a safe-harbour rule for intragroup inter-est rates. The rule is based on a safe harbour interest rate margin above reference rates (e.g. LIBOR). The rule is rebuttable by taxpayers provided they substantiate their interest rate with proper economic analysis and transfer pricing documenta-tion. In general, the indicative safe harbour interest rate margin is only applicable to related party loans below a certain amount (i.e. S$15 million at the time the loan is obtained or provided). The indicative margin is published on the tax authority website and updated at the beginning of each calendar year. For example, if the indicative margin is 250 basis points or bps (i.e. 2.50%), and the appropriate refer-ence rate is LIBOR, this means that if a taxpayer uses LIBOR + 250 bps for its intra-group loans, it need not prepare TP documentation in relation to the loan. However, if a taxpayer chooses not to apply the safe-harbour rule, they must substantiate the interest rate used in line with the arm’s length principle and maintain contempora-neous transfer pricing documentation. New Zealand has issued guidance for small value loans (of up to NZ$10 million principal in total) based on which taxpayers may apply a safe-harbour interest rate of 300 basis points (3%) on top of the relevant base indicator, in the absence of a readily available market rate for a debt instrument with similar terms and risk characteristics (this safe harbour rate relates to 2019 and its indicative value is revalued annually).
Access to the credit rating of individual associated enterprises and the determination of the impact/effect of implicit support on intragroup financial transactions may be difficult and is often based on judgements or determinations that can be very hard to verify for tax administrations. Therefore, another possible simplification could be to use the MNE (or parent) credit rating as a basis if taxpayers do not provide evidence to substantiate the credit rating used. This approach has the added benefits of providing certainty and reducing the administrative burden to both tax administrations and taxpay-ers. See section 9.8.14.
When determining the arm’s length compensation for an intragroup financial transaction, the use of simplification measures or safe harbour rules should be carefully considered. Furthermore, it should be considered how the simplification or safe harbour interplays with the definition and application of the arm’s length principle both on a domestic and on an international level. In some countries, taxpayers maintain the right to rebut a safe harbour or simplification rule by demonstrating that an alternative amount is at arm’s length. In other countries, no such option exists. As regards to the use of safe harbours, reference can be made to sections 5.5 and 10.2.2.
This section sets out a number of relevant characteristics of intra-group loans. An intragroup loan is the provision of financial resources from one related party (the lender) to another (the borrower) to be repaid at a later date. With an intragroup loan, the borrower will obtain the financial resources; the lender will generally assume the credit risk related to the loan and needs to be compensated for the liquidity provided and the risk taken on by an arm’s length interest payment. Ideally, the relevant terms and conditions of the loan will be specified in the loan agreement and supported by the conduct of the parties. If, and to the extent that an MNE has specific (explicit) group polices in place with respect to the (target) cost of financing, the likely impact thereof (if any) on the characteristic of a particular loan might also be considered relevant.
In practice, many different types of loans exist. Two examples are provided below:
A so-called “bullet loan” on the other hand allows for repayment of the principal amount only at the end of the loan term rather than through a specified repayment schedule.
Apart from the credit risk, the most common risks relevant to an intragroup loan will be interest rate risk, reinvestment risk, call/prepayment risk, inflation (or purchasing power) risk, liquidity risk, exchange rate (or currency) risk, volatility risk, political or legal risk, event risk, sector risk and country risk. During the accurate delineation process, the allocation of these risks will generally be considered. See Table 3.T.1 in section 3.4.4.6.
When analyzing an intragroup loan, relevant characteristics that may be considered include the following: conversion rights, currency, any applicable guarantees, timing and calculation of interest payments, options, repayment clauses, security provided, seniority and other terms of the loan. Loan characteristics that benefit the borrower generally have the effect of increasing the interest rate and those that have the impact of benefitting the lender tend to decrease the interest rate.
In accordance with what was discussed in section 9.7, the first step of any transfer pricing analysis is the accurate delineation of the transaction undertaken. This requires the identification of the commercial or financial relations between the associated enterprises by analyzing the economically relevant characteristics (or comparability factors) of a transaction. Some examples of economically significant characteristics of loans include:
At this point, the accurate delineation process will have identified the economically significant features of the transaction. An accurately delineated loan transaction subsequently needs to be priced in accordance with the arm’s length principle. The economically relevant characteristics that have been identified need to be taken into account in the search for comparable uncon-trolled transactions with which to determine an arm’s length price.
Once the transaction has been accurately delineated, the next step of the analysis would be the selection and application of the most appropriate transfer pricing method. As the main compensation generated by an intra-group loan is the interest payment, the arm’s length interest must be determined. However, it should be considered that certain other elements might also be compensated separately (e.g. fees).
To determine an arm’s length interest rate, the CUP Method is often applied. This means that reference is made to interest rates that are negotiated and agreed upon by independent entities for transactions comparable to the transaction under review. The CUP Method could be applied in the following ways:
When using an external CUP, the information deriving from third-party (syndicated) loans and bonds and other information contained in publicly available databases may be useful. Comparable uncontrolled interest rates for borrowers with a range of credit ratings can be accessed through data-bases made available by professional commercial data vendors.75 These data-bases provide information on interest rates for arm’s length loans and bonds with various conditions, including terms, currency, and timing (dates at which the loans or bonds are entered into), for borrowers of various credit ratings.
Reference can be made for example to Bloomberg, Loan Connector, Thom-son Reuters and S&P.
Apart from the CUP Method, as mentioned before, a cost-based method could be appropriate in some cases. One example could be in cases of on-lending whereby an MNE entity obtains funds from an unrelated entity and provides those funds to a related entity, i.e. “pass- through” scenarios. In essence, the intragroup loan is priced based on the cost of the funds to the lender, together with the expenses of arranging the loan and other relevant costs incurred in servicing the loan, a risk premium to reflect the various economic factors inherent in the proposed loan, plus a profit margin.76 When applying this method, the lender’s cost of funds relative to other lenders in the market may also need to be considered. A lender in a competitive market would seek to price at the lowest possible rate to win business. A borrower, likewise, would seek to borrow at the lowest rate available to it in the market. As with other methods, this method also requires consideration of options realistically available to the borrower, who would enter into this transaction only if there is no better alternative available.
OECD Publishing (2020). Transfer Pricing Guidance on Financial Transac-tions. Paris: OECD Publishing. Available from https://www.oecd.org/tax/beps/ transfer-pricing-guidance-on-financial-transactions-inclusive-framework-on-beps-actions-4-8-10.pdf. See paras. 10.97 to 10.98.
Some countries apply a simplification rule for determining the interest rate for loans that resembles the “sixth method” that is discussed at 4.7 (in this regard, the relevant interest rate could be that for international public bonds such as US Treasury bonds, or the London Inter Bank Offered Rate (LIBOR) or even the interest rate of bonds issued by the country where the company making the loan is resident or where the loan is negotiated). These rates may work as proxies for interest rates of financial transactions between unrelated parties and may or may not be subject to appropriate adjustments for specific situations. The outcome of this approach provides a similar advantage as does the sixth method rule for commodities, that is to say it eliminates the need to search for a comparable transaction.77
Brazil currently applies this methodology—see 1.8.4 of Part D of this Manual.
Other relevant information in determining an arm’s length interest rate for intragroup loans may include the use of Credit Default Swaps to reflect the credit risk linked to an underlying financial asset, or the use of economic modelling to price a loan by constructing an interest rate as a proxy to an arm’s length interest rate.
The arm’s length pricing of intragroup loans may also involve the evaluation of related fees and other charges. It may need to be considered however, that associated enterprises may not incur charges similar to those that independent lenders (i.e. banks) would incur in the process of raising capital and satisfying regulatory requirements.
| Borrowing Company, BCo, pays loan interest to Lending Company, LCo, in its 2019 financial period. BCo and LCo are associated enterprises. The loan agreement shows that the loan was made in January 2017 at a fixed interest rate of X% and specifies that the term of the loan is for a twelve-month period, at the end of which the principal is repayable. At the time the loan agreement is signed, based on BCo projected cash flows, it seems very unlikely that BCo will be able to repay the loan after twelve-months. On further examination of the facts, it is found that BCo has expanded its business since January 2017, using the loan from LCo to purchase fixed assets. Since the principal was used to purchase fixed assets, a repayment of the principal could not be made. In addition, no repayment has been made under the terms of the loan, and BCo has continued to pay interest at X% on the loan in its 2018 and 2019 financial periods. BCo and LCo exchanged letters in January 2018 to confirm the extension of the loan for a further period of twelve months and repeated the exchange in January 2019. The accurate delineation of the actual transaction determines that the loan is not in fact treated as a short-term loan of twelve months and should not be priced as a short-term loan but one with longer maturity. For pricing purposes, the maturity is at least three years, since the loan is by 2019 in its third year, or such longer period as might be evidenced by the purpose of the loan (in this case funding the purchase of fixed assets).
|
| Borrowing Company, BCo, pays loan interest to Lending Company, LCo. BCo and LCo are associated enterprises. The loan agreement specifies that the advance is denominated in currency X. On further examination of the facts, it is found that the advance was made in currency Y, and regular interest payments have been made in currency Y computed on the outstanding balance expressed in currency Y. The accurate delineation of the actual transaction determines that the loan is treated as having been made in currency Y. For pricing purposes, the loan should be considered as a currency Y denominated loan when determining the appropriate interest rate. |
| Borrowing Company, BCo, pays loan interest to Lending Company, LCo, in its 2019 financial period. BCo and LCo are associated enterprises. The loan agreement shows that a loan of $5 million was advanced on 3 March 2019 at a fixed interest rate of 5% and specifies that the term of the loan is for ten years, at the end of which the principal is repayable. The loan agreement makes no reference to any security pledged by BCo to sup-port the loan. On further examination of the facts it is found that BCo is part of the MNE, XtraStore, that rents storage to customers. BCo owns storage premises, and on 3 March 2019 completed the purchase of two further premises for $6 million. At the same time, BCo repaid the outstanding principal of $1 million on a loan from a third-party bank. After repayment of the bank loan, BCo does not have any remaining third-party borrowings, and none of its assets are pledged in security. LCo has several bank loans, all of which (apart from short-term facilities) are secured on its storage premises. Similarly, most other term loans of the MNE from banks are secured on the storage premises assets of the borrower entity. The previous bank loan that BCo repaid in March 2019 was secured on its assets held before that date. The accurate delineation of the transaction determines that BCo took out the intragroup loan at the time it acquired new assets. Those assets are capable of providing security for the loan and are available to pro-vide such security. The MNE, XtraStore, customarily uses its assets as security in arrangements with third-party banks, and BCo had also previously provided assets as security. For pricing purposes, the loan should be treated as supported by the security of assets owned by BCo in the absence of evidence that the commercial advantage of lower inter-est costs would be offset by potential commercial disadvantages in BCo pledging its assets in comparable uncontrolled arrangements. |
| ACo, located in Country X, is an associated enterprise of BCo, located in Country Y. ACo and BCo conclude an intragroup loan agreement whereby ACo will provide financial resources to BCo. BCo also receives financial resources from a third-party lender, with the same conditions as the ones agreed with ACo.79 If the two loans are comparable (i.e. considering all the economically relevant characteristics), ACo and BCo could consider using the interest rate applied to BCo by the third-party lender to identify the arm’s length intragroup interest rate. However, it should be noted that if the impact of the third-party loan is such that the credit rating of BCo would be relevantly reduced, the interest rate of this third-party loan may not present a proper internal CUP for the intragroup loan. |
Examples 7, 8 and 9 start from the assumption that, based on the accurate delineation of the actual transaction, the intragroup contracts are in line with the conduct of the parties. Therefore, the examples focus on the question of pricing the intragroup arrangement.
One of the relevant assumptions is that the two loans received by BCo are pari passu. That is, both loans rank equally and neither is subordinated to the other.
| ACo, located in Country X, is an associated enterprise of BCo, located in Country Y. ACo and BCo conclude an intragroup loan agreement whereby ACo will provide financial resources to BCo. Publicly available information is available on the terms and conditions applied between third parties on comparable loans (i.e. considering all the economically relevant characteristics). ACo and BCo could use the interest rates applied in the third-party com-parable loans in order to identify the arm’s length intragroup interest rate. |
| ACo, located in Country X, is an associated enterprise of BCo, located in Country Y. ACo and BCo conclude an intragroup loan agreement whereby ACo will provide financial resources to BCo. An arm’s length interest rate could be based on the return of realistic alternative transactions with comparable economically relevant characteristics. Depending on the facts and circumstances, realistic alternatives to intragroup loans could be, for instance, bond issuances. Publicly available information is available on the terms and conditions applied between third parties on comparable bonds (i.e. considering all the economically relevant characteristics). ACo and BCo could use the interest rates applied in the third-party comparable bonds80 in order to identify the arm’s length intragroup interest rate.81 |
In practice, the use of Yields to Maturity might be more appropriate.
It should be considered that, in some situations, an illiquidity premium might be considered in order to account for the different liquidity between loans and bonds.
The previous section discussed the pricing of intragroup loans, but the opening section of this guidance pointed out the importance of considering the interplay between intragroup loans and other intragroup transactions. This is because financing arrangements and the commercial purposes of funding can be a pointer in identifying the functions and economic circumstances of the MNE and in delineating other intragroup transactions for the trans-fer of property or services that may be supported by the financing arrangements. Even though the intragroup financial transaction under review may be accurately delineated and the interest rate for that separate intragroup financial transaction may be at arm’s length, the existence of the intragroup financial transaction may point to economically significant characteristics of the associated enterprises that help to improve reliability of comparisons for the purposes of evaluating those other intragroup transactions.
| Company A, a distributor in Country A and a member of MNE ABC, buys products from Company B, a related party producer in Country B. It markets those products in Country A and sells them to unrelated wholesalers and large retailers. Some of its largest customers are themselves part of an international business with which MNE ABC does business in several countries. There are seasonal peaks for sales during the year. Company A uses a TNMM as the most appropriate method to bench-mark its distribution activities and to determine its compliance with transfer pricing rules. It uses the profit level indicator of operating profit (profit before interest and tax) to sales. It produces benchmarking studies in accordance with best practice to demonstrate that comparable companies achieve profit margins of 1%-3%, based on the interquartile range of results, not taking into account any working capital adjustments. In Year 4 the results of the distributor continued to show an operating profit margin of 2% but its accounts included a significant increase in interest costs. These costs resulted in no profits being reported after interest. In its transfer pricing documentation for Year 4, Company A explained that the interest related to a loan from Company C, an associated enterprise in Country C. Company A provided a report demonstrating that it had a high credit rating and that the interest rate charged was in line with interest rates charged to independent parties with a similar credit rating. Upon review of the tax return of Company A for Year 4, the tax inspector was concerned about the intragroup interest costs which eliminated taxable profits. Something seemed amiss. The tax inspector decided that further information about the loan was needed and determined the sole purpose of the intragroup funding was to finance the cost of extending more favourable credit terms to customers. The tax inspector further established that the distributor had extended credit terms to its customers from 30 days to 180 days, without changing the prices for its customers, but it continued to pay its related party supplier within 7-30 days in accordance with the MNE’s centralized payment processing cycle. The changes responded in part to demands from the head offices of large (unrelated) international retailers who wished to expand their business with MNE ABC and standardize terms globally; and in part to enable smaller retailers in Country A to stock and display an extended range of products to stimulate demand. In effect, Company A provided an incentive to its customers by taking on some of their working capital funding costs. This had the effect of significantly increasing Company A’s working capital (in particular its accounts receivable). Unlike other kinds of sales incentives, however, the costs incurred by Company A (in the form of interest expenses paid to associates) are not included as part of its operating costs, and therefore, not considered as part of the operating profits used in calculating the operating profit margin. The tax inspector concluded that there was no basis to question either the substance (e.g., through non-recognition) or the arm’s length pricing of the funding arrangements considered in isolation. However, the funding pointed to an aspect of comparability, since the circumstances of Company A had changed when it extended its credit terms. What needed to be examined was whether the TNMM benchmarking appropriately took into account all of the economically significant circumstances. In particular, working capital adjustments seemed appropriate to improve comparability in accordance with the guidance at section 3.5.3.7 et seq. They were applied by the tax inspector to adjust for the (higher) working capital of Company A compared to the comparable companies, effectively increasing the arm’s length operating profits to account for the more generous credit terms that the loan (and the associated interest payments) allowed. |
| The facts are the same as Example 10, except that the tax inspector is not able to reliably apply the working capital adjustments, because the spikes in Company A’s working capital due to seasonal peaks for sales occur in Q2 and Q3, and so are not reflected in the year-end balance sheets. Accordingly, the application of the TNMM could be reliably improved by comparing profits before tax rather than operating profits, since both Company A and the comparables are assumed to maximize profit through their collective commercial decisions about incentives, credit terms and funding costs, not all of which are reflected in operating profits. It is important to note that the reliability of this approach may be reduced to the extent that the loan is not solely used to finance working capital. However, determining the purpose of the loan can help to improve reliability of comparisons under the TNMM. For example, a loan which is used to acquire fixed assets may indicate additional functions that affect the reliability of the benchmarking. A loan for such a purpose may also indicate changes in asset intensity. Diagnostic ratios may be applied to determine comparables with similar asset intensity to improve reliability in accordance with the guidance at section 3.5.2.34. |
With an intragroup financial guarantee, one related party (the guarantor) agrees to assume the financial obligations (deriving from the guaranteed instrument) of a related party (the guaranteed entity) towards a lender in the event that the guaranteed entity defaults on its obligations towards this lender. As a result, the risk exposure of the lender is generally reduced. With an intragroup financial guarantee, the guaranteed entity may be able to obtain more advantageous conditions (such as a lower interest rate) from the lender. However, it needs to be determined if the guarantor will provide the guarantee and assume the credit risk related to the guaranteed instrument in return for payment, i.e., a guarantee fee, and if so, the arm’s length amount of that payment. Sometimes no guarantee fee will apply at arm’s length. To determine the arm’s length compensation for a financial guarantee (if any), the relevant terms and conditions of the guarantee, as well as the conduct of the parties should be considered.
Although the concept of financial guarantees may appear relatively straightforward, they merit closer review. Some financial guarantees can be structured or operate in extremely complex ways. To determine the arm’s length remuneration for a financial guarantee, a closer look and accurate delineation will be a necessary step. In practice, many different types of intragroup financial guarantees exist, for example:
Mention can also be made of comfort letters/letters of intent82 and keep-well agreements,83 but these generally do not transfer risk and generally are not considered as financial guarantees that require an arm’s length payment.
These include a promise (generally not legally binding) provided, in most cases, by a parent company to an MNE company which states that the former will oversee the latter’s affairs in order to be in accordance with the group strategies and rules, and refrain from taking adverse actions that would compromise the financial stability of another group company.
These include a declaration provided, in most cases, by the parent company to an MNE company which states that the former will provide the latter with additional capital to prevent the risk of its default.
A particular issue relating to intragroup financial guarantees is the concept of ‘implicit support’. A lender may be willing to accept conditions for a loan to a borrower under the assumption that the borrower’s parent company will step in and meet the obligations of the borrower if the latter fails to meet its obligations, without having received any legally binding confirmation from the parent company that it will do so. In such a case, the lender is merely assuming that there is a possibility that the parent company will take on the obligations of the borrower. Implicit support involves no explicit assumption of risk by the parent company deemed to be the ‘guarantor’ and no explicit right for the lender to ask the parent company to assume the obligations of the borrower in case the latter defaults. As such, implicit support itself does not constitute a financial guarantee. See 9.13.2.10.
An important issue in considering a financial guarantee is the extent to which there is implicit support, since implicit support usually has the result of reducing the cost of financing for the borrower. If there is no enforceable right for either the lender or the borrower to compel the parent company to assume the obligations of the borrower it can be expected that an independent borrower would not be willing to pay a guarantee fee (that is, the arm’s length price would be zero). Nevertheless, simply by being a member of the MNE, the borrower may be able to obtain more favourable financing terms than it would have obtained on a stand-alone basis. The impact of implicit support is that the risk to the lender is perceived to be less than if the borrower were truly a stand-alone entity.
To determine the arm’s length nature of (the fee for) an explicit financial guarantee, the following economically relevant characteristics (or comparability factors) should be considered:
The terms and conditions established in the financial guarantee, together with the conduct of the parties, need to be taken into account in accurately delineating the transaction that has been undertaken.
An assessment of the underlying reason for the financial guaran-tee and whether there is indeed any benefit created by it is required. Typically this will include an analysis of the form of the financial guarantee, its purpose, the willingness of the guarantor to provide support to the guaranteed entity, and any request by the lender to provide the financial guarantee, so that it is clear what obligations of the borrower (if any) are transferred to the guaran-tor and under what conditions.
An intragroup financial guarantee will have commercial value, and thus would require an arm’s length fee if:
In contrast, an intragroup financial guarantee fee is likely to be disallowed to the extent that:
(although in this situation there may be some benefit to the borrower to the extent it obtains a better credit rating).
E.g. the accurate delineation of the transaction could suggest that the transaction is not a guarantee arrangement at all, but that the purported guarantor is in fact the direct borrower.
The next step of the transfer pricing analysis would be the selection and application of the most appropriate transfer pricing method. The most common form of compensation for an intragroup financial guarantee is a guarantee fee. The arm’s length guarantee fee could be determined by reference to guarantee fees that unrelated entities have agreed upon (or would agree upon) for similar transactions in similar circumstances. The following factors may be relevant to the determination of an arm’s length guarantee fee: the debtor’s probability of default; the amount guaranteed; the guaran-tor’s cost of capital (since it may need to set aside an amount as a contingency in the event the debtor defaults); and the benefit (if any) to the borrower as a result of the guarantee, after taking into account the impact of any implicit support. See 9.13.2.10.
The CUP Method may be appropriate, if comparable uncontrolled transactions in comparable circumstances can be identified. The CUP Method could be applied in the following ways:
When applying the CUP Method, the information deriving from third-party financial guarantees (if available), bankers’ acceptances, credit default swap fees, letter of credit fees, commitment fees, various types of insurance, and put options may be useful. Comparability adjustments may need to be considered where there are material differences in the economically relevant characteristics between the tested transaction and the potential comparables.
Other, more commonly used approaches to determine an arm’s length guarantee fee include the following;
| ACo, located in Country A, is the holding company of an MNE. ACo needs financial resources for the group’s activities from external investors. For these purposes, ACo establishes a Special Purpose Vehicle (without control over risks), BCo, in Country B, whose exclusive function is the issuance of bonds, securities and other financial instruments into the market on behalf of the group. The group follows a common procedure consisting in using BCo as a mere intermediary financial entity to obtain funds in the capital market. This procedure, as a matter of process, has certain standard legal and contractual requirements, including a formal guarantee by ACo of the bonds or securities issued. The market is made fully aware through the prospectus and other relevant materials that BCo is issuing bonds or securities on behalf of the group and, therefore, regards BCo as having the same creditworthiness as ACo. In this case, the effect of implicit support on BCo is such that the addition of explicit guarantee of the bonds or securities by ACo pro-vides no additional benefits to BCo and as such, no guarantee fee should be payable. It is appropriate to remunerate BCo for its role in issuing the bonds or securities on behalf of the group with a service fee.
|
| ACo, located in Country X, is an associated enterprise of BCo, located in Country Y. BCo has requested a loan from a third-party lender. ACo has provided an intragroup financial guarantee for this loan. BCo also receives a guarantee on a different loan (having the same char-acteristics of the third-party loan guaranteed by ACo) from a third-party insurance company, under the same conditions as the ones agreed with ACo. Assuming that the intragroup financial guarantee and the third-party insurance are comparable (i.e. considering all the economically relevant characteristics), ACo and BCo could use the premium applied to BCo by the third-party insurance in order to identify the arm’s length intragroup guarantee fee. |
Examples 13 and 14 start from the assumption that, based on the accurate delineation of the actual transaction, the intragroup contracts are in line with the conduct of the parties. Therefore, the examples focus on the question of pricing the intragroup arrangement.
| ACo, located in Country X, is an associated enterprise of BCo, located in Country Y. BCo has requested a loan from a third-party lender. ACo has provided an intragroup financial guarantee for this loan. Publicly available information is available on the terms and conditions applied between third parties on comparable financial guarantees (i.e. considering all the economically relevant characteristics).86 ACo and BCo could use the guarantee fees applied in the comparable uncontrolled financial guarantees to identify the arm’s length intra-group guarantee fee.
|
| ACo, located in Country X, is an associated enterprise of BCo, located in Country Y. BCo has requested a loan from a third-party lender. ACo has provided an intragroup financial guarantee for this loan. Publicly available information is available on the terms and conditions applied between third parties on comparable financial guarantees (i.e. considering all the economically relevant characteristics).86 ACo and BCo could use the guarantee fees applied in the comparable uncontrolled financial guarantees to identify the arm’s length intra-group guarantee fee.
|
However, this kind of information may not be commonly available.
| ACo, located in Country X, is an associated enterprise of BCo, located in Country Y. BCo has requested a 5-year loan from a third-party lender. ACo provides an intragroup financial guarantee for this loan. The third-party lender provides the loan to BCo at an interest rate of 2%. ACo’s credit rating is A, while BCo’s credit rating (after considering the effect of implicit support) is BBB. Based on information available from public sources, a comparable uncontrolled loan (i.e. considering all the economically relevant characteristics, except for the intragroup financial guarantee) would have an interest rate of 3.25%. Under the yield approach, the interest benefit received by BCo as a result of the guarantee (i.e. its reduced cost for the funding) amounts to 1.25% (i.e. 3.25%–2%). Therefore, the arm’s length maximum intragroup guarantee fee might be 1.25%. However, this amount might be reduced by considering how the advantage deriving from the guarantee should be shared between ACo and BCo.88 The results of applying a cost approach (see example 16) could be used to determine this split between ACo and BCo. Note however that there is no requirement to apply both the yield and cost approaches together to determine an arm’s length guarantee fee.
|
Examples 15 and 16 start from the assumption that, based on the accurate delineation of the actual transaction, the intragroup contracts are in line with the conduct of the parties. Therefore, the examples focus on the question of pricing the intragroup arrangement.
As a pragmatic approach, this advantage could be divided equally between ACo and BCo.
| Facts are the same as in Example 15. BCo’s expected 5-year probability of default rate89 is 1.44% and its expected recovery rate90 (considering its fixed assets and securities) is 40%. The cost approach quantifies the additional risk borne by the guarantor ACo by estimating the value of the expected loss that ACo may incur as a result of providing the guarantee, in the event BCo defaults (expected loss in case of default by BCo). The expected cost of providing this guarantee is 0.86% (calculated as follows: 1.44% × (1– 40%)). Therefore, the minimum arm’s length guarantee fee might be 0.86%. However, this amount might be increased by considering how the advantage deriving from the guarantee should be shared between ACo and BCo.91 The results of applying the yield approach (see example 15) could be used to determine this split between ACo and BCo. Note however that there is no requirement to apply both the yield and cost approaches together to determine an arm’s length guarantee fee.
|
Probability of default is a financial term describing the likelihood of a default over a particular period. It provides an estimate of the likelihood that a borrower will be unable to meet its debt obligations during that period.
Recovery rate is the extent to which the principal and accrued interest on defaulted debt can be recovered, expressed as a percentage of the face value.
As a pragmatic approach, this advantage could be shared equally between ACo and BCo.
This chapter considers the transfer prices for intragroup services within an MNE. Firstly, it considers the tests for determining whether charge-able services have been provided by one or more members of an MNE to one or more associated enterprises for transfer pricing purposes. Secondly, if chargeable intragroup services have been provided, it considers the methods for determining an arm’s length consideration for the services. The chap-ter also considers the circumstances in which tax authorities may provide taxpayers with the option of using a safe harbour for low value-adding services or for minor expenses.
Under the arm’s length principle, if a chargeable intragroup service has been provided between associated enterprises, arm’s length transfer prices should be charged to group members. The test for determining whether chargeable intragroup services have been provided between associated enter-prises is whether one or more associated enterprises have received or are expected to receive an economic benefit from the activity. Such an economic benefit exists if an independent entity in the same or similar circumstances would be willing to pay for the services or perform the activity itself. This principle is referred to in this chapter as the “benefit test” and is considered in more detail below (section 5.2.2).
A transfer pricing analysis of intragroup services should be consid-ered from both the perspective of the service-provider and of the associated enterprise receiving the services. The tax authority in the country of the service provider would seek to ensure that if chargeable intragroup services have been provided, the associated enterprise benefitting from the service is paying an arm’s length price for such services. The tax authority of the service provider would be concerned if there were no payments for the intragroup cross-border services or if the charges for such services were below arm’s length prices. It would also be concerned if the service provider incurred costs for the benefit of foreign associated enterprises without reimbursement or with less than arm’s length consideration.
On the other hand, the tax authority in the country of the recipient would be seeking to ensure that the services in question satisfy the bene-fit test and that the recipient was being charged no more than arm’s length prices for the intragroup services. A tax authority of the service recipient would consider making an adjustment if it considered that the services either did not in fact meet the benefit test to the local payer, or alternatively, if the services provided a benefit but the service charges were excessive. Given the scale of business operations of an MNE, service costs incurred and service charges may be significant and any misallocation of service costs or charges within an MNE will affect the profit or loss position of group members
On the other hand, the tax authority in the country of the recipient would be seeking to ensure that the services in question satisfy the bene-fit test and that the recipient was being charged no more than arm’s length prices for the intragroup services. A tax authority of the service recipient would consider making an adjustment if it considered that the services either did not in fact meet the benefit test to the local payer, or alternatively, if the services provided a benefit but the service charges were excessive. Given the scale of business operations of an MNE, service costs incurred and service charges may be significant and any misallocation of service costs or charges within an MNE will affect the profit or loss position of group members
It should be noted that the requirement that chargeable services be paid for on an arm’s length basis is distinct from the question whether such arm’s length payments are deductible under the domestic law of the associated enter-prise receiving the service. Transfer pricing rules require the payment of arm’s length transfer prices for chargeable services. Principles of domestic law are then applied to determine if such payments may be deducted by the associated enter-prise making the payment in determining its taxable income. In some countries, although an expense may satisfy the arm’s length principle, the deduction may be denied, in full or in part, by domestic rules restricting deductions.
MNEs in a globalized economy may have highly integrated business operations. The associated enterprises comprising such groups may seek business advantages from exploiting information, technology and commu-nications systems and other assets on a combined basis. Intragroup services may play an important role in MNEs as they seek to obtain needed services at the lowest price to maintain or improve their competitive position. Transfer pricing analyses of such service relationships should recognize that MNEs seek to maximize their profitability and competitive positions and they do not generally incur costs without a business purpose.
Many of the services that MNEs require may either be performed within the group or acquired by the group from one or more independent service providers. Many types of services are not within the company’s core business but are nonetheless necessary for the MNE’s business operations. The performance of service activities required by members of the group may be centralized in one group member or dispersed among many group members. In some cases MNEs may outsource services to independent enter-prises and then charge out the cost of the services on a pass-through basis to those associated enterprises receiving the benefit(s).
Most intragroup services are easily identifiable. For example, where one member of the group performs hiring activities and manages payroll for another group member, it may be clear that a specific service has been provided. In some situations, a service may be connected with the provi-sion of goods. For example, an associated enterprise might be provided with goods and it might also receive services to assist in the use of the goods. In other cases intragroup services may also be provided in conjunction with or embedded in intangibles or other assets.
Many types of intragroup services may be provided between the associated enterprises comprising an MNE. UNCTAD has noted in its World Investment Report 2004: The Shift towards Services, that it is “difficult to formulate a clear-cut definition of services. No commonly accepted defi-nition exists.” 50 A detailed list in Annex 1 at the end of this chapter (drawn up by the European Commission) sets out some of the types of intragroup services that are common in MNEs. The list is intended to be illustrative and is not comprehensive. Activities can generally be divided into chargeable services and non-chargeable activities. Chargeable services can be divided into low value-adding services and other services. Simplified transfer pric-ing approaches may be used for low value-adding services (see section 5.5.2) while a full transfer pricing analysis may be required for other services.
UNCTAD (2004). World Investment Report: The Shift Towards Services. New York UN Publishing: Available from http://unctad.org/en/docs/wir2004_en.pdf
The profit margin which an associated enterprise may derive under the arm’s length principle from providing intragroup services varies. A lower profit mark-up is appropriate for low value-adding services such as clerical or administrative services. Such services are necessary for the effi-cient operation of the international operations of an MNE but they do not create significant value. On the other hand, services associated with an MNE group’s core business activities, which are incurred to maintain or improve the MNE’s profitability, viability or market position, may create greater value and appropriately carry a higher profit margin.
The benefit test is used to determine whether a member of the MNE has received a chargeable service from an associated enterprise. The benefit test has two requirements both of which must be satisfied. Firstly, it must be anticipated that the activity will provide the service recipient with economic or commercial value to enhance or maintain its business position. Secondly, it must be shown that an independent entity in the same or similar circum-stances as the service recipient would have been prepared to pay for the services or perform the services itself. Once the benefit test has been satisfied, there remains the question of the arm’s length price for the service (see section 5.3).
An examination of the facts and circumstances will be required to determine whether the benefit test has been satisfied for an enterprise receiving an intragroup service. The level of detail covered by such a factual examination, and the amount and nature of documentation required to demonstrate satisfaction of the benefit test, should be based on the material-ity of the service charges.
The underlying notion of the benefit test is that, in order to be chargeable, the service must provide or be expected to provide the recipi-ent with commercial value to enhance its actual or expected commercial position in an identifiable way. For example, a marketing programme may be designed by one member of an MNE to be used by associated enterprises operating as fully-fledged distributors with the expectation that all desig-nated associated enterprises will benefit in each of their markets. Although the marketing strategy is a success in most countries, it may fail to deliver all of the expected benefits in some jurisdictions. As long as each associated enterprise within the MNE taking up this marketing strategy has legitimately expected a benefit, they have received a benefit for the purpose of the benefit test, despite the fact that some of these enterprises do not fully achieve the expected results. The benefit test is satisfied only if an independent distributor would be expected to pay for the marketing services under similar circum-stances, or would need to perform the marketing services activities itself.
Whether or not the benefit test is satisfied does not depend on the level of risk that the expected benefit will or will not be achieved. Some intra-group services, such as research and development, may involve a higher level of risk than other services, such as accounting or bookkeeping services. Notwithstanding the risk involved, intragroup research and development services are chargeable if an independent party would have been expected to pay another independent party for the research and development services in the same or similar circumstances or it would have performed this activ-ity itself. Provided the recipient associated enterprise expects a potential economic benefit from the research and development, the benefit test is satis-fied and a chargeable service has been provided, even though the activity may not always actually result in benefits.
Associated enterprises may request the provision of specific intra-group services. Services provided specifically to one member of the MNE and designed specifically for its operations or requirements will generally satisfy the benefit test. For example, an associated enterprise which is part of an MNE involved in telecommunications may suffer reputational damage and a potential loss of business if information technology (IT) problems prevent customers from using its telecommunications system. If an IT problem arises and direct assistance is provided promptly to the associated enterprise by another member of the MNE specializing in the provision of IT services, the service would satisfy the benefit test as the associated enterprise has received an economic benefit to maintain its business operations.
Similarly, if an associated enterprise seeks assistance in the design of a targeted marketing campaign from a related party which specializes in marketing strategies and practices, the associated enterprise providing the marketing strategy advice is providing a service designed to meet the specific needs of the recipient. The benefit test would generally be satisfied in such a circumstance because the associated enterprise expects a commercial bene-fit from the service, and an independent enterprise in the same or similar circumstances would be willing to pay for the provision of such services or would undertake such activities itself.
An MNE will often centralize certain business functions within an associated enterprise operating as a service provider to the rest of the group or to a subgroup of associated enterprises, such as a regional subgroup, for their benefit. A wide variety of services may be centralized in this manner, including both low and high value-adding services. Each associated enter-prise benefitting from the services provided by a centralized service provider should be charged an arm’s length price for the services it acquires, though the manner in which the arm’s length charge is calculated may vary, depend-ing on the facts of the case. The economic benefit is apparent if an associated enterprise would otherwise have to perform the activity itself or engage an external service provider.
| An MNE carries on an airline business in 5 countries (Countries A, B, C, D and E) with the parent of the group being located in Country A. Customers of the airline in these countries are provided with the option of calling staff by telephone to book travel and receive advice where nec-essary. The MNE decides to create a centralized call centre for the group to exploit economies of scale. The low cost of telecommunications and the ability to share business information among group members allows for the centralized call centre to be located in any country in which the MNE operates. The call centre can operate on a 24-hour basis in provid-ing call services to all time zones in which the MNE carries on busi-ness. The MNE concludes that centralizing call centre functions in its subsidiary in Country E will allow the group to take advantage of both economies of scale and low costs. The call centre services provided by the subsidiary in Country E to the parent company and other group mem-bers satisfy the benefit test. Without the call centre the group members would either have to establish their own call centres or engage an inde-pendent party to provide call centre services on their behalf. |
The examples contained in this chapter are some illustrations of the principle being considered.
In the preceding example of a centralized call centre, a centralized facility operating on behalf of the businesses in each country replaces the individual local facilities for booking by phone in each country. A distinct and relatively small part of the businesses in each country is replaced with a centralized but still distinct part of the business. The change does not affect the fundamentals of the businesses; for example, how the businesses contract with customers, or how the businesses generate demand through marketing strategies. In some situations, however, the centralizing of activi-ties can affect the fundamentals of the businesses receiving the services, and those situations can be challenging to analyze for transfer pricing purposes. Depending on the facts, one such situation is that of centralizing sales or marketing activities. The section provides guidance on some of the factors that are likely to be relevant in analyzing centralized sales or marketing activities, so that the arrangements actually performed can be accurately delineated and evaluated in the context of the business of the MNE. Such an objective is common to all transfer pricing analyses, but offshore marketing companies are often an indicator suggesting further investigation in section
13.2.2.16 and the attribution of sales and marketing functions and risks to a centralized entity should be carefully analyzed, especially if the arrange-ments are not common between independent enterprises in the industry or the potential for profit shifting is significant because of the taxation regime to which the centralized entity is subject.
Commercial objectives for centralizing sales or marketing activities involve the general aims outlined in section 5.2.4.2 above, but more specifi-cally can also involve cost savings (avoiding the duplication of costs in smaller markets by coordinating and aggregating activities), coordinating marketing activities and developing and exploiting marketing intangibles consistently, standardizing processes, prices and terms, responding to regional or global customers that may have similarly centralized their activities, and managing stock levels and warehousing more efficiently. In some cases, a centralized sales company may perform a range of activities: it may be responsible for fulfilling the orders solicited by the local in-market company; the centralized company may determine the sales and marketing strategy, develop and use its own marketing intangibles, assume inventory and pricing risk, and direct the activities of the local in-market company. In other cases, the centralized sales and marketing activity may provide a support function to the local in-market enterprises which remain responsible for performing a range of activities.
There are numerous reasons for an MNE to provide intragroup services on a centralized basis. Services may be provided by an associated enterprise for the rest of the group in order to minimize costs through econ-omies of scale. This may allow the MNE to increase its profits or improve its competitive position by being able to reduce the prices charged to customers. Centralizing services may allow for specialization within an MNE which may also involve the creation of centres of excellence. Some MNEs may central-ize services in a regional management company for associated enterprises in a particular geographic region in order to align functional and management responsibilities. In some cases, an associated enterprise may not have the skills or resources locally in-house for the service it requires and may rely on specialists that are responsible for providing the same type of services across a wider geographic or functional grouping of entities. Another potential benefit of having centralized services for an MNE is the certainty that such services will be available when required and that the quality of the services is consistent within the MNE.
In analyzing arrangements involving the centralizing of sales and marketing activities, the first task is to understand those arrangements in the context of the business of the MNE and the nature of the transactions being undertaken. One important aspect may be to distinguish clearly between a centralized sales function and a centralized marketing function. Centralized sales functions may involve the order to cash processes, including centralized administration of invoicing and payments; and centralized sales functions may also involve the logistics of getting products to customers, including storage and transport. Centralized marketing functions may involve iden-tifying the market opportunities, differentiating the offering in the market, and creating and maintaining consumer preferences. Either or both func-tions can be centralized, and a transfer pricing analysis requires clarity about the nature of the relevant functions, the extent to which centralization of functions has in practice taken place, the identification of risks and attri-bution of risks to the parties to the arrangements, and an evaluation of the contribution of the activity to how the MNE generates value.
Some businesses in which customers can find alternative products without repercussions may be characterized by a greater focus on marketing as a differentiator and contributor to performance. For example, the branded consumer goods sector may require extensive local in-market activities if the business requires very specific local market knowledge and bespoke marketing campaigns to compete with other sellers in the market; there may be differences in similar products around the world because of differ-ent consumer preferences in different markets; and there may be differences in sales channels because of consumer preferences or market maturity. In practice, the local in-market company may contribute local knowledge about the market and how to target sales and devise marketing campaigns, may propose sales channels, price points, inventory levels, and product ranges, and may be the only point of contact with customers. In such a case, the centralized sales function may provide support to the in-market companies through standardizing processes and saving costs on administrative and finance functions by centralizing those activities.
In other sectors, including the commodities sector (or sectors involving commoditized goods), the product may be identical or almost iden-tical in all markets, the customers may be highly specialized and centralized, terms and conditions for contracts may be similarly specialized, inventory levels may be set globally, pricing and other terms may be negotiated or established centrally, and the sales and marketing strategies may be devel-oped on a global basis, and may be limited if the business is characterized by longer term contracts with a relatively small number of customers. Storage and delivery may be a key aspect of the sales process (particularly for goods that require specialized facilities or processes such as ripening). In such a case, the contribution made locally is likely to be different to the branded consumer goods example and may be limited to developing or managing a relationship with a small number of customers, whereas the selling activity is conducted by the centralized company.
A typical evidentiary issue relating to centralized sales and marketing activities concerns the relative decision-making responsibilities of the local in-market company, other associated enterprises such as the producing company, and the company providing centralized services. One aspect may involve which party, the local in-market company, other associ-ated enterprises such as the producing company, or the company providing centralized services, controls significant risks associated with the sales activities through the performance of relevant decision-making (see section 3.4.4.33 to 3.4.4.35). Another aspect may involve determining which party performs important functions associated with the development/acquisi-tion, enhancement, maintenance, protection, and exploitation of marketing intangibles (see section 6.3.4). In situations where the non-resident central-ized sales company is responsible for concluding sales in the local market, then it may be appropriate to consider whether those activities create a deemed permanent establishment under Article 5 of the UN Model Double Taxation Convention.
The principles found in the guidance on centralized procure-ment activities, which can be found at the end of this Chapter (section 5.6 et seq.) may also be instructive when analyzing centralized sales and market-ing activities. In particular, this guidance may assist in analyzing situations where the local in-market company sells to an intermediary group company.
Intragroup on-call services apply in a situation where an associ-ated enterprise agrees to provide a particular type of service immediately or within a short period of time. In order to do so it must maintain the staff necessary to provide such services promptly as requested, even though some staff members may not be fully utilized by the MNE at all times. On-call services may also be called “call-off contracts” and “stand-by contracts”. The expected economic benefit to the recipient of being able to call on such services without delay when needed may be a sufficient business advantage to satisfy the benefit test, even if the contingency requiring the service never arises and actual services are never or infrequently provided. An associated enterprise that is a potential recipient of such on-call services would there-fore be expected to pay the service provider for maintaining the necessary staff to provide the service, even during times when the potential recipient does not call on the associated enterprise to provide the service. The exist-ence of an economic benefit for on-call services will need to be considered on a case-by-case basis to ensure that an associated enterprise is actually receiving a benefit from having a service provider on-call and that an inde-pendent enterprise in the same or similar circumstances would have been willing to pay.
Certain intragroup service activities do not meet the benefit test for one or more associated enterprises, and so would not warrant charges. It is emphasized that a determination of whether an intragroup service has been provided to a particular associated enterprise depends on an analysis of the facts and circumstances of each case. The following section deals with four situations in which the benefit test is not met.
Shareholder Activities
Shareholder activities are activities undertaken to provide an economic benefit only to the shareholder company (ultimate parent company or any other shareholder such as an intermediary holding company, depend-ing on the facts of the case) in its capacity as shareholder. Accordingly, the cost of shareholder activities should be borne exclusively by the shareholder. Shareholder activities performed by an associated enterprise on behalf of its parent company should be charged to the parent company on an arm’s length basis.
Shareholder activities may include the following:
► The preparation and filing of reports required to meet the juridi-cal structure of the parent company;
► The appointment and remuneration of parent company directors;
► The meetings of the parent company’s board of directors and of the parent company’s shareholders;
► The parent company’s preparation and filing of consoli-dated financial reports, reports for regulatory purposes and tax returns;
► The activities of the parent company for raising funds used to acquire share capital in subsidiary companies; and
► The activities of the parent company to protect its capital invest-ment in subsidiary companies.
Company law usually requires that a company should be managed by a board of directors. A company’s board of directors is required to make the key business, investment and policy decisions of the company. The role of company directors is usually to act in good faith in the best interests of the company. A jurisdiction’s company law will usually prescribe the legal duties of a board of directors. The cost of a parent company’s board of direc-tors may constitute shareholder expenses and in that case the cost cannot be attributed to associated enterprises. In this situation, the only enterprise in an MNE that would satisfy the benefit test is the parent company. The non-chargeable directors’ costs would include the directors’ fees and the cost of holding meetings. If a parent company in an MNE is supervising its investments in the group through a supervisory board, the cost of the super-visory board may be a shareholder expense that cannot be attributed to an associated enterprise.
Directors of a company may also engage in other activities in connection with the parent’s ownership interests and these expenses would also be treated as shareholder expenses. However, directors may also provide services that result in the provision of material and recognizable benefits to members of an MNE other than the parent company. In this situation, the determining factor is whether a service has been provided to associ-ated enterprises. If it is determined that a service has been provided, the next issue to consider is which group members satisfy the benefits test for the service.
Another example of a shareholder expense is the cost of obtaining financing by the parent of an MNE to acquire a company; as such costs fail to provide an immediate benefit to the acquired entity. If a parent company raises funds from an independent lender on behalf of an associated enter-prise that is a regional headquarter company to acquire a new company, this activity can be a chargeable financial service to the regional headquarter company. It would satisfy the benefit test if an independent party would have been willing to pay for the financial services in comparable circumstances. In this situation a service charge from the parent company to the associated enterprise on behalf of which the funds are raised would be appropriate, as the parent company has provided services in the form of being the associated enterprise’s agent to raise finance.
| Controller Co. is a resident of Country A and it is the parent company of an MNE. Controller Co. is listed on the stock exchange in Country A, and it is required by the stock exchange and securities regulators to report its financial position periodically. The reporting requirements include the MNE’s consolidated profit and loss statements and balance sheet prepared in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards. Subsidiary Co. is a subsidiary company resident in Country B and maintains its own accounting function to support the operation of its business. Subsidiary Co. is required under the domestic law of Country B to prepare its accounts in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards and to annually file statutory financial statements. Subsidiary Co.’s chief financial officer provides certain reports and finan-cial statements to Controller Co. for inclusion in the MNE’s consolidated financial statements. The incorporation of this material into Controller Co.’s consolidated financial statements is an action that Controller Co. carries out as a shareholder of Subsidiary Co. Therefore Controller Co. cannot impose a service charge on Subsidiary Co. for reviewing and incorporating its financial statements into the MNE’s consolidated financial statements that Controller Co. is required to file, as these activ-ities do not provide Subsidiary Co. with a benefit. These activities are exclusively attributed to the obligations imposed on Controller Co. as a listed company. If Subsidiary Co. incurs costs in preparing financial statements required for the MNE’s consolidated financial statements that exceed what is necessary to meet the financial reporting require-ments in Country B, Controller Co. should compensate Subsidiary Co. on an arm’s length basis for the additional activities. |
Duplication of Activities
Duplication of services occurs when a service is provided to an associated enterprise which has already incurred costs for the same activ-ity performed either by itself or on its behalf by an independent entity. Duplicated activities are usually not chargeable services. The determination of duplication must be made on a case-by-case basis. There are some circum-stances in which duplication may provide an associated enterprise with a benefit if an independent party would have been willing to pay for the dupli-cated services in similar circumstances. For example, this situation may arise if an associated enterprise receives in-house accounting advice on an issue but chooses to get a second opinion to minimize the risk of being penalized for failing to comply with accounting standards.
At times an MNE may engage in service functions which have the same name but represent different services, or, the functions are performed at different levels and therefore do not involve duplication. These functions may be carried out at the group, regional or local level. For example, stra-tegic marketing functions are performed at the group level as they are for the benefit of the entire group, while at the local level a subsidiary engages in marketing analysis of the local market conditions. In this situation the marketing services are not duplicated as they are different types of services.
| Company X, resident in Country X, is part of an MNE. Company X uses the group’s integrated IT system which is supported by IT ser-vices provided by a group service provider, Company T. Assume that these services meet the benefit test for Company X. It is determined that an arm’s length charge for Company X for these services is 60. As a result, Company X’s accounts include a charge for “IT services” paid to Company T of 60. Company X also sources IT services from a third-party supplier in Country X in order to customize its IT system to local requirements. As a result, Company X’s accounts include a further charge, also described as “IT services”, of 40. In this example, despite being described the same way in Company X’s accounts, the two charges refer to different services and both would be allowable since the intragroup charge refers to services which meet the benefit test and are at an arm’s length price, and the other services are also at arm’s length. If the IT services relating to the localization of Company X’s systems were instead sourced from an associated enterprise, assuming both kinds of services meet the benefit test and constitute an arm’s length amount, the same outcome would apply. |
When an activity is in the process of being centralized for an MNE, acceptable duplication may occur during the transition phase. For example, an MNE may decide to centralize its human resources function for the group and this alteration would require the closure of each associated enterprise’s human resources department after the necessary data has been provided to the centralized human resources database. This process is likely to involve a period of overlap and acceptable duplication during the transition phase. In this situation an independent entity would have a period of duplication if it were in the process of outsourcing its human resources function to an inde-pendent service provider. Nevertheless, care should be taken in determining whether a situation involves acceptable duplication.
| Subsidiary Co., a company resident in Country A, is part of an MNE. The group’s business is growing primary produce and distributing it in local markets. The parent company is Parent Co. in Country B. Parent Co. oversees treasury functions for the group. Parent Co.’s treasury function ensures that there is adequate finance for the group and monitors the debt and equity levels on its books and those of its subsidiaries. Subsidiary Co. maintains its own treasury function and manages its finances on an independent basis. It manages its treasury operations and ensures that it has finance available either inhouse or externally. A functional analysis indicates that Subsidiary Co. carries on its own treasury functions in order to ensure that it has adequate debt capital to finance its operations. In this situation duplication arises as Subsidiary Co. is performing treasury functions necessary for its operations and Parent Co. is performing the same treasury functions for Subsidiary Co. Accordingly, Parent Co.’s treusury activities are duplicated activities that fail the benefit test. Under the arm’s length principle, Parent Co. cannot charge a service fee to Subsidiary Co. for Parent Co.’s treasury functions. |
| An MNE has its Parent Company in Country A. Parent Company per-forms treasury functions for itself and its subsidiaries. The treasury functions include raising capital, obtaining financing and cash manage-ment. Subsidiary Company is an associated enterprise in Country B and does not perform any treasury functions itself. In this situation there is no duplication as Subsidiary Company does not perform treasury func-tions. In this case, Subsidiary Company is considered to obtain a benefit from the functions performed by Parent Company. |
| An MNE has a parent company called Controller Company in Country A. Controller Company has inhouse legal advisers with expertise in intellectual property. The expertise includes registering patents and protecting intellectual property rights. Property Company is an associated enterprise in Country B and it is the legal and economic owner of patents that it has developed itself for its own benefit. Property Company has a dispute with one of its customers over the improper use of its intellectual property. Property Company attempts to discuss the dispute with the customer but the customer denies that there is a breach of the licence agreement and refuses to negotiate. Property Company does not have in-house legal counsel and engages an independent legal firm in Country B to provide it with advice on whether it is entitled to damages from the customer for the purported breach of the agreement. The legal advice is that the customer is in breach of the license agreement and that Property Company should take legal action to recover substan-tial damages from the customer. As litigation is expensive, Property Company seeks a second opinion from Parent Company on whether it should take legal action against the customer. Country A and Country B have similar legal systems in respect of intellectual property. Parent Company uses its in-house legal counsel to provide advice on whether Property Company is entitled to damages for the breach of agreement as well as assessing the extent of the damages. In this situation the legal advice provided by Parent Company has provided Property Company with an economic benefit as it provides the comfort of a second opinion. In this situation there is no duplication and the use of a second legal opinion is a justified measure for dealing with the dispute with the cus-tomer. Independent entities involved in legal disputes regularly seek a second opinion to assess a legal dispute. |
Benefits to members of an MNE may arise solely as a result of an associated entity’s membership in the MNE. Such benefits are attributable to the entity’s passive association with the MNE. The benefits of association with an MNE are not a chargeable service for members of the MNE. For example, independent enterprises transacting with an enterprise that is a member of an MNE may be willing to provide goods or services to it at prices that are below the prices charged to independent buyers. These discounts may be provided because the independent supplier hopes that it will be able to generate future sales to other group members if it provides favourable pricing and good service. Moreover, the associated enterprise may be viewed by the independent supplier as a low risk customer that is unlikely to default on any trade credit. It is emphasized that in this situation the independent enterprise has made an assumption on credit risk as it cannot take legal action against the parent company if the subsidiary defaults, because the parent has not provided the enterprise with any formal guarantee or undertaking to cover the amount owing by the subsidiary.
Under these circumstances, the associated enterprise’s membership in the MNE does not result in a chargeable service being provided to the associated enterprise by the parent company or any member of the MNE. The key feature of this type of incidental benefit is that it is passive and cannot be attributed to an overt action taken by another member of the MNE. In contrast, if a member of an MNE provided an explicit, formal guarantee of an associated enterprise’s trade credit, the formal guarantee may be a chargeable service provided that an independent entity would have been willing to pay for a formal guarantee in similar circumstances. (Guidance on intragroup financial guarantees can be found at Chapter 9). Another example of a situation in which a chargeable service may occur is where an associated enterprise is able to get additional discounts from an independent supplier on condition that other MNE members commit to additional purchases from that supplier.
The passive association of an associated enterprise with its MNE may improve the associated enterprise’s credit rating. There are circumstances where an associated enterprise that is part of an MNE may enjoy a higher credit rating from lenders on the basis of its membership in the MNE. That is, if the associated enterprise were assessed on a purely standalone basis (i.e. as if it had no associated enterprises), it would be expected to receive a lower credit rating from the lender. In this case, the associated enterprise has received an incidental benefit from its passive membership of the MNE. In this situation there is no chargeable service. This incidental benefit cannot be subject to a service charge from other group members. On the other hand, if the parent company provided a lender with a formal guarantee for a loan made to an associated enterprise, the parent may be actively seeking the advantage of a lower finance charge for the associated enterprise and the guarantee may, accordingly, qualify as a chargeable service for transfer pricing purposes requiring the payment of an arm’s length guarantee fee. See 2.5.5 for further discussion of the relationship between group synergies and passive association benefits and Chapter 9 for guidance on intragroup financial guarantees.
Incidental Benefits
There are other situations in which one associated enterprise may provide an intragroup service to another associated enterprise under circumstances where that service also incidentally gives rise to benefits being received by other members of the MNE other than the primary beneficiary of the service. Whether followon benefits to other group members may support the payment of service fees by the incidental beneficiaries depends on the facts. The determination of whether a service fee should be paid by the incidental beneficiaries of the service depends on whether an independent party in the same circumstances would have been willing to pay for the intragroup service. In some cases, the incidental followon benefits that an associated enterprise receives may be remote and would fail the benefit test as an independent party would not be willing to pay for the service.
Motorcycle manufacturing MNE X has an associated enterprise that serves as a distribution company in Country A, which is incurring losses. The parent company’s marketing department is asked for assistance and advice as to how to make the associated enterprise in Country A profitable. After studying Country A’s consumer market and comparing that market with other markets where MNE X motorcycles are sold, the parent company’s marketing department develops a marketing campaign for Country A where specifically adorned and highly decorated motorcycle helmets are given away for free together with motorcycles sold in Country A. There is no law requiring the use of motorcycle helmets in Country A. The marketing campaign is a success and sales in Country A increase over the next year. The helmets are actually quite popular due to their specific designs and adornments. In the following year, an independent study shows that motorcycles of MNE X are less likely to be involved in deadly accidents. This study boosts the sales of MNE X’s motorcycles in Country A. The associated enterprise in Country A is allocated the cost of the marketing campaign by the parent company. As a result of the independent study on motorcycle safety, however, the sales of MNE X motorcycles go up in Countries B, C and D as well. These countries also have no laws that require the use of motorcycle helmets when riding a motorcycle. The issue is whether the marketing campaign cost incurred by the parent company’s marketing department perhaps ought to be allocated to associated enterprises in Countries B, C and D as well. The increased sales in Countries B, C, and D appear to be incidental benefits of the marketing campaign developed for Country A specifically and allocation of costs to the associated enterprises in Countries B, C and D would therefore not be in line with the arm’s length principle.
Assume that an MNE has an Asia Pacific regional headquarters company that requests the management of its parent company to review the structure and operations of associated enterprises in that region to ensure the regional group maintains its profitability. The managerial review of the associated enterprises may result in the decision to terminate certain business activities which are failing to meet profit expectations and are unlikely to improve. The reduction in profitability may be the result of structural market changes caused by technological developments. In this situation, the review would satisfy the benefit test at the level of the regional holding company. An independent enterprise in the same circumstances would be willing to receive advice from an independent management enterprise. The resulting decision on which business lines to retain and discard may provide incidental benefits for associated enterprises which are regional headquarters in other regions, such as South America. If the business lines of the associated enter-prises in other regions are similar to the Asia Pacific region, then the benefit test has been satisfied and a service charge may be imposed on these associated enterprises. On the other hand, if the business lines in the other regions are dissimilar, these associated enterprises cannot be subject to a service charge for the follow-on benefits resulting from the managerial review. In this circumstance, the benefit test would fail to be satisfied if an independent party would be unwilling to pay for an evalu-ation of business lines not relevant to its business.
5.2.6.21 There are some cases where a service performed by an MNE member benefits or is expected to benefit only certain MNE members, but incidentally provides benefits to other members. Examples could be analyzing the question of whether to reorganize the group, to acquire new members or to terminate a division. These activities could constitute intragroup services to the particular MNE members involved; for example, those members who will make the acquisition or terminate one of their divisions, but they also may produce economic benefit for other MNE members not involved in the decision by increasing efficiencies, economies of scale or other synergies. The incidental benefits ordinarily would not cause these other MNE members to be treated as receiving an intragroup service because the activities producing the benefits would not be ones for which an independent enterprise ordinarily would be willing to pay.
If chargeable intragroup services have been rendered, the next step is to determine the arm’s length service charges for transfer pricing purposes. Under the arm’s length principle, charges for the services should reflect the charges that would be paid or received by independent entities in the same or similar circumstances. The arm’s length price for services should be considered
from both the perspective of the service provider and the perspective of the service recipient. In this respect, relevant considerations include the value of the service to the recipient and how much a comparable independent enterprise would be prepared to pay for that service in comparable circumstances (given the extent of the benefit it expects to receive from the service), as well as the costs of providing the service incurred by the service provider.
As can be seen from a review of the types of services listed in the overview in Annex 1 at the end of this chapter, services that may be provided between associated enterprises vary widely both in nature and value. Some services may be routine or administrative in nature and can appropriately be compensated at prices approximating the cost of the service plus a small markup. Other services may be unique, require significant skill to perform, involve the use of valuable intangibles of the service provider, and may be key contributors to the profitability of the MNE. At arm’s length, such services may command prices that result in significant profits for the provider of the service. Accordingly, no single approach to determining arm’s length prices will be appropriate in all situations. Specifically, the CPM will not always yield the best estimate of the arm’s length value of the services provided.
To determine an arm’s length charge for intragroup services, a functional analysis should be undertaken. The functional analysis would consider the functions performed, the assets used or contributed and the risks assumed by the service provider. The functional analysis would also consider any involvement of the service recipient and the use the service recipient makes of the service in conducting its own business. The functional analysis would provide evidence of the economic benefit expected or received from the services by the recipient and it would also provide assistance in determining the reliability of available comparables. If a service activity is a separate activity engaged in for the benefit of the group, the functional analysis of the service provider may be relatively simple. If the services are connected with the provision of knowhow or other intangibles, the analysis may be more complex. Intangibles are considered in Chapter 6.
An example of a chargeable service activity would be the provision of marketing services for an MNE by an associated enterprise. The functional analysis of that activity may involve an analysis of the activities of the associated enterprise’s staff in designing and implementing the marketing services. This consideration would also involve the skill and expertise of the staff of the service provider and the time involved in developing the marketing strategy. The assets used or contributed may include the business premises as well as an office and computer equipment. The intangibles involved may include knowledge of independent enterprises providing advertising services, customer lists and knowhow developed through other marketing campaigns. A marketing strategy may involve an element of risk as a prediction can only be made on the expected outcomes of the campaign.
There are two general approaches that may be used in charging for services, the direct charge and the indirect charge.
The direct charging approach requires that, for specific services provided, the beneficiary of the services and the price for those services must be identified. In general, any of the transfer pricing methods identified in the following section may be applied to identify an arm’s length price under a direct charging approach. For example, a foreign subsidiary may be directly charged for a twoday visit of a software engineer who is employed by the parent company and who may have visited the foreign subsidiary’s site at the latter’s request to render certain consultancy or advisory services. In such a case the parent company can charge the specific costs for these consulting services with or without a profit markup (as may be appropriate) directly to the foreign subsidiary.
A direct charging approach may be difficult to apply and the administrative cost of direct charging may be an administrative burden which is disproportionate to the services provided, particularly where services may be provided to more than one recipient within the group. Many MNEs have developed indirect charging approaches based on apportionment to reflect the relative benefit that each associated enterprise is expected to receive from the provision of intragroup services. A sound indirect charge approach would use allocation keys based on objective factors which are proxy measures for the relative economic benefit each associated enterprise receives from centralized services. The allocation keys are considered in section 5.4.8. Allocation keys are acceptable provided they reasonably comply with the arm’s length principle. The main feature of indirect approaches is that the allocations are estimates of the relative benefits that associated enterprises expect to receive from services. The allocation may be based on a single factor or several factors used in combination. For example, if human resources services are centralized for an MNE, the allocation may be based on the number of employees in each associated enterprise. For services related to marketing, an appropriate allocation key may be turnover.
In some cases, it may be difficult to measure the expected economic benefit of some centralized services within an MNE. For example, it would be difficult to estimate the benefit of a promotional campaign at a major national sporting event which has a worldwide television audience. Once the promotion rights are obtained and a payment made, the MNE is required to allocate the cost of the centralized promotion prospectively on the basis of the expected economic benefit for MNE members. Tax administrations of developing countries often find it difficult to verify the validity of these types of fees. Furthermore, determining whether the applied allocation is in accordance with the arm’s length principle is another practical difficulty since intragroup services are mostly charged by applying an indirect charge approach, utilizing various allocation keys. When the parent company of an MNE is located overseas, the local subsidiary companies can often only provide information regarding their own operations instead of an overall understanding of the entire intragroup services structure. Potentially relevant information could be whether associated enterprises in other countries that similarly benefit from the services follow the same methodology to pay the service fees and the actual amount of the service fees charged to the various associated enterprises.
Generally, the direct charge approach is preferred over the indirect charge approach in cases where the services rendered by an associated enterprise to other MNE members can be specifically identified and quantified. In many circumstances, MNEs will not have an option but to use indirect cost allocation. In such cases, intragroup services charged on an allocation basis will be acceptable if the allocation is a reasonable reflection of the expected benefits (see section 5.4.8).
It may be necessary to distinguish between the transfer of tangible or intangible assets and the provision of ancillary services. For example, services may include the provision of training or advice on the use and operation of machinery and equipment. In the case of intangible assets, the services may be training and assistance on the use of technology protected by patents, copyright or knowhow. If the provision of intragroup services is separate from the provision of tangible or intangible assets then a separate arm’s length service charge may be appropriate. Determining whether a service is connected to the transfer of tangible or intangible assets depends on the facts and circumstances of the transaction.
If a payment for tangible or intangible assets already includes the price for accompanying ancillary services, a separate service fee may be inappropriate as this would involve a second charge for the same services. The transfer price for such transactions may be supported by comparables in which similar ancillary services are provided, such as internal comparables. It may be difficult to obtain external comparables. On the other hand, if the transfer price for the transfer of a tangible or intangible asset did not cover the provision of services, it would be appropriate for a separate service charge to be made.
| Crimson Co. is a resident of Country A and the parent of an MNE that carries on a business of mining and processing minerals. Violet Co. is an associated enterprise resident in Country B and also carries on a business of mining and processing minerals. Crimson Co. has developed a processing system for minerals which reduces the cost of processing and the processing time. The processing system is knowhow and Crimson Co. has not sought a patent for it. Crimson Co. agrees to provide a licence to Violet Co. for the right to use its knowhow for the processing of minerals. The royalty fee for the licence to use the knowhow is three per cent of Violet Co.’s income from sales of minerals to independent customers. Under this arrangement, Crimson Co. agrees to provide ancillary services to the staff of Violet Co. on the use of the knowhow. A functional analysis has been carried out by Crimson Co. and appropriate comparables have been identified in setting the three per cent royalty fee, and in confirming the fee is arm’s length. In addition to providing a licence to use similar intangibles, the comparables provide the same or similar ancillary services, the fees for which are embedded in the royalty fee. In this situation, Crimson Co. has been fully remunerated for the provision of knowhow and any ancillary services by the three per cent royalty fee. It would be inappropriate for the tax authority in Country A to claim that the royalty payment only applies to the licence of the intangibles and that Crimson Co. should receive a further payment for the provision of ancillary services. The fees for the ancillary services are embedded in the transfer price relating to the licence for use of the knowhow. Consequently, it would be inappropriate for any additional service charges for the ancillary services to be imposed on the associated enterprise. |
For both direct and indirect charging approaches, the transfer pricing methods in this Manual at Chapter 4 may be used to determine arm’s length prices for intragroup services provided that they are reliable. If there is a disagreement between the tax authorities of the service provider and the service recipient on intragroup service charges, double taxation may occur. See Chapter 4 for a detailed discussion of the transfer pricing methods that can be appropriate for intragroup services, i.e. the Comparable Uncontrolled Price (CUP) Method, the Cost Plus Method (CPM), the Transactional Net Margin Method (TNMM) and, in some circumstances, the Profit Split Method (PSM).
The CUP Method (see 4.2.1) requires a high degree of comparability between controlled and uncontrolled transactions. If an MNE’s service provider renders the same services in comparable circumstances to independent entities as it provides to associated enterprises, these may qualify as internal comparables allowing it to apply the CUP Method. In addition, the service provider would have a charging system in place. Similarly, if an associated entity receives the same or similar services from both an associated enterprise and from independent service providers, that entity may be able to use these as internal comparables for the CUP Method. If the service provider only provides centralized services to intragroup members, external CUPs may in some cases be available. A potential CUP may be used provided it is comparable to the intragroup services. However, for the CUP Method to be applicable, an analysis of the types of services provided in controlled and uncontrolled transactions is required.
The CUP Method may not be applicable if services are only provided within an MNE and there are no comparable uncontrolled transactions between independent parties. In performing the comparability analysis, the controlled and uncontrolled transactions should be compared based on the comparability factors discussed in Chapter 3. As the CUP Method requires a high degree of comparability, details on the services rendered, functions performed, assets used or contributed and the risks assumed in controlled and uncontrolled transactions may be needed. In addition, comparability may be affected if provision of the services involves the use of intangibles. Other comparability factors may have an effect on the prices charged in uncontrolled transactions such as quantity discounts and contractual terms, including those which may provide extended periods for payment of services rendered and associated guarantees.
If there are material differences between controlled and uncontrolled service transactions, reasonably accurate comparability adjustments are required. If such comparability adjustments cannot be made, the reliability of the CUP Method will be reduced and the CUP Method may not be the most appropriate method. While comparable service transactions between independent parties may take place, it is unlikely that the critical information on these transactions (such as the prices charged, functions performed, assets used or contributed and risks assumed by the parties) will be available for comparison. This type of information on uncontrolled transactions is often confidential and unlikely to be publicly available.
| Grain Co. and Shipper Co. are associated enterprises. Grain Co. is resi-dent in Country A and produces wheat for export. Shipper Co. is resident in Country B and carries on a business of providing grain shipping ser-vices. Shipper Co. provides grain shipping services to four independent enterprises and approximately 60 per cent of its business is made up of performing shipping services to these independent customers. 40 per cent of its business consists of performing similar shipping services for Grain Co. In this situation it is likely that Shipper Co. would be able to use the CUP Method as it has internal comparables to use in setting its transfer prices for Grain Co. The reliability of the comparables depends on a comparability analysis. Assume that there is a high level of compa-rability in terms of the type of service provided, the volume of transac-tions, the contractual terms and the economic conditions. In this case, Shipper Co. would be able to use the internal comparables in setting its transfer prices for shipping services provided to Grain Co. |
| The facts are the same as Example 10, except that 90 per cent of Shipper Co.’s business is providing shipping services to Grain Co. The remaining 10 per cent of its business is providing shipping services on an ad hoc basis to independent customers. Assume further that the independent customers only use Shipper Co. in times of acute shortage of shipping capacity by other independent shipping enterprises. In these cases, ship-ping services may be more costly than when there is no shortage. In this situation, the comparability analysis is likely to lead to the conclu-sion that the comparables need to be adjusted for the significant dif-ferences between the controlled and uncontrolled transactions which would affect the shipping charges, or that the transactions are in fact not comparable. The main differences on the facts are the volume of business (90 per cent of volume originated by Grain Co. and 10 per cent by independ-ent entities), the market situation and the regularity of providing grain transporting services that must be taken into account as they would be expected to have a material effect on the transportation charges. If reasonably accurate adjustments for material differences between the controlled and uncontrolled transactions cannot be made, the reliability of the CUP Method will be reduced and the CUP Method may not be the most appropriate method. |
In practice, it is often the case that the CUP Method is inapplicable. In this situation, an MNE may consider using the CPM, which is less dependent on similarity between the controlled and uncontrolled service transactions than the CUP Method. As stated in 4.4.2.1, the financial ratio considered under the CPM is the gross profit markup. The aim of the CPM is to set the appropriate cost plus markup on the cost base so that the gross profit in a controlled services transaction is appropriate in light of the functions performed, risks assumed, assets used or contributed and market conditions. The CPM focuses on the service provider as the tested party. The CPM is used to determine arm’s length service charges based on the gross profit markup on costs earned by comparable independent service providers. The CPM is often used for determining transfer prices for services.
Although the CPM is less dependent on similarity between the controlled and uncontrolled services under the CUP Method, the services in controlled transactions and comparable uncontrolled transactions should be similar. If material differences arise between the controlled transactions and the comparables, adjustments are required provided they are reasonably accurate.
The cost base of services for controlled and uncontrolled transactions should be comparable. The application of the CPM depends on ensuring that the cost base of the associated enterprise and the comparables are the same as there is the possibility of differences between the cost bases arising from the use of different indirect expenses in the cost base. A list of the types of direct and indirect costs is set out below at 5.4.4.1. Differences between the cost bases can arise from the use of different indirect expenses in the cost and may make the CPM unreliable.
While in principle the appropriate markup for the CPM should be based on available comparables from independent service providers, as a matter of simplicity it may be appropriate to use the safeharbour option for low valueadded services (such as administrative services) considered at section 5.5.2 below. The cost of finding appropriate comparables for the purposes of the CPM may be disproportionate to the tax liability at stake and thus the safe harbour provides a compromise that limits compliance costs and imposes an appropriate fixed markup. In addition, the task of finding comparable gross profit margins may prove challenging in many jurisdictions, as gross profit margins are not reported.
Total services costs means all costs included in calculating the operating income. The items that would be expected to be included in the direct cost base are: salaries of the staff providing services; bonuses; travel expenses; materials used in providing services; and communication expenses attributable to the provision of services. Indirect expenses may include the following items: depreciation of equipment and buildings; rent for leased items or immovable property; property taxes; occupancy and other overhead costs; maintenance costs; insurance; personnel costs, accounting and payroll expenses; and other general, administrative and managerial expenses. Total services costs do not include interest expenses, foreign income taxes or domestic income taxes.
| A company that is a member of an MNE provides an on-call service to its associated enterprises and the service satisfies the economic benefit test. Once it is established that an on-call service provides a benefit to group members the next issue for consideration is the service fee that may be charged. The fee for an on-call service may include part of the capital costs of providing the service, such as business premises and equipment as well as a profit margin. If the premises and equipment are leased, the charge would be a proportion of the annual lease fees. If the premises and equipment are purchased, it would be appropriate to allocate depre-ciation expenses to the recipients. An independent enterprise providing such services would be expected to consider these expenses in the prices it charges its customers. |
The TNMM may be used for services (see 4.5 for more details on the TNMM). The TNMM examines the net profit margin of an associated enterprise (the tested party) from the controlled transactions, relative to an appropriate base. The TNMM focuses on net profit rather than gross profit
margins and looks at comparable net profit margins for uncontrolled transactions. The TNMM may be based on internal comparables, such as those from uncontrolled transactions into which the associated enterprise enters. Alternatively, the profit margins may be obtained from transactions by independent parties.
The TNMM may be used for services (see 4.5 for more details on the TNMM). The TNMM examines the net profit margin of an associated enterprise (the tested party) from the controlled transactions, relative to an appropriate base. The TNMM focuses on net profit rather than gross profit
margins and looks at comparable net profit margins for uncontrolled transactions. The TNMM may be based on internal comparables, such as those from uncontrolled transactions into which the associated enterprise enters. Alternatively, the profit margins may be obtained from transactions by independent parties.
The TNMM may be used for intragroup services if the CPM cannot be used because reliable information on gross profit margins is unavailable for comparable service providers or because the cost base used for controlled and uncontrolled transactions is different. As the method is based on net profit levels, the TNMM has a greater tolerance for accounting inconsistencies arising from cost base differences between controlled and independent service providers.
The profit level indicator that may often be appropriate for intragroup services provided by an associated enterprise would be the ratio of the operating profit to the cost base of providing the services, referred to as the “Return on Total Services Costs”. The Return on Total Services Costs earned by independent service providers carrying on comparable activities may be available and may provide reliable comparables to be used in applying the TNMM.
| Service Provider Co. in Country A is a member of an MNE and it pro-vides marketing services for the group. Service Provider Co. is requested by an associated enterprise Seller Co. in Country B to design a market-ing programme for a new product. Following research, Service Provider Co. has concluded that the CUP Method and the CPM are inapplicable. In applying the TNMM to Service Provider Co., the costs of providing services and operating expenses are known. The unknown variable is the arm’s length charge for the intragroup service. A comparability analysis is then carried out to determine the appropri-ate arm’s length net profit margin for Service Provider Co. If we assume that the direct costs of providing the service are $80,000 and the associ-ated operating expenses are $20,000, the total direct and indirect costs of providing the services are $100,000. Assume that Service Provider Co. makes a net profit to costs ratio of 5 per cent. |
The Profit Split Method may in certain circumstances be used for services (see 4.6 for more details on the Profit Split Method). The Profit Split Method is a twosided analysis which applies to the profits of two or more associated enterprises engaging in controlled transactions. The Profit Split Method may be the most appropriate method when both sides to controlled transactions make unique and valuable contributions to the transaction, e.g. in the form of unique and valuable intangibles; in cases where the business operations of the parties are highly integrated; or where the parties share the assumption of economically significant risks. The aim of this method is to allocate profits on the basis that independent enterprises would have used in comparable independent transactions. Profits would be split on an economically rational basis that would reflect the relative value of functions performed, risks assumed and assets used or contributed by each associated enterprise. The Profit Split Method may be applied on the basis of a contribution analysis or a residual analysis (see section 4.6.4 for further elaboration).
| the country of destination, collecting it from a port or airport and then supplying it to the ultimate buyer.YZ Corporation is an MNE group engaged in the business of a logis tics service provider offering a comprehensive portfolio of international, domestic and specified freight handling services. The group has two operating entities, Companies Y and Z, operating in country Y and country Z, respectively. The business activities of Y and Z involve enter ing into contracts with third parties for moving their cargo from its source to destinations abroad. The execution of the job involves lifting cargo from the location of the customer in one country, sending it to Companies Y and Z undertake all the relevant activities in their own territories and do so in a highly integrated manner. Companies Y and Z are highly interdependent for the performance of all customer contracts since customers may be based in (and contract with) either Company Y or Company Z. The two entities also perform similar marketing, sales and customer relationship functions, and they have jointly devel-oped and operate an integrated cargo tracking system. YZ Corporation markets itself to customers on the basis that its network of subsidiaries provides seamless integration across jurisdictional boundaries to cus-tomers, irrespective of their location. In this example, the business operations of Company Y and Company Z are highly integrated and interdependent, such that neither could be reliably evaluated in isolation from the other. As a result, the Profit Split Method is found to be the most appropriate method in this case. The method might be applied by combining the total expenses incurred in all countries and then deducting these from total gross receipts, the residual amount being shared in the ratio of 50:50 between Company Y and Company Z. |
In some circumstances an MNE may decide to outsource some services to an independent entity with one associated enterprise acting as an agent for the group to pay the accounts and to then allocate the charges to its associated enterprises. Such costs may be called passthrough costs. As an agent, the associated enterprise’s only role may be to pay the independent service provider and to then allocate the total cost of services among group members on an objective basis. In such a case, it may not be appropriate that the associated enterprise receives a markup on the cost of the outsourced services. Rather, the agent’s compensation could be based on the costs of the agency function itself and the outsourced costs could be allocated among members of the MNE without markup.
| An MNE has a parent company, Controller Company, in Country A and has an associated enterprise, Subsidiary Company in Country B. Controller Co. has 10 subsidiaries in total around the world. The MNE has reviewed its operations and has decided that the activities in which it has a comparative advantage will remain in-house functions and to outsource activities that independent enterprises can provide at a lower cost. The MNE has decided to outsource its human resources activities to an independent enterprise, Independent Company, in Country B, for the whole group. The MNE has decided to outsource the work through Subsidiary Company as it is located in the same jurisdiction as the ser-vice provider. The role of Subsidiary Company is to pay the independ-ent enterprise and to recharge the costs it incurs in doing so to group members. In this situation Subsidiary Company is operating as an agent. Subsidiary Company passes on the service costs charged by Independent Company without a profit mark-up to MNE members using an alloca-tion key based on full time employee equivalents. The charge is on a pass-through basis as Subsidiary Company is not adding value and is merely used for convenience to distribute the human resource costs of outsourcing to Independent Company. In addition, Subsidiary Company may provide a service in paying Independent Company and allocating the cost to MNE members. |
The use of allocation keys can provide an effective proxy for estimating the proportional share in the expected benefits from the activities, and accordingly for allocating the costs or value of services within an MNE, once the benefit test has been satisfied. An allocation key should be determined consistently for all associated enterprises concerned and should reasonably reflect each associated enterprise’s relative share in the expected benefits from the intragroup services. An example of an inconsistent allocation key is one that uses different bases for allocating expenses for services to associated enterprises in different tax jurisdictions.
When selecting an allocation key, consideration should be given to the nature of the services and the use to which the services are put. For example, if the services relate to human resource activities, the proportionate number of employees may be an appropriate measure of the respective benefit to each MNE member. In addition, there are situations in which the proportion of services rendered to each beneficiary might not be easily identifiable with reference to the exact quantum of benefit attained or expected (for instance, in cases involving a centralized advertisement campaign). In such cases, the allocation key would be an approximate value (e.g. proportional net sales of all the beneficiaries to allocate the cost incurred to implement the centralized advertising campaign mentioned above).
From a compliance perspective, there is a tradeoff between precision and simplicity. A complex allocation key may place an excessive compliance burden on MNEs with negligible improvements in allocating expenses within an MNE. Any allocation will benefit from having supporting evidence to justify that it allocates expenses within an MNE on an appropriate basis. Determining whether an allocation key is appropriate requires an analysis of an MNE’s facts and circumstances.
In order to comply with the arm’s length principle, an allocation key should satisfy the following requirements:
► Be measurable;
► Be relevant to the type of services, i.e. provide a reasonable proxy for measuring the parties’ proportional share in the expected benefits from the services at hand;
► Be determined consistently within an MNE; and
► Be documented.
Furthermore, care should be used where the allocation key is significantly affected by other intragroup transactions. For example, allocating service costs on the basis of the proportional thirdparty and related party sales of the associated enterprises receiving the services may not be appropriate if some of those associated enterprises make a large percentage of their sales to associated enterprises. This is because prices of the latter may be subject to adjustment under transfer pricing rules.
Examples of allocation keys include:
► Sales;
► Gross or net profit;
► Units produced or sold;
► Number of employees or fulltime equivalents (FTEs);
► Value of salaries and wages;
► Number of information technology users;
► Office or factory space;
► Capital;
► Operating expenses; and
► The number of personal computers, tablets or other devices.
The following nonexhaustive list contains allocation keys that are commonly used by MNEs for certain types of services:52 (see also the example in Annex 1 of 5.14.4):
► Information technology: number of personal computers, tablets or other devices; number of users;
► Business management software: number of licences;
► Human resources: number of employees;
► Health and safety: number of employees;
► Staff training: number of employees;
► Tax and accounting: sales or size of balance sheet;
► Marketing services: value of sales to independent customers; and
► Vehicle fleet management: number of cars; distance travelled.
These allocation keys are provided only as examples and other allocation keys may be acceptable.
EC (2011). Guidelines on Low Value Adding Intra-group Services. Brussels: EC. Available from https://ec.europa.eu/taxation_customs/system/files/2016-09/c_2011_16_en.pdf.
| Manufacturing Co., Distributor Co. and Personnel Co. are associated enterprises in an MNE. Manufacturing Co. is the parent company and is resident in Country A. Distributor Co. is resident in Country B. Manufacturing Co. is in the business of manufacturing sporting goods. Distributor Co.’s only business activity is to distribute Manufacturing Co.’s goods in Country B. Personnel Co. is resident in Country C and provides human resources services for the group. The centralization of services is designed to exploit efficiencies of scale and the relatively lower labour costs in Country C. Assume that Personnel Co.’s total cost of providing human resources services to Manufacturing Co. and Distributor Co. is $454,545. Assume that a 10 per cent mark-up is found to be arm’s length. The cost base includes direct and indirect costs in accordance with the accounting standards used in Country C. Therefore, the total service charge for human resources services provided to Manufacturing Co. and Distributor Co. is $500,000. Manufacturing Co. has 1,000 employees and Distributor Co. has 50 employees. These are full-time equivalent employees. This MNE group uses an allocation key for attributing the human resource service charge on the basis of number of employees. This allocation key is chosen as it reflects the expected benefits of the associated enterprises from the provision of intragroup human resources services. The cost to be allocated per employee is ($500,000/1,050) $476.19. On this basis, the allocation key results in the following allocation of the human resources service charge:
|
It is often burdensome and costly to determine arm’s length prices if an associated enterprise provides a range of intragroup services. A practical alternative for a tax authority is to provide taxpayers with the option of using a safe harbour for certain low valueadding services, provided it results in an outcome that broadly complies with the arm’s length principle. The safe harbour may be based on acceptable markup rates for services. Several countries provide a safe harbour option for certain services. The advantages of a safe harbour are that it provides certainty for taxpayers and tax authorities. In addition, safe harbours can reduce the costs of complying with transfer pricing requirements in a country. Moreover, any additional tax revenue that a tax authority may receive from a transfer pricing adjustment of such services may be outweighed by the administrative costs of applying the arm’s length principle to such services. Accordingly, providing a safe harbour enables tax authorities to use their resources to concentrate on transfer pricing reviews in which the tax revenue at stake is more significant. The downside of a unilateral safe harbour is that the service provider’s country may not provide for a safe harbour and insist on a higher markup than the safe harbour markup and this may result in double taxation. If a bilateral or multilateral safe harbour is Wavailable, this is to be preferred as it reduces the risk of double taxation.
This chapter sets out two safe harbours that may be used by tax authorities:
► Low value services that are unconnected to an associated enterprise’s main business activity. This safe harbour is usually available for low valueadding services. The rationale for a safe harbour is that there may be difficulties in finding comparable transactions for low valueadding services; and the administrative costs and compliance costs may be disproportionate to the tax at stake. In addition, the safe harbour provides taxpayers and tax authorities with certainty.
► Safe harbours for minor expenses (i.e. amounts below a defined threshold). These are for situations in which the costs of services provided or received are relatively low, so the tax authority may agree to not adjust the transfer prices provided they fall within the acceptable range. The rationale for this safe harbour is that the cost of a tax authority making adjustments is not commensurate with the tax revenue at stake and therefore the taxpayer should not be expected to incur compliance costs to determine more precise arm’s length prices.53
These two safe harbours are based on the safe harbours in the Australian Taxation Office’s Taxation Ruling 1999/1 Income Tax: International transfer pricing for intra-group services, paras. 77–87. Available from https://www.ato.gov.au/law/ view/document?src=hs&pit=99991231235958&arc=false&start=1&pageSize=50&tot al=123&num=10&docid=TXR%2FTR19991%2FNAT%2FATO%2F00001&dc=false& stype=find&tm=phrase-basic-1999%2F1
Low valueadding services are services which are not part of an MNE group’s main business activities from which it derives its profits. They are low valueadding services that support the associated enterprise’s business operations. A determination of an associated enterprise’s low valueadding services would be based on a functional analysis of the enterprise. The functional analysis would provide evidence of the main business activities of an associated enterprise and the way in which it derives its profits.
Low valueadding intragroup services are services performed by one member or more than one member of an MNE group on behalf of one or more other group members which:
► Are of a supportive nature;
► Are not part of the core business of the MNE group (i.e. not creating the profitearning activities or contributing to economically significant activities of the MNE group);
► Do not require the use of unique and valuable intangibles and do not lead to the creation of unique and valuable intangibles; and
► Do not involve the assumption or control of substantial or significant risk by the service provider and do not give rise to the creation of significant risk for the service provider.
The following services are common examples of low valueadding services for most MNE groups (i.e. provided they do not constitute the core business of the group):
► Human resources services;
► Accounting services;
► Clerical or administrative services;
► Tax compliance services; and
► Data processing.
See also Annex 1 for the list of low valueadding services compiled by the European Commission.
The following services are examples of services that would typically fail to qualify as low valueadding services:
► Services connected with main business functions performed by an MNE;
► Extraction and exploration services;
► Manufacturing services;
► Construction services;
► Financial services;
► Research and development services;
► Marketing and distribution services; and
► Strategic management services.
The determination of whether services qualify as low valueadding services may require a casebycase analysis of the key business activities of an MNE.
A safe harbour may contain the following requirements:
► Identification of the service within the scope of the safe harbour;
► A fixed profit margin;
► An assumption that the same profit margin is accepted in the other country; and
► Documentation requirements.
| Manufacturing Co., Distributor Co. and Services Co. are associated enterprises. Manufacturing Co. is resident in Country A and carries on the business of manufacturing goods. Distributor Co. is resident in Country B and is a distributor of goods purchased from Manufacturing Co. The MNE group decides to centralize its human resources function in Services Co. in Country C in order to obtain cost savings through economies of scale and the relatively low labour costs in that country. The total cost of human resources services provided to Distributor Co. is $100,000 under a direct charging system and the agreed markup for this function is 7.5 per cent in Country C; therefore Distributor Co. is charged $107,500 by Services Co. under a direct charging system for human resources services. Distributor Co. has total deductions of $2 million which include the services costs for Services Co. Country B provides an administrative safe harbour for low valueadding inbound and outbound intragroup services. Under the safe harbour provisions, a profit markup of 7.5 per cent is allowable. A further requirement of the safe harbour is that the total expenses claimed under the safe harbour cannot exceed 15 per cent of the taxpayer’s total deductions. Distributor Co. chooses to use the safe harbour for low valueadding administrative services and claims a deduction of $107,500. Distributor Co. has documentation that it received human resources services from Services Co. and that it used the low valueadding services safe harbour. On the facts, Distributor Co. would be entitled to use the low valueadding services safe harbour as the human resources are less than 15 per cent of its total expenses and the markup on services is in accordance with the safe harbour requirements. On the basis that Distributor Co.’s main business activity is distributing goods, human resources services would qualify as administrative services. |
In the minor expense safe harbour option, a tax authority agrees to refrain from making a transfer pricing adjustment if the total cost of either receiving or providing intragroup services by an associated enterprise is below a fixed threshold based on cost and a fixed profit markup margin is used.
The aim is to exclude from transfer pricing examinations services for which the charge is relatively minor. The rationale is that the costs of complying with the transfer pricing rules would outweigh any revenue at stake. It also considers the potential administrative savings for a tax authority by avoiding transfer pricing examinations of minor expenses. An important requirement is that the same fixed profit margin should be used for inbound and outbound intragroup services for a country. The safe harbour provides taxpayers and tax authorities with certainty. The minor expense safe harbour may contain the following requirements:
► A restriction on the relative value of the service expense (e.g. less than X per cent of total expenses of the associated enterprise receiving the services) or alternatively, a restriction on the absolute value of the service expense;
► A fixed profit margin;
► The requirement that the same profit margin is used in the other country; and
► The documentation requirements that are expected.
An example of a safe harbour for services is set out as follows. For inbound intragroup services:
► The total cost of the services provided is less than X per cent of
the total deductions of the associated enterprises in a jurisdiction for a tax year, or less than a defined absolute amount in the local currency;
► The transfer price is a fixed profit markup on total costs of the services (direct and indirect expenses); and
► Documentation is prepared to establish that the safe harbour requirements have been satisfied.
For outbound intragroup services:
► The cost of providing the services is not more than X per cent of the taxable income of the associated enterprise providing the services, or not more than a defined absolute amount in the local currency;
► The transfer price charged is based on a fixed profit markup on the total costs of the services (direct and indirect expenses);
► The same profit margin is used in the other country; and
► Documentation is created to establish that these safe harbour requirements have been satisfied.
| Assume that Subsidiary Co. is resident in Country A and receives mar-keting services from its parent company, Parent Co., which is resident in Country B. A minor expense safe harbour is available in Country A. Under the Country A provisions, services expenses can qualify for the safe harbour if they total less than $750,000 and constitute less than 15 per cent of total deductible expenses. A profit mark-up on direct and indi-rect costs of up to 7.5 per cent is allowable under the safe harbour rules. The total direct and indirect cost of providing the services is $500,000. Subsidiary Co. decides to use the safe harbour option, as the costs of pre-paring a comprehensive transfer pricing analysis for such services and determining the arm’s length margin would be excessive given the mate-riality of the services concerned. Subsidiary Co. does not acquire other services from associated enterprises and its total deductible expenses are $10 million. The total charge for services of $537,500 is below the $750,000 threshold and the expense is 5.37 per cent of Subsidiary Co’s total deductible expenses and thus below the 15 per cent threshold. Accordingly, provided Subsidiary Co. satisfies the relevant documenta-tion requirements, it can deduct the $537,500 amount paid to Parent Co under the safe harbour rules. |
Safe harbours may have unintended consequences and should be carefully considered before they are implemented. If in the above example a full transfer pricing analysis concluded that the arm’s length profit margin is 5 per cent, the service charge would have been $525,000. Under the safe harbour, Subsidiary Co. has been able to claim $537,500 as a deductible expense in Country A for intragroup services. Moreover, Subsidiary Co has not had to incur the costs of a full transfer pricing analysis (which may have exceeded $12,500).
On the other hand, if the tax authorities in Country B are not aware of the safe harbour, the application of the Country B transfer pricing rules would require arm’s length services income of $525,000 to be reported, which is $12,500 less than the amount claimed as a deductible expense by Subsidiary Co. in Country A, effectively creating an amount of income that is not subject to tax in either country. To avoid this result, consideration should be given to requiring a matching of income and costs under the safe harbour rules. Ideally, safe harbours should also be considered on a bilateral or multilateral basis.
This section provides additional guidance on how to analyze centralized procurement activities in an MNE, the factors that may affect compensation for those activities, and the transfer pricing methods that may be appropriate.
Additional guidance is appropriate because most MNEs operate some form of centralized procurement function, but the precise nature of the activities and their contribution to value can vary widely. This guidance helps to identify the functions that may be involved in centralized procurement activities, and the factors that can distinguish lower contributions to value from higher contributions. Developing countries sometimes encounter aggressive arrangements involving the insertion by an MNE of procurement activities that seem to lack economic substance; in illustrating the commercial objectives of centralized procurement activities and typical functions, this guidance should help to identify features of substantive arrangements.
Procurement activities may attract the interest of tax administrations. These activities are among those specified for disclosure in a countrybycountry Report54 and are the subject of attention by the Forum on Tax Administration in its Handbook on Effective Tax Risk Assessment, where procurement is seen as a potentially mobile activity that could be located in jurisdictions where the group does not have significant manufacturing operations (i.e. the key markets for the procured goods) and used to reduce the level of taxable income in the jurisdictions where goods are processed or sold.55 Offshore procurement is identified as an activity to be noted in a risk assessment for further examination at 13.2.2.16.
OECD (2015). Transfer Pricing Documentation and Country-by-Country Reporting, Action 13-2015 Final Report, OECD/G20 Base Erosion and Profit Shifting Project. Paris: OECD Publishing. Available from https://www.oecd.org/ctp/transfer-pricing-documentation-and-country-by-country-reporting-action-13-2015-final-report-9789264241480-en.htm
OECD (2017). Country-by-Country Reporting: Handbook on Effective Tax Risk Assessment. Paris: OECD Publishing. Available from https://www.oecd.org/ tax/beps/country-by-country-reporting-handbook-on-effective-tax-risk-assessment. pdf. See paras. 70–71.
However, procurement activities may be located outside key markets because the activity, or some element of it, needs to be conducted in close proximity to the sources of supply. For some industrial sectors, including clothing or food ingredients as examples, those sources of supply may be in developing countries for whom the products may represent a significant proportion of export trade. Therefore, incorrectly evaluating procurement activities can have detrimental tax consequences for both the jurisdiction in which the activity generates income and the jurisdiction being charged a fee. This guidance provides a framework in which to evaluate procurement activities, irrespective of their location, and its application is illustrated by an extended example at the end of the section (see section 5.14.4).
Centralized procurement activities are often associated with cost savings, which is usually taken to mean per unit cost reductions of the goods or services procured. However, as the following section explains (see 5.8.), there may be many commercial objectives driving the centralizing of procurement activities within an MNE, and per unit cost savings may not always be one of them. Procurement activities can and do provide value in ways other than per unit cost reductions.
Where evidence of per unit cost reductions is provided by a taxpayer, the impact of any volume effect will need to be considered, but it is important not to jump to the conclusion that the reductions are caused solely or partly by a volume effect. A supplier will not always be willing or able to reduce the price in exchange for higher volumes, and the associated enterprises individually may already have sufficient volume to command the lowest price. In the absence of a published price list, it will be difficult for tax administrations to assess whether additional volume has caused additional discount. There may be countervailing commercial pressures as well that drive a buyer to adopt a multiple sourcing strategy and to spread its volume around multiple vendors and reduce risk exposure, and similarly that may drive a vendor to avoid overreliance on one customer.
Evidence of per unit cost reductions may point not to a potential volume effect, but rather to the interaction of the procurement activities with the vendor that helps to reduce the vendor’s costs or risks which can then partly be passed on to the buyer: for example, a procurement company might take on transport coordination functions, or assume compliance with labelling requirements. Significantly, procurement activities could be found to include arranging for a range of products to be sourced from a particular vendor; some seasonal, time sensitive, and with unpredictable demand; and some predictable items that can be produced throughout the year, so that the vendor can plan production schedules more efficiently and reduce or eliminate downtime and associated costs. A reduction in the vendor’s risks and costs in this manner can drive a more favourable price for the buyer. In such a case, volume itself may play little or no part in achieving the cost reductions for the buyer; instead the cost reductions are achieved through the expert coordination of both vendor and buyer requirements by the party providing the procurement activities.
Measurement of per unit cost savings is sometimes used in evaluating the fee for procurement activities, as discussed further in section 5.14. This can be a difficult measurement for tax administrations to analyze. It may be possible to see that in Month 12 an MNE was paying 100 for an item, and that in Month 13 following the introduction of a centralized group procurement company, the MNE was paying 95 for the identical item on the same terms. But as time passes, the relevance of using 100 as the baseline reduces because other factors may have contributed to price changes, and the item may no longer be identical. In such cases, measurement of cost savings in, say, Month 37 may be presented by the taxpayer based on comparison with a hypothetical price that the MNE would have paid in Month 37 had it not received the services of the group procurement company. The hypothesis will need to be presented rigorously by the taxpayer with supporting evidence, and verification ultimately may be difficult for tax administrations. Thus, where cost savings are relevant to evaluating a fee for procurement activities they need to be supported by evidence that can be examined by tax administrations. It should not be forgotten that procurement activities can provide value in the absence of per unit cost reductions.
In practice, the MNE may monitor and measure in various ways the performance of procurement activities for commercial purposes in order to assess their effectiveness, and those measures may be instructive in a transfer pricing analysis. Depending on the commercial objectives of the MNE, such monitoring and measurement may focus on quality, speed, standardizing the range of items, finding alternative sources of supply, working capital management through vendor credit terms and inventory levels, order processing costs, production disruption, integrating other divisions or newly acquired businesses, meeting external and internal standards (for example, ethical trading, traceability, safety), and specific improvement projects to which the procurement function contributes.
There may be various commercial objectives in centralizing procurement activities. A pure volume effect may not be the most important objective, particularly when individual enterprises in an MNE may separately have strong buying power. At its simplest level centralizing can reduce administrative costs by coordinating and aggregating purchase orders, so that instead of, say, 25 associated enterprises in an MNE, each separately purchasing from, say, 10suppliers, thereby creating 250 orders each time, the purchase orders are aggregated, so that there is only one order placed with each of the 10 suppliers. However, at this simple level, the individual members of the MNE group continue to determine their requirements, and the central procurement activity helps to manage and reduce the administrative costs of order processing and accounts payable.
An additional commercial objective of centralizing procurement activities might be to standardize buying terms; it may be that the 25 enterprises had each negotiated different terms with the suppliers in the past, and the oversight of all purchasing that central coordination can bring enables a sharing of the best terms for all associated enterprises. The central procurement function remains administrative; it is not itself creating enhanced terms but acting as the vehicle through which the members of the MNE share information and best practice. In some circumstances, dealing with one buyer may be helpful for the supplier since it is no longer dealing with 25 different buyers and may be able to share efficiencies with the MNE that arise through reduction in numbers of purchase orders, standardization of terms, and coordinated production scheduling and delivery.
In some industries, for example producers or users of energy products, centralizing procurement activities may be a response to the significant infrastructure costs required to perform the procurement activities. Such costs may involve electronic trading platforms and may also extend to transportation and storage assets. A key commercial objective in centralizing procurement activities in such cases is to make the most efficient use of the investment.
In other situations, the centralizing of procurement activities may be established, or may evolve, to take a more active and extensive role in managing procurement and sourcing for the MNE with the objective of improving the group’s profitability and managing its risks. The role may be directed to enhancing the relationship with vendors, to improving the performance of the associated enterprises requiring the goods or services, or both.
A skilled buying team will likely analyze the supply chain and seek to rationalize excessive numbers of vendors without creating unacceptable exposure to a particular supplier, region, or currency; seek to deepen the relationship with remaining vendors through collaboration in managing production scheduling, demand forecasting, and specification improvements; monitor quality; select better or alternative sources of supply; and continually assess global trends that may affect availability of supply and prices. A skilled buying team may also seek to understand and anticipate the requirements of the associated enterprises using the goods or services.
The buying team may work closely with the production teams or development teams of the associated enterprises so that the buying team can suggest alternative or cheaper components, and will seek to understand and contribute to scheduling forecasts in order to avoid the costs and risks of overstocking as well as the potentially greater costs and risks of having insufficient supply.
In some sectors there are regulatory requirements concerning traceability of items used in producing goods, and there may be consumer interest in sustainability, environmental impact, and ethical concerns which can have consequences for the reputation and ultimate success of the MNE. The central procurement and sourcing function may have the commercial objective of coordinating or leading the efforts of the MNE in these matters.
In fulfilling these more active and extensive roles, the central procurement activities are not simply administrative, but have the commercial objective of improving the performance of the MNE’s operations. Since such an objective for active and extensive procurement activities carries the potential for a higher evaluation of the arm’s length compensation, a more detailed explanation of the extent of the activities and how they contribute to the MNE’s performance should be covered in the taxpayer’s transfer pricing documentation.
Any evaluation of the compensation for centralized procurement activities in an MNE should be based on a thorough understanding of the accurately delineated transaction, as set out in section 3.3.2 of this Manual. Three matters are likely to be particularly important to understand: (i) the role and expertise of a procurement services provider; (ii) the nature of the items procured and the commercial risks associated with those items; and
(iii) any risks that a service provider assumes. These matters are discussed in the following sections.
Procurement activities cover a range of functions and the particular functions actually performed in a particular case need to be specifically identified and their commercial objectives and contribution assessed. In performing such an analysis, it can be helpful to consider two categories of functions relating to procurement: purchasing and sourcing.
In providing a purchasing service, a centralized group procurement company may be instructed by the associated enterprises about their requirements, and the instructions may include specifications for the product or service, identification of the vendors, and parameters for volumes, pricing, delivery scheduling and other terms. In performing such a purchasing function, a group procurement company may provide “execution only,” and it may perform a largely administrative function relating to raising purchase orders and managing accounts payable. The role may not require expertise about the products or services procured, the needs of the recipients, or the capabilities of the vendors. The role of centralized purchasing might include relaying revised terms or other proposals to the recipients for approval, but it might not actively seek improvements or alternatives. The commercial objectives of a centralized purchasing function may include those outlined at 5.8.1 and 5.8.2.
A sourcing role is more extensive. The role of the centralized procurement company in performing a sourcing function may involve working with the associated recipient enterprises jointly to draw up specifications, to explore alternative specifications, identify potential sources of supply taking into account advantages and disadvantages of particular sourcing strategies, work with vendors to understand their capabilities and options, propose a supply schedule and other terms taking into account production forecasts. Such a role may require expertise about the products or services procured, the needs of the recipients, and the capabilities of vendors. It is not an “executiononly” administrative role, but determines the sourcing strategy, and involves vendor management and demand forecasting. In addition to specialized knowhow, such a sourcing activity may use proprietary software tools to evaluate vendors and manage supply scheduling and inventory levels. The commercial objectives of a centralized sourcing function may include those outlined in 5.8.4 and 5.8.5.
Functionality and expertise are greater in a sourcing activity than in an activity that is limited to purchasing. As a result, purchasing and sourcing would generally be more valuable to the recipient enterprises than a purchasing only service, and would be expected to command higher compensation than that for purchasing alone. Therefore, in evaluating a particular controlled transaction involving procurement activities, it is useful to properly understand the scope of purchasing activities and the scope of any sourcing activities.
Although purchasing functions have been considered separately to sourcing functions to highlight differences that may affect levels of compensation, in practice activities may include aspects of both categories. For example, a purchasing function may include aspects of sourcing activities with the result that the activity is not simply “executiononly,” and would thus generally be more valuable to the recipient enterprises in such a case than an activity limited to purchasing.
It is important to determine through the accurate delineation of the actual transaction whether the goods or services procured by the centralized procurement company constitute core spend or noncore spend for the recipient associated enterprises. Noncore spend, sometimes referred to as indirect spend, covers goods and services that support the businesses of the recipient associated enterprises and are not themselves converted into a finished item or resold. Core spend, sometimes referred to as direct spend, involves items that are converted or resold in the course of the business of the recipient associated enterprises.
In the case of noncore spend, for example, stationery, office equipment, telephone services, vans, or media space, an important factor that needs to be tested in accurately delineating the actual transaction is that the goods or services are unlikely to be a key risk for the recipient or a significant contributor to business performance. The goods and services are likely to be available from a range of suppliers, and so the pricing is already competitive. Specifications are likely to be relatively standardized and options for changes or improvements may be limited. The function of the centralized procurement company in the case of noncore spend may be largely that of a coordinator and aggregator, with the main commercial benefits being the combining of purchasing power across the MNE and efficiencies in reducing administrative costs for the MNE.
However, in the case of spend on core, businesscritical items, for example, lithium for a lithiumion battery manufacturer, certain ingredients for a food manufacturer, or energy for a smelter, an important factor that needs to be tested in accurately delineating the actual transaction is that the goods or services may represent a significant contribution to business performance and be associated with significant risks. The items may have very limited sources, availability of supply may be unpredictable, prices may be volatile, and there may be particular specifications to be met or worked around. The function of the centralized procurement company in the case of core spend may require specialized expertise and may involve mitigation of critical business risks for the recipient associated enterprises.
These factors suggest that procurement of goods and services constituting business critical core spend for the recipient associated enterprises would generally be more valuable to the recipient enterprises than procurement of goods and services constituting noncore spend, and, subject to thorough determination of the actual functions performed, assets used or contributed, and risks assumed in a specific controlled transaction, would generally be expected to command higher compensation than that for procurement of indirect spend.
Arguments are sometimes made that a centralized procurement company should have a high level of compensation because of the risks it claims to assume. While it is the case that the assumption of increased risk would be expected to be compensated by an increase in the anticipated return, careful attention may need to be paid when examining risk assumption by the associated enterprise performing centralized procurement activities.
It may be asserted that a centralized procurement company assumes, for example, risk associated with holding inventory (which may involve the risk of changes in the value of inventory owing to market price changes or obsolescence, or the risk of additional costs because of overstocking), since it is the contracting party that buys the goods or services procured and is the contracting party that sells them to the recipient associated enterprises. The insertion of the centralized procurement company in the flow of goods or services is not likely to be a typical arrangement given the potential for additional crossborder movements and complexities of customs duties and additional transaction costs. In addition, vendors may require guarantees to be provided by the parent or associated enterprises in order to sell directly to a group procurement company that may present concerns about creditworthiness; in such a case, there may be additional intragroup transactions to be examined. Where inventory is determined to be owned by the centralized procurement company, evaluation of the risk is required. It will be relevant to determine whether the group procurement company takes “flash title” only under backtoback arrangements with the associated recipient enterprises, thus significantly reducing or eliminating its inventory risk. In practice the recipient associated enterprises may compensate the centralized procurement company for any additional costs, thus insulating the centralized procurement company from the impact of inventory risk.
It will also be relevant to consider whether the supply arrangements with the vendors are flexible so that purchase volumes can be reduced as demand falls, thus reducing or eliminating risk. Nevertheless, if the centralized procurement company could suffer additional costs as a result of the impact of inventory risk it contractually assumes, then control of risk under the guidance at 3.4.4.32 to 3.4.4.35 needs to be determined. If the centralized procurement company does not control the inventory risk it contractually assumes because, for example, it does not determine quantities purchased, stocking levels, production scheduling, or manufacturing volumes, then it is unlikely to be allocated the risk under that guidance for transfer pricing purposes.
A centralized procurement company may assume contractually a range of other risks. In such cases a similar analysis to that described above under the guidance at 3.4.4.32 to 3.4.4.45 is required. A procurement company could claim to assume price risk by undertaking to guarantee a certain range of prices for the recipient associated enterprises, or to assume volume risk by undertaking to supply a certain volume. However, such risks may be reduced or eliminated if the terms agreed with the vendors in practice pass price or volume risk back to the vendors. A claim that a centralized procurement company is exposed to the full impact of cyclical demand and price risks should be examined carefully, as attention should be paid to whether it has the expertise to evaluate the risk, makes decisions in relation to the risk, and has the financial capacity to bear the risk.
Although the MNE procurement company may not assume risks associated with the goods and services procured, it will be necessary to determine whether the group procurement company performs control functions relating to risks assumed by associated enterprises, since such risk control functions need to be taken into account in determining the appropriate amount and form of the compensation (see 3.4.4.45). In the case of the sourcing of core, businesscritical items, in particular, the accurate delineation of the actual transaction could show that availability of supply is a key risk for the MNE and that the group procurement company directly mitigates disruption risk through developing reliable sources of supply or exploring alternative specifications.
Thus, as a general matter, recipient associated enterprises would be prepared to pay more for a procurement service that reduces or eliminates their risks, but care needs to be taken to ascertain that risks have in fact been mitigated for the recipient associated enterprises, and that the group procurement company contributes to such mitigation by performing risk control functions.
A centralized procurement company may have its own risk associated with developing and maintaining proprietary tools, systems, knowhow, and investment in physical assets.
It has been assumed in the foregoing that the most typical form of intragroup procurement activities involves procurement from independent vendors on behalf of recipient associated enterprises. It is possible, however, that an MNE may use a group procurement company to purchase from other associated enterprises in the group. The potential for reducing transaction costs and increasing efficiency through coordination and aggregation could apply in such a case for the MNE similarly to the situation described in section 5.8.1. Instead of dealing with 10 independent suppliers, as illustrated in that paragraph, the group procurement company could deal with 10 associated enterprises, but the efficiency effect of consolidating the ordering process and reducing the number of purchase orders continues to apply.
However, a claim that a group procurement company performs more than an administrative role when acting as an intermediary in purchasing from associated enterprises might not be supported by the evidence. A claim that a group procurement company performs a sourcing role, involving the selection and management of vendors which are in fact associated enterprises, is likely to be difficult to substantiate in the case of an integrated MNE in which associated enterprises are aware of each other’s capabilities and are organized to fulfil a specific role in the MNE’s supply chain. That supply chain may benefit from other centralized management activities, but any payment for finding a vendor that is already found and is part of the design of the MNE’s supply chain would seem difficult to justify.
The general principles set out in this chapter relating to the pricing of intragroup services apply to pricing considerations for intragroup procurement services, including the application of the direct and indirect charging approaches (see 5.3.2). In general, where the centralized procurement activity provides services to multiple associated enterprises in the MNE, and the services to each associated enterprise can be separately analyzed and quantified, then a direct charge approach may be reliably applied. However, in many instances of centralized procurement activities that provide services to multiple associated enterprises, there may be no option but to use an indirect allocation of the fee to those associated enterprises. An appropriate allocation key may be based on respective values of goods or services procured for those associated enterprises. In applying an indirect allocation of the fee, care should be taken to ensure that all the associated enterprises receive the same kind of service. For example, it may be that the procurement activity provides a purchasing service for some associated enterprises but a purchasing and sourcing service for others; or it may be that the procurement activity relates to noncore spend for some associated enterprises but to core spend for others. In such instances, there may be different levels of fee required depending on the category of services. It is important that any indirect allocation of the fee takes these differences into account by, for instance, identifying the associated enterprises using the same category of services and allocating an indirect share of the fee relevant to that category of services only to those associated enterprises.
Given the range of activities that may be involved in procurement and sourcing activities, it is not surprising that a range of pricing structures is seen in arrangements with independent, outsourced procurement providers. These pricing structures range from a fee related to the provider’s input costs, which may be particularly appropriate where the decision to outsource is motivated by a desire to reduce headcount and transfer people and associated costs to the outsourced provider; fees which are set as a percentage of managed spend (similar to a commission), and which may encourage investment by the service provider; to fees which are designed to incentivize the outsourced procurement provider by sharing gains. In practice hybrid fee structures may be seen, combining a commission on managed spend with a gainshare element.
When determining the pricing for centralized procurement activities within an MNE, transfer pricing methods can broadly mirror such industry pricing structures. Pricing based on costs, plus an arm’s length markup under the CPM or TNMM, may be appropriate; or comparable commission rates under a CUP Method may be applied; or a form of benefits analysis may be constructed which requires the gains achieved as a result of the procurement activities to be measured and which then shares them between the centralized procurement company and the associated recipient enterprises.
As in any transfer pricing analysis, the appropriateness of the method depends crucially on the facts and circumstances of the controlled transaction and the reliability with which the method can be applied. These matters are discussed further below, but before doing so it is useful to remember that the application of one method rather than another method can yield significantly different results, especially if applied over a number of years.
The following facts are assumed, which shows the costs incurred in performing the activities (“own costs”) and the costs of the goods or services procured through those activities (“managed spend”):
Table 5.T.1
Example of a Centralized Procurement Activity
|
| Year 1 | Year 2 | Year 3 |
| Own costs (A) | $5m | $10m | $10m |
| Managed spend (B) | $200m | $800m | $1600m |
| Cost Plus approach | |||
| Illustrative fee based on CPM (A plus 10 per cent markup) |
$5.5m |
$11m |
$11m |
| Profit | $0.5m | $1m | $1m |
| Fee expressed as a percentage of B | 2.75% | 1.375% | 0.6875% |
| CUP approach |
|
|
|
| Illustrative fee based on CUP (B x 2 per cent commission) |
$4m |
$16m |
$32m |
| Profit | ($1m) | $6m | $22m |
| Fee expressed as a markup on A | N/A | 160% | 320% |
For the purposes of the example, it is assumed that a CPM determines a markup of 10 per cent and that a CUP determines a commission on managed spend of 2 per cent.
In this example, there may have been some overcapacity or some investment in technology by the centralized procurement company in its initial year that meant a CUP Method results in a loss. However, as managed spend ramps up, the gap between profits under the CPM and profits under a CUP Method widens considerably. One method determines a 10 per cent markup on costs, the other method results in a 320 per cent markup; one method determines a commission of 2 per cent, the other method results in a commission of less than 1 per cent. Expressed another way, the recipient associated enterprises in Year 3 pay $32m to the centralized procurement company under one method and $11m under the other method. A high standard of evidence and analysis is usually required, therefore, to demonstrate that the centralized procurement company contributes sufficiently to business outcomes to justify the payment of that additional $21m. Because the choice of method can lead to widely different outcomes, disputes between taxpayers and tax administrations about the pricing of centralized procurement services may focus on differences of view about the appropriate method.
A CPM or TNMM on the basis of costs is likely to be an appropriate method where the procurement activities are mainly purchasing rather than sourcing, and any sourcing activity is limited in scope or relates to noncore spend, largely executes instructions from the recipient associated enterprises, and does not assume risks or perform risk control functions relating to the goods or services procured. In such a case the value to the MNE is mainly efficient deployment of resources, and a costbased fee may appropriately measure that value. The arm’s length markup may reliably be based on comparable independent service providers. As for many intragroup services that need to be benchmarked against independent service providers, identical activities may be hard to identify. Nevertheless, it is expected that independent service providers can be identified that provide broadly similar administrative services that would provide a sufficiently reliable range of markups. These costbased methods should not necessarily be rejected even if the activities are more extensive and require greater resources, greater expertise, and perhaps investment in tools and software. In such a case, the cost base for the centralized procurement company is likely to be greater, and a markup on that greater base will generate a higher fee.
However, where the procurement activities involve significant sourcing activities, relate to core goods and services, include businesscritical decisions, and involve some risk assumption or performance of risk control functions, then the activities affect business outcomes and the value to the MNE may correlate to revenues or profits. The reliability of comparing the centralized procurement company to independent service providers under a CPM or a costbased TNMM may be reduced. Instead, the application of arm’s length commission rates under a CUP Method is likely to be appropriate.
In other situations, there may be differences between the uncontrolled and controlled procurement activities; for example, the items procured may relate to noncore spend rather than to core, business critical items; and the relationship between rates of commission and volumes may not be reliably ascertained. The reliability of the application of a CUP Method can be improved in these situations by bearing in mind the concept that at arm’s length recipient parties will only be prepared to pay a fee if they expect to receive benefits from the outsourced procurement services provider that are greater than the fee. In practice, therefore, the information about commission rates resulting from a CUP Method can be interpreted and tested for reasonableness by an approach which seeks to identify the benefits derived from the procurement activities, and to share them between the centralized procurement company and the recipient associated enterprises based on their respective contributions, including any risk control functions.
The identification of benefits should not be speculative or created for the transfer pricing analysis but should be rooted in commercial measures that the MNE uses to assess performance (see the illustrations in section 5.7.5). If benefits are not measured by the MNE independently of a transfer pricing analysis, then this may suggest that the benefits are not commercially important and the activity is not one that makes a significant contribution to business performance (and consequently may suggest that a costbased transfer pricing method is more appropriate). Care should be taken in such an analysis first to measure and deduct benefits arising from aggregation of volumes, which should be allocated to the associated enterprises contributing the buying power. The resulting share of benefits can corroborate commissionbased fees and narrow the range of fees potentially identified through a CUP analysis. Evidence of gainshare agreements between independent parties can be difficult to use if it is not possible to determine reliably how the parameters for measuring the gain have been set in uncontrolled arrangements, and how those parameters might be adapted to apply to the controlled arrangement.
The following is an example of how the results of a CUP Method can be interpreted, tested for reasonableness, and corroborated by an approach which shares benefits. Assume that a centralized procurement activity of Company A is responsible for sourcing and for managing the purchasing process for the core spend of a related manufacturing company, Company B. Company B purchases the goods directly from the suppliers sourced by Company A, and so any price discounts attributable to Company B’s volume accrue directly to Company B. Both companies are part of the ABC Group. The spend managed by Company A represents 80 per cent of Company B’s costs of goods. Company A incurs costs of 5 in performing its procurement activities. Company B sells its finished products to third parties; the products are technologically advanced, but the manufacturing process itself is not unique.
It is assumed that the comparability analysis has determined that Company A’s activities contribute significantly to the business performance of Company B and involve Company A using its knowhow to work closely with suppliers to improve specifications, monitor quality, evaluate alternative sources of supply, and ensure uninterrupted supply. Recently the ABC Group has made public commitments to recycle and reuse components, and Company A has led the initiative with suppliers to make the necessary changes and achieve the Group’s targets. The management of ABC Group monitors closely the performance of Company A through key performance indicators of Company B’s business and risks including inventory levels, production downtime through supply problems, product failures in quality checks, and recycling targets. Good performance by Company A can positively contribute to the revenues and costs, and therefore profits of Company B; poor performance risks adversely affect the profits of Company B.
It is further assumed that a CUP Method is appropriate. Potentially comparable commission rates in uncontrolled transactions are identified ranging between 1 per cent and 7 per cent of the managed spend. There are differences between the potential comparables and the activities of Company A, particularly because the comparables tend not to procure businesscritical items nor assume responsibility for delivering key initiatives in the way that Company A does, and it is not possible reliably to determine how volume may affect the commission rates.
Assume that Company B’s significant financials show the following:
Table 5.T.2
Application and Interpretation of the Comparable Uncontrolled Price (CUP) Method
| Sales to third parties |
|
| 1000 |
|
| Cost of Goods | (500) |
|
| Managed Spend by Company A is 400. Potential CUP range of 1 to 7 per cent equates to a procurement fee range of 4 to 28 |
| Other Costs | (300) |
|
|
|
| Total Costs |
| (800) |
|
|
| Profits before procurement fee |
|
| 200 |
|
|
|
| Application of corroborating benefits share approach as described in the following paragraphs. | ||
|
|
| (80) |
| Benchmarked return to manufacturing (10 per cent of total costs) |
|
|
|
| 120 | Residual profits attributable to Company B’s technology and Company A’s procurement activities |
|
|
| (5.25) |
| Routine procurement fee to Company A (own costs of 5 plus a markup of 5 per cent) |
| Residual Profits |
|
| 114.75 |
|
| Hypothetical technology royalty of 10 per cent |
|
| (100) | Company B has developed the technology embedded in the product. A relief from royalty valuation approach determines the hypothetical royalty payments that would be saved through owning the asset, as compared with licensing the asset from a third party. |
|
|
|
| 14.75 | Profits earned by Company B relating to procurement activities of Company A |
The profits before procurement fee of 200 are earned from Company B’s manufacturing activities, to which Company A contributes through its procurement activities. However, Company B’s manufacturing activities are enhanced by the investment that it has made in research and development resulting in the technological advances in the products. Company A has also made investments in intangibles, particularly in developing its knowhow and proprietary systems. Assume that returns to routine manufacturing can be benchmarked at total costs plus 10 per cent. Applying that markup to total costs of Company B of 800 would give a profit of 80, leaving a residual of 120. Assume also that returns to routine procurement services can be benchmarked at cost plus 5 per cent, determining a routine fee to Company A on its costs of 5 of 5.25. The residual profit of 114.75 is attributable to a combination of Company B’s technology and Company A’s additional contribution to the business performance of Company B.
At this point it may be possible to share the residual profit of 114.75 in proportion to the investment of the two companies in intangibles if it is determined that the categories of investment by Company A and Company B are sufficiently similar in potential value to make such a sharing reliable. As an alternative, assume that the value of Company B’s technology can reliably be estimated by determining the royalty payments that would be payable at arm’s length if Company B did not own the technology but instead had to license it from a third party. Assume the valuation results in a royalty of 10 per cent. The resulting profits of 14.75 are therefore profits earned by Company B which relate to the additional contribution to its business performance from the procurement activities of Company A.
It may be possible to evaluate how the resulting profits of 14.75 should be shared between Company A and Company B by considering the metrics ABC Group uses to monitor Company A’s performance. This would likely require converting to an impact on profits the stated performance measures relating to inventory levels, production downtime through supply problems, product failures in quality checks, and recycling targets. Conversion would likely require assumptions to be presented about baseline performance and placing a value in terms of profits on variations to the baseline. Such an analysis may be informative but may not be definitive.
Failing the above analysis, reasonable estimates need to be made in order to appropriately share the resulting residual profits of 14.75 between Company A and Company B. The analysis would immediately suggest that paying 28 to Company A (a commission of 7 per cent at the top of the CUP range on managed spend of 400) would attribute more than the residual profit amount to procurement activities (Company A is already attributed a routine return of 5.25, and so an additional 22.75 to arrive at a total fee of 28 would allocate nearly twice the residual to Company A). Instead, the analysis suggests that a commission rate nearer the lower end of the CUP range is more appropriate. If all the residual of 14.75 were allocated to Company A, then the maximum commission would be 5 per cent (calculated as the residual of 14.75 together with the routine return of 5.25 resulting in a procurement fee of 20, which is 5 per cent of managed spend of 400). Paying 8 to Company A (representing a commission of 2 per cent on the managed spend of 400) is towards the lower end of the CUP range, but would seem to represent a more reasonable share of residual profits between the two companies given the fact that it is Company B that assumes the majority of risks. Under the benefits share Company A has already been allocated 5.25 and the additional 2.75 represents approximately a 20/80 split of the residual profits of 14.75 in favour of Company B.
It should be noted that a fee of 8 in this example represents a markup of 60 per cent on Company A’s own costs of 5. Such a markup is significantly in excess of, for example, the rate of return for Company B’s manufacturing activities. Such a relatively high markup does not undermine the outcome of this example. The example is intended to be an illustration of the guidance in section 5.14.2.4 which states that “where the procurement activities involve significant sourcing activities, relate to core goods and services, include businesscritical decisions, and involve some risk assumption or performance of risk control functions, then the activities affect business outcomes and the value to the MNE group may correlate to revenues or profits.”
The reliability of comparing the centralized procurement company to independent service providers under a CPM or a costbased TNMM may be reduced. Instead, the application of arm’s length commission rates under a CUP Method is likely to be appropriate. The example shows how, in circumstances where a CUP Method is likely to be more reliable than a costbased method, the potentially wide ranges of commission rates under a CUP Method can be narrowed, tested for reasonableness, and corroborated through the application of an approach which shares benefits.
In summary, replication of pricing structures used by independent outsourced procurement services providers is rarely an option that can be adopted in practice because of the difficulties in finding such data, in interpreting it reliably in the context of the controlled arrangement, and in estimating appropriate adjustments. The CPM or TNMM can be applied in most cases, even in cases where the centralized procurement company provides expert services and employs knowhow and proprietary tools.
Where the activities contribute significantly to the commercial performance of the MNE and involve control of economically significant risks for the MNE, other methods may be appropriate. Commission rates in thirdparty arrangements may be available, with the result that a CUP Method can reliably be applied. Indicative commission rates under a CUP Method may be corroborated by an approach which shares accurately measured commercial benefits between the group procurement company and its associated enterprises. Reasonable estimates can be made under a benefit share approach to interpret and test the appropriate positioning in the range of commission rates indicated under the CUP Method.
This section sets out guiding principles when one method might be more appropriate than another in approximating the fee that the parties would have agreed had they been independent of each other. An understanding of the principles is necessary so that relevant distinctions of fact can be identified, and conclusions consistent with those distinctions reached. The application of those principles is important where there can be significantly different outcomes depending on the pricing method selected. The scope of significantly different outcomes is illustrated at 5.14.4; the example is a contrived one but the point is likely to be relevant for procurement activities when the amount of managed spend is so high relative to the cost of performing the activities that the gap in outcomes of the two approaches cannot reasonably be bridged through adopting, for example, high markups under one method and low commission rates under another method. However, in practice, it may not always be the case that there is a significant gap, and there is usually little point in being dogmatic about the appropriate method if convergence of outcomes of each method is possible. Nevertheless, the example at 5.14.4 is also a reminder that while convergence might reasonably be achieved in Year 1, this would represent shortterm pragmatism. The difference in outcomes does not remain static, and Year 2 and Year 3 indicate that a principled approach is required so that the relevant distinctions of fact can be made to determine which method is more appropriate in approximating the arm’s length fee, as outlined in this guidance.
| The following extended example is designed to illustrate application of the guidance in this section by demonstrating the role and expertise of the procurement service providers, the nature of the items procured and the associated commercial risks, the risks assumed or controlled by the group procurement companies, and the transfer pricing implications. Assumed facts of the exampleAn MNE group involved in the manufacture of food products has centralized procurement activities in two companies, Company A, based in Europe, and Company B, based in Africa. The operations of the two companies are different, as described below, and lead to different conclusions about the application of reliable pricing methods. Company A employs 50 staff and it operates to enhance standardization of products and services supplied to the group by independent vendors, and to provide better oversight and control of costs. Analysis shows that about 60 per cent of the spend it manages on behalf of the group involves noncore spend relating to procurement of packaging, logistics services, production machinery, information technology and communication equipment and services, and office equipment and supplies. In fulfilling its activities in relation to spend on noncore items it liaises with other group companies to understand their needs, sources and selects vendors, develops relationships with vendors, and negotiates terms. In practice packaging vendors regularly communicate directly with the group’s Head of Development and also with production personnel located in the group’s manufacturing plants to discuss innovations, cost reductions, and regulations. As a result, the role of Company A in relation to procurement of packaging is to place orders to already agreed specifications and with already selected and known vendors. The group recently experienced supply problems following a change in its supplier of logistics services following a tendering process organized by Company A. In accordance with the group’s management controls, the decision to approve the new supplier was taken by the parent company with reference to analysis provided by Company A. The remaining 40 per cent of the spend it manages on behalf of the group relates to core spend on food ingredients. However, for these items Company A acts as a coordinator and aggregator of orders, as notified by other group companies, and performs the administrative functions of order processing and accounts payable. Company A assumes no risk in relation to the goods and services it procures and does not control significant risks. The performance of Company A is measured by its management on the basis of its order processing costs. |
The following list of potential low valueadding intragroup services is based on Annex I of the European Commission’s, Guidelines.56 For further information on low valueadding services see section 5.5.2.
► Information technology services:
- Building, development and management of the information system;
- Study, development, installation and periodic/extraordinary maintenance of software;
- Study, development, installation and periodic/extraordinary maintenance of hardware;
- Supply and transmission of data; and
- Backup services.
► Human resource services:
- Legislative, contractual, administrative, social security and fiscal activities connected to the ordinary and extraordinary management of personnel;
- Selection and hiring of personnel;
- Assistance in defining career paths;
- Assistance in defining compensations and benefit schemes (including stock option plans);
- Definition of personnel evaluation processes;
- Training of personnel;
- Supply of staff for limited period; and
- Coordination of the sharing of personnel on a temporary or permanent basis; and management of redundancies.
► Marketing services:
- Study, development and coordination of the marketing activities;
- Study, development and coordination of the sale promotions;
- Study, development and coordination of the advertising campaigns;
- Market research;
- Development and management of Internet websites; and
- Publication of magazines handed out to clients of the subsidiary (even if concerning the whole group).
► Legal services:
- Assistance in the drafting and reviewing of contracts and agreements;
- Ongoing legal consultation;
- Drafting and commissioning legal and tax opinions;
- Assistance in the fulfilment of legislative obligations;
- Assistance in the judicial litigation;
- Centralized management of relationship with insurance companies and brokers;
- Tax advice;
- Transfer pricing studies; and
- Protection of intangible property.
► Accounting and administration services:
- Assistance in the preparation of the budget and operating plans; keeping of the mandatory books and accounts;
- Assistance in the preparation of periodical financial statements, annual and extraordinary balance sheets or statements of account (different from the consolidated financial statement);
- Assistance in compliance with fiscal obligations, such as filing tax returns, computing, and paying taxes etc.; data processing; and
- Audit of the account of the subsidiary; and management of the invoicing process.
► Technical services, for example:
- Assistance regarding plant, machinery, equipment, processes etc.;
- Planning and executing ordinary and extraordinary maintenance activities on premises and plant;
- Planning and executing ordinary and extraordinary restructuring activities on premises and plant;
- Transfer of technical knowhow;
- Providing guidelines for the products’ innovation;
- Production planning to minimize excess capacity and meet demand efficiently;
- Assistance in planning and implementing capital expenditure;
- Efficiency monitoring; and
- Engineering services.
► Quality control services:
- Providing quality policies and standards of the production and provision of services;
- Assistance in obtaining quality certifications; and
- Development and implementation of client satisfaction programmes.
► Other services:
- Strategy and business development services in case there is a connection with an existing (or to be established) subsidiary;
- Corporate security;
- Research and development;
- Real estate and facility management;
- Logistic services;
- Inventory management;
- Advice on transport and distribution strategy;
- Warehousing services;
- Purchasing services and sourcing raw materials;
- Cost reduction management; and
- Packaging services.
EC (2011). Guidelines on low value adding intra-group services. Brussels: EC. Available from https://ec.europa.eu/taxation_customs/system/files/2016-09/c_2011_16_en.pdf.
Intangibles affect nearly every aspect of economic activity in the twentyfirst century. Intangibles have become a major source of sustainable competitive advantage for many firms. The importance of intangibles in the economy has been growing for decades in a number of sectors. The information and communication technology (ICT) revolution has made some technologies cheaper and more powerful, enabling improvement of business processes and boosting innovation across virtually all sectors of the economy. This technological evolution has made intangibles increasingly important profit drivers in many individual businesses. It is therefore necessary to give careful consideration to intangibles when conducting a transfer pricing analysis.
Transfer pricing issues can arise in a number of different ways when MNEs develop, acquire, exploit or transfer intangibles. Various entities within an MNE may participate in the development of intangibles through functions like research, development and marketing, providing funding for acquisition and development of intangibles. When one member of the MNE performs functions which contribute to the development of or enhance the value of intangibles belonging to another MNE member, it should be compensated on an arm’s length basis for those functions.
Various entities in an MNE group may exploit intangibles in a wide range of business activities. The rights to the intangibles thus exploited may belong to the entity exploiting the intangible or may have been made available to it by other members of the MNE. When one entity in the group makes an intangible available to another member of the MNE by transfer, license or otherwise, the entity making the intangible available to another MNE member should be compensated on an arm’s length basis for making the intangible available.
The value of products or services sold or otherwise made available by one member of an MNE to another member of the MNE may be enhanced by intangibles owned or utilized by the entity providing the product or service. In this situation the party providing the product or service should be compensated for the value of the product or service on an arm’s length basis, including being compensated for the value attributable to the intangibles utilized in providing the product or service.
Transfer pricing issues relating to intangibles should be resolved using the fundamental transfer pricing principles contained in Chapters 2, 3 and 4 of this Manual. However intangibles may be unique, may be difficult to value and may be critical to the successful operation of the MNE’s business. Transfer pricing issues related to intangibles can therefore be very challenging for both tax administrations and taxpayers in developed and developing countries. This Chapter supplements the general principles contained in earlier Chapters to provide special practical guidance on transfer pricing matters related to intangibles.
In carrying out a transfer pricing analysis involving intangibles it is necessary to consider: (i) the identification of the specific intangibles involved, (ii) the ownership of intangibles within the MNE, (iii) the value of the identified intangibles, (iv) how the intangibles contribute to the creation of value by the MNE, and (v) the identity of the members of the MNE that contribute to intangible value and how they should be rewarded. This framework for analyzing transfer pricing issues related to intangibles is discussed in the following sections.
Article 9 of the UN Model Tax Convention is concerned with the conditions of transactions between associated enterprises, not with assigning labels to such transactions. The key consideration is whether a transaction conveys economic value from one associated enterprise to another, and whether that benefit derives from tangible property, intangibles, services or other activities. As is the case with other transfer pricing matters, the analysis of cases involving the use or transfer of intangibles should begin with a thorough identification of the commercial and financial relations entered into by the associated enterprises and the economically relevant characteristics attached to those relations. Such an approach is pursued in order to accurately delineate the actual transaction involving the use or transfer of intangibles. However, whether a particular item falls within the definition of intangibles or not will have little consequence for the analysis, since the principles in Chapters 2, 3 and 4 will apply in any event. The following definition is provided primarily to aid in discussion rather than to create a substantive difference between cases involving intangibles and those that do not.
Difficulties can arise in a transfer pricing analysis from definitions of the term “intangible” that are either too narrow or too broad. Where an overly narrow definition of the term “intangible” is applied, either taxpayers or governments may argue, incorrectly, that certain items fall outside the definition. The contention would be that such assets may therefore be transferred or used without separate compensation, even though such use or transfer would give rise to compensation in transactions between independent enterprises. If too broad a definition is applied, either taxpayers or governments may argue, again incorrectly, that the use or transfer of an item in transactions between associated enterprises should require compensation in circumstances where no such compensation would be provided in transactions between independent enterprises.
For the purposes of this Chapter the term “intangible” encompasses something which is neither a physical nor a financial asset, which is capable of being owned or controlled for commercial purposes, whose use or transfer would be compensated had it occurred between independent enterprises in comparable circumstances.57 Whether something is recognized as an intangible for legal or accounting purposes is an informative starting point but not determinative. It is not the case that all valuable intangibles are legally protected, registered or recognized for accounting purposes.
This definition is the same as the one in the G20/OECD Reports on BEPS Actions 8 to 10 released in October 2015, and now incorporated into the OECD Transfer Pricing Guidelines. See para. 6.6.
It is recognized that some countries use a different definition in their domestic law. However, irrespective of whether an item is characterized as an intangible under domestic law, the transfer pricing analysis will be based on the definition above. Of course, other elements may need to be taken into account if they would affect pricing between unrelated parties. See for example the items discussed in section 6.2.5 below.
Notwithstanding the above, labels, such as those described in section 6.2.2.3, are applied to certain intangibles in some countries; this treatment often applies to intangibles with legal status. While such categorization may be helpful in identifying intangibles as a starting point of the analysis, the approach contained in this Chapter for determining arm’s length prices in cases involving intangibles does not rely on any categorization. As a result, no attempt is made to delineate with precision various classes or categories of intangibles or to prescribe outcomes that turn on such categories. The categories of intangibles described below are ones often considered in transfer pricing analyses involving intangibles. They are illustrative and not intended to be comprehensive.
From a transfer pricing standpoint, it should be emphasized that generic references to the categorization as outlined below do not relieve either taxpayers or tax administrations from carrying out a thorough transfer pricing analysis. The analysis should identify intangibles as accurately as possible, taking into account the risks actually assumed and controlled, associated with the functions performed and assets employed. Similarly, the arm’s length principle applies in the same way, irrespective of the type of intangibles at stake.
A common distinction is made between legally registered and unregistered intangibles. One category of intangibles includes intellectual property such as patents and trademarks, which can be registered. Other types of intangibles, such as copyrights or legal rights (including licenses) covering the utilization of patents, literary works, databases, trade secrets or designs can be legally or contractually protected even if not registered. These types of intangibles can be expressly registered, contractually acknowledged or legally protected, depending on the applicable national laws and treaties.
As indicated above, it is not the case that all valuable intangibles are legally protected and/or registered. Knowhow and trade secrets are proprietary information or knowledge that assist or improve a commercial activity, but that an enterprise may— for a variety of business reasons— choose not to register. Such knowhow may nonetheless contribute substantially to the success of the enterprise and be of significance in some situations for transfer pricing purposes.
Notwithstanding the fact that the availability and extent of contractual forms of protection may affect the value of an asset such as an intangible (and the returns attributable to it), the existence of any such contractual protection is not a necessary condition for an item to be characterized as an intangible for transfer pricing purposes.
Conceptually, intangibles can cover a wide spectrum encompassing legally defined items such as patents and trademarks up to broader categories such as best practices, internal procedures, human capital, noncontractual relations to customers or suppliers and network effects. The latter categories of items are not necessarily legally defined but may, taking into account particular facts and circumstances, convey value that would be compensated between parties at arm’s length, and, as such, should be considered as a relevant economic characteristic in any comparability analysis involving the use or transfer of intangibles.
In considering transfer pricing matters certain intangibles may sometimes be referred to as either (i) trade intangibles or (ii) marketing intangibles.
Trade intangibles may be created through testing and research and development (R&D) activities. The developer may try to recover the expenditures on these activities and obtain a return thereon through manufacturing and selling products, service contracts, or licensing out.
Marketing intangibles may be created by marketing activities, can aid in the commercial exploitation of a product or service, and/or may have an important promotional value for the product concerned. Depending on the facts and circumstances of the case, marketing intangibles may include, e.g. trademarks, trade names, customer lists and customer relationships as well as proprietary market and customer data that is deployed in marketing activities and in selling goods or services to customers.
There can be a combination of central and local marketing activities carried out in MNEs. In some cases the local marketing team performs marketing activities which are comparable to the activities of comparable uncontrolled distributors. In other cases, the local marketing team carries out broader marketing activities than the ones of uncontrolled distributors, e.g. it may autonomously develop marketing campaigns or customize the commercial offering beyond the guidelines set centrally and, accordingly, the local marketing team may incur significantly greater expenses than comparable uncontrolled distributors. In the latter case, the local marketing team may succeed in developing a marketing intangible.
A separate concept is whether a particular intangible will be regarded as “unique and valuable”. For transfer pricing purposes, a “unique and valuable intangible” is an intangible which is not present in otherwise comparable uncontrolled transactions (unique); and leads to significant expected premium value in business operations (valuable).
When looking at local marketing activities undertaken by a distributor, it should be determined:
► Whether or not the marketing activities of Distributor X create a separate intangible distinct from the foreignowned brand, and
► Irrespective of the answer to the first question, whether or not the marketing activities of Distributor X that are in excess of those of comparable uncontrolled distributors should attract a return greater than those comparables. See section 6.2.4.2 above.
Depending on the facts and circumstances of the case, the broader marketing activities of the distributor may give rise to differing outcomes:
a) The activities may lead to the creation of a local marketing intangible but not attract a return greater than the return of otherwise comparable uncontrolled distributors, for instance if the resulting intangible is not unique, despite the expenses incurred being greater than those of comparable uncontrolled distributors;
b) The activities may lead to the creation of a local marketing intangible (distinct from the foreignowned brand) and attract a return greater than that of otherwise comparable uncontrolled distributors, for instance if the resulting intangible is unique
and valuable;
c) The activities may not lead to the creation of a local marketing intangible and not attract a return greater than the return of otherwise comparable uncontrolled distributors, for instance if the additional value created is captured by the distributor through anticipated increased sales volumes; or
d) The activities may not lead to the creation of a local marketing intangible but attract a return greater than the return of otherwise comparable uncontrolled distributors, for instance if the distributor’s marketing activities are a valuable contribution to the foreignowned brand.
Example 1: Distributor X distributes branded products. The relevant brand is owned by a foreign affiliated enterprise. Assume that Distributor X has an innovative marketing team whose activities go beyond the implementation of the guidelines set by the brand owner. Distributor X successfully develops customized campaigns for the local market in which Distributor X operates. As a consequence, Distributor X is very successful in its market and its marketing expenses are significantly greater than the marketing expenses of otherwise comparable uncontrolled distributors. Assume that the incremental marketing expenses are not reimbursed by the foreign brand owner. In this case, the determination will likely be either outcome (b) or (d) of the list at 6.2.4.5 above, i.e. Distributor X would attract a return greater than the return of otherwise comparable uncontrolled distributors.
Example 2: Distributor Y distributes branded products. The relevant brand is owned by a foreign affiliated enterprise. Assume that the foreign brand owner runs a comprehensive global marketing team and that Distributor Y solely implements locally the marketing campaigns which are designed by the foreign brand owner. Furthermore, the foreign brand owner reimburses Distributor Y for incremental marketing expenses (if any) incurred above the expenses of comparable uncontrolled distributors. In this case the determination will likely be either be outcome (a) or (c) of the list at section 6.2.4.5, i.e. Distributor Y would not attract a return greater than the return of otherwise comparable uncontrolled distributors.
Market Features
The specific characteristics of a given market may affect the arm’s length conditions of a transaction between associated enterprises in that specific market. In conducting a transfer pricing analysis taking into account the specific market features in which one or more of the associated enterprises is operating, one should distinguish between the local market characteristics, which are not intangibles, and other features— such as contractual rights granting exclusivity in marketing certain products or government licenses—which meet the definition of intangibles relevant for transfer pricing purposes. While some of the economic circumstances existing in a market (e.g. cost of labour) may give rise to location savings, others may trigger the need to focus on comparability issues not directly associated with location savings. See 3.4.5.15 to 3.4.5.17.
Goodwill
The manner in which an intangible comes into existence from an accounting standpoint is not relevant to the determination of whether the item is an intangible for transfer pricing purposes. In this respect, goodwill is often a significant issue in discussions of the transfer pricing aspects of intangibles in the course of a business restructuring relates.
Depending on the context, the terms “goodwill” and “ongoing concern value” can be used to refer to a number of different concepts:
► In some accounting and business valuation contexts, goodwill reflects the difference between the aggregate value of an operating business and the sum of the values of all separately identifiable tangible and intangible assets (see example in section 6.2.5.11 below);
► Alternatively, goodwill is sometimes described as a representation of the future economic benefits associated with business assets that are not individually identified and separately recognized;
► In still other contexts goodwill is referred to as the expectation of future trade from existing customers;
► The term ongoing concern value is sometimes referred to as the additional value that attaches to property by reason of its existence as an integral part of an ongoing business activity;
► It is also sometimes described as the value attributable to the ability of a trade or business (or a part of a trade or business) to continue functioning, or generating income without interruption, notwithstanding a change in ownership, aside from any intangibles; and
► It is also sometimes referred to as the value of the assembled assets of an operating business over and above the sum of the separate values of the individual assets.
It is generally recognized that goodwill and ongoing concern value cannot be segregated or transferred separately from other business assets.
It is generally recognized that goodwill and ongoing concern value cannot be segregated or transferred separately from other business assets.
It is not necessary for purposes of this Chapter to establish a precise definition of goodwill or ongoing concern value for transfer pricing purposes or to define when goodwill or ongoing concern value may or may not constitute an intangible. It is important to recognize, however, that an important and monetarily significant part of the compensation paid between independent enterprises when some or all of the assets of an operating business are transferred may represent compensation for something referred to by one or another of the alternative descriptions of goodwill or ongoing concern value.
When similar transactions occur between associated enterprises, such value should be taken into account in determining an arm’s length price for the transactions. The absence of a single precise definition of goodwill makes it essential for taxpayers and tax administrations to describe specifically relevant intangibles in connection with a transfer pricing analysis, and to consider whether independent enterprises would provide compensation for such intangibles in comparable circumstances.
When the reputational value, sometimes referred to as goodwill, is transferred to or shared with an associated enterprise in connection with a transfer or licence of a trademark or other intangible, that reputational value should be taken into account in determining appropriate compensation.
If features of a business such as a reputation for producing high quality products or providing high quality services allow that business to charge higher prices for goods or services than an entity lacking such reputation, and such features might be characterized as goodwill or ongoing concern under one or another definition of such terms, such features should be taken into account in establishing arm’s length prices for sales of goods or the provision of services between associated enterprises whether or not they are characterized as goodwill. In other words, all contributions of value should be compensated at arm’s length irrespective of how they are labelled.
Purchase Price Allocation
When a multinational enterprise acquires a company, group of companies or business it may prepare a Purchase Price Allocation for financial accounting purposes (commonly referred to as a “PPA”). Such PPA typically provides a financial valuation of identified underlying tangible and intangible assets. In the event where one or more of the intangibles are further transferred after the acquisition, for instance as part of a business restructuring, the question arises as to the extent to which the PPA will provide a useful basis for valuation of the further transferred intangible(s).
6.2.5.10 Goodwill under a PPA for financial accounting purposes is mechanically defined as the difference between the purchase price (typically of a company or a business) and the valuation of identified underlying tangible and intangible assets. While the PPA can be a useful starting point to identify intangibles and their value, it is worth noting that any misvaluation of any of the identified underlying tangible and intangible assets (due, for example, to unaccounted synergies, other unaccounted sources of value or measurement errors) mechanically affects goodwill valuation as illustrated below.
| Assume Company A is acquired by Company B for a price of 1,000. In its PPA for consolidated financial accounts’ purposes, Company B allocates to underlying tangible and intangible assets the purchase price it paid for Company A. In doing this, valuations are made for identified assets of Company A. Goodwill will be recognized for the residual value as follows: Tangible assets: 100 Sum of Patents 1, 2 and 3 (valued separately): 150 Trademark: 250 Unallocated “goodwill” 500 Total purchase price allocated: 1 000 Assume that in the post-acquisition context the patents will be exploited as a bundle in order to derive synergetic benefits. Assume that while the sum of the individual values of Patents 1, 2 and 3 is 150, their value, if sold as a bundle, would be 250, because of incremental value that can be derived from the interrelated use of the patents. In such a case, if the transaction analyzed is the sale of Patents 1, 2 and 3 as a bundle, part of the PPA measure of goodwill value should be allo-cated to the value of the bundle. The result would be the following: Tangible assets: 100 Patents 1, 2 and 3 (valued as a bundle): 250 Trademark: 250 Unallocated “goodwill” 400 Total purchase price allocated: 1 000 |
| Assume MineCo owns a government license to carry out oil drilling activity in Ruritania as well as another government license for the exploi-tation of the oil rig network existing within the country. The oil drilling license has a stand-alone market value of 70. and the oil rig license has a stand-alone market value of 30. MineCo does not own any other assets. ExtraCo, an independent competitor of MineCo, acquires 100 per cent of the equity interest in the latter company for a price of 150. In its PPA prepared in connection with the acquisition, ExtraCo attributes 70 to the license associated with the drilling activity, 30 to the oil rig license and the remaining amount of 50 to goodwill arising because of the existence of synergies created between the drilling and oil rig licenses taken together. As an immediate follow-up of the acquisition, MineCo transfers both the above licenses to Extra1, a subsidiary of ExtraCo. In carrying out a transfer pricing analysis related to determining the arm’s length consid-eration to be paid by Extra1 with respect to the transaction taking place with MineCo, the taxpayer values the combined transaction at 100, the sum of the market values of the two licenses considered separately. In this case, in calculating the arm’s length consideration the purported goodwill associated with the bundled transfer of licenses by MineCo should be taken into account, as a party at arm’s length would be willing to pay more than 100 for combined assets that have a value of 150. |
Group Synergies
Because of the existence of an MNE, the associated enterprises comprising such MNEs may benefit from interactions or synergies among MNE members which are not generally available to independent enterprises. Examples include streamlined management, elimination of costly duplication of effort, economies of scale, integrated systems, purchasing or borrowing power. This type of synergy does not constitute an intangible because it is not capable of being owned or controlled by an enterprise in accordance with the definition in 6.2.1.3. However, group synergies can have an effect on the determination of arm’s length prices and other conditions for controlled transactions. Section 2.5.5 provides guidance on the transfer pricing treatment of group synergies.
Another important aspect to be taken into account in a transfer pricing analysis can be the existence of a qualified and skilled workforce.
Generally, the existence of the workforce does not need to be remunerated separately for transfer pricing purposes. This is because the value provided by a workforce is typically reflected in the arm’s length consideration to be paid for the goods produced or the services performed by the workforce. By contrast, rights under contracts—which may include the use of a workforce in place — could constitute an intangible within the meaning of section 6.2.1.3.
Another situation concerns the transfer of an assembled workforce, e.g. in the context of a business restructuring. Such a transfer may be justified for a variety of reasons, such as the possibility for the transferee of not hiring and training a new workforce. On the other hand, the transfer of an assembled workforce may trigger some liabilities in the hands of the transferee in the event some contracts have to be terminated as part of the implementation of the business restructuring plan. In such a case, the most appropriate transfer pricing method to be selected as well as the calculation of any potential indemnity has to take such elements into account.
From a transfer pricing standpoint, it is important to distinguish between the transfer of an assembled workforce in the context of a business restructuring and the mere secondment of employees, which is common in any MNE. As a general rule, it is very rare that a transfer of individual employees between members of an MNE should be compensated beyond the mere reimbursement of the employment and other associated costs, or the remuneration required for the services carried out by the seconded employees.
The use or transfer of part or all of a workforce does not, in itself, constitute the transfer of intangibles. However, it can also be the case that the transfer of certain employees is accompanied by the transfer of intangibles such as knowhow from one associated enterprise to another.
| Assume that several employees of Company G have developed over the years a specific algorithm to accurately price derivative instruments. The algorithm is owned by Company G since it was developed by the indi-viduals in their capacity as employees of Company G. Assume that the employees are seconded by Company G to the associated Company M. The secondment of the personnel from Company G to Company M does not constitute a transfer of an intangible. Assume now that, as part of their secondment, the seconded employees, with the authorization of Company G, make the algorithm available to Company M to assist and use in its commercial operations. This may result in an intangible, i.e. the algorithm, being put at the disposal of Company M by Company G, for which arm’s length consideration may need to be paid by Company M to Company G. |
Applying the arm’s length principle to transactions involving the use or transfer of intangibles is not fundamentally different from applying it to transactions involving tangible assets or services. Indeed, the arm’s length principle requires in both instances the performance of a thorough comparability analysis, with a specific focus on the identification of the entities performing functions, employing or contributing assets (including funding), and assuming risks.
On the basis of the above, the guidance on the transfer pricing aspects of intangibles should be placed within the wider context of understanding the accurately delineated transaction including identifying, within the value chain, how associated enterprises make contributions in the form of functions performed, assets employed and risks assumed.
The framework for analyzing transactions involving the use or transfer of intangibles between associated enterprises requires undertaking the following steps:
Fact finding relating to the intangible:
► Identify the specific intangibles involved in the transaction between associated enterprises (see section 6.2 above);
► Identify the legal ownership of intangibles based on registrations, contracts and other relevant documents; (see section 6.3.2 below); and
► Identify specific contributions made with respect to DAEMPE (development or acquisition, enhancement, maintenance, protection and exploitation) of the intangibles involved (see sections 6.3.3 and 6.3.4 below).
Fact finding relating to a transaction involving the use or transfer of intangibles:
► Identify other contractual terms associated with the transactions (if any), including terms of payment and terms of use of the intangible being transferred or used; and
► Identify the associated enterprises performing functions, using assets and contractually assuming risks in the transactions involving intangibles. The guidance in Chapters 3 and 4 should be applied.
Assess consistency with the arm’s length principle of the remuneration of the transaction involving the use or transfer of intangibles between associated enterprises:
► Assess the consistency between the terms of the relevant contractual arrangements and the actual conduct of the parties: i.e. determine whether the conduct of the parties is aligned with the contractual assumption of the economically significant risks in relation to the intangible, including whether they actually control and have the financial capacity to assume the risks; See 3.4.3;
► Based on the above, delineate the actual transaction between the associated enterprises involving the use or transfer of intangibles; and
► Determine arm’s length prices for the abovementioned transactions consistent with each respective party’s contribution to the economic value generated from the intangible (unless in the exceptional circumstances described in Chapter 3, section 3.3.2.2 apply, such as, where the arrangements viewed in their totality are not commercially rational).
It is important to note that in the vast majority of cases involving an intragroup transfer of intangibles, an arm’s length result will be achieved by pricing the accurately delineated transaction.
However, in some exceptional circumstances, the tax authorities may potentially recharacterize the transaction according to its actual economic features. For a more detailed discussion on this issue, see section 3.3.2.
From a tax administration’s standpoint there are clearly risks in recharacterizing transactions in the context of intangibles. This solution indeed may create an increased risk of double taxation, with no realistic prospect of crossborder relief in the event countries do not agree on a common set of principles. This could make the costs of doing business in the country sufficiently high to discourage crossborder trade and investment, with negative effects on development. As already stated in other parts of this Manual, while it is for each country to determine its own tax system, the desire to avoid double taxation has been an important factor in the very broad acceptance of the arm’s length principle internationally.
Legal rights associated with an intangible provide a starting point for the analysis. These may be found in registrations, contracts or other communications between the parties, which may establish the legal owner of the intangible and describe the roles, responsibilities, and rights associated with parties to the transaction involving the intangible. Contractual payment terms (for example, licensing terms) may establish how receipts and expenses of the MNE are allocated, and the form and amount of payments. These contractual terms may indicate, for example, the party or parties entitled to unanticipated gains or losses from the exploitation of the intangible.
In the case of a licensed intangible there are two different intangibles, each having a different owner: the licensed intangible on the one hand, and the license rights held by the licensee on the other hand. The fact that an intangible is being licensed does not affect its legal ownership, but rather creates a separate right of use for the licensee.
The legal owner(s) will be considered to be the sole owner(s) of the intangible for transfer pricing purposes. If no legal owner is identified, then the member of the group that controls decisions concerning exploitation of the intangible and that has the practical capacity to restrict others will be considered the legal owner.
Legal ownership, by itself, does not confer any right ultimately to retain returns associated with intangibles, even though such returns may initially accrue to the legal owner according to the contractual terms. In other words, it is not the case that the legal owner of an intangible, purely by virtue of its ownership, is entitled to the returns associated with the intangible. In effect, it would not be consistent with the arm’s length principle for the fruits of intangibles to be stripped away from entities which have developed or significantly contributed to the development of those intangibles by a mere paper transaction assigning legal ownership elsewhere. Instead, all contributions must be appropriately remunerated rather than exclusively remunerating only the legal owner.
Several types of returns are associated with an intangible, including for example: an appropriate return to development functions, an appropriate return to funding activities, an appropriate return to exploitation functions and an appropriate return to the assumption of risk (this last return can be positive or negative, depending on whether and to what extent risks materialize).
For instance, assume that the legal owner of an intangible did not fund its acquisition (whether from a third party or from an associated enterprise) or development. Assume further that it does not assume any risk with respect to that intangible. In addition, assume that it does not perform any function other than the legal protection of the asset and in particular it does not perform any function in relation to the enhancement, maintenance, and direct or indirect exploitation of the intangible. In such a case the legal owner should not be entitled to share in any portion of the anticipated (ex ante) return associated with the development or acquisition, enhancement, maintenance or commercial exploitation of the intangible, beyond the appropriate remuneration for its legal protection function. This is illustrated by the example below.
RCo— R&D funding Assume RCo is a member of an MNE group engaged in R&D activities, manufacturing and distribution of hightech widgets. RCo funds its R&D activities. When RCo’s R&D activities result in patentable inventions, all the rights in the patents are assigned to an affiliated enterprise LCo for no remuneration, which de facto acts as the intellectual property (IP) company of the group. LCo then grants to RCo a licence for RCo to use the patents in manufacturing and distribution activities. LCo does not perform any function in relation to the enhancement and maintenance or exploitation of the patents. LCo only employs two lawyers to perform the patent administration work required to register the intangibles generated by the ongoing R&D functions performed by RCo.
In this example an accurate delineation of the transaction would show that RCo performs all the relevant valueadding activities associated with the intangible and assumes all the significant risks. In particular, depending on the facts and circumstances of the case, one possible solution could be that the transfer of the legal ownership of the patents to LCo, taken together with the simultaneous license arrangement with RCo, reflects, in its true underlying economic determination, a patent administration service arrangement between RCo and LCo. As a result, RCo should be entitled to the actual return associated with the commercial exploitation of the asset, minus an arm’s length remuneration for the legal protection functions performed by LCo.
DAEMPE stands for Development, Acquisition, Enhancement, Maintenance, Protection and Exploitation of intangibles.
While the analysis of intangibles generally follows the same analytical path as for other types of transactions there are a number of aspects of intangibles that typically warrant scrutiny within the factfinding phase. These relate to:
► The development of or, alternatively, the acquisition from third parties of intangibles (i.e. how the intangible came to be owned by the MNE group);
► The enhancement of intangibles;
► The maintenance of intangibles;
► The protection of intangibles; and
► The exploitation of intangibles (whether direct exploitation or indirect exploitation such as licensing out).
These areas for analysis are sometimes referred to as “DAEMPE” contributions. In order to evaluate transactions involving intangibles, it is important to understand all of these contributions, as some or all of them might reflect important contributions to value that must be appropriately remunerated. While DAEMPE activities might seem to be limited to functions, in fact they often reflect contributions of assets and the assumption of risks as well. For example, a pharmaceutical company might commit to undertaking R&D in order to develop a potential blockbuster drug. This “D” reflects, in addition to the development functions (R&D), a commitment to contribute assets to fund the development and the assumption of potentially significant risks.
It is appropriate to make a technical note on the terms “DAEMPE” and “DEMPE”. By referring to “DAEMPE” in the UN Manual there is no intention to diverge from the G20/OECD guidance contained in the Final Report on BEPS Actions 810, but rather to clarify that intangibles can be acquired by an MNE group either through development activities or by an acquisition from a third party. See for instance paragraph 6.49 of the OECD Transfer Pricing Guidelines.
As discussed in section 6.3.3.2, accurately delineating the transaction between associated enterprises involving the use or transfer of intangibles requires identifying which associated enterprises contribute to DAEMPE. Such a process evaluates which entities perform functions, contribute assets and assume risks in the transactions involving intangibles.
The identification of important DAEMPE contributions may have a significant impact on the selection of the most appropriate transfer pricing method. The relative importance of contributions with respect to DAEMPE will vary depending on the industry, the type of intangible, the stage in the life cycle of the intangible, and the multinational enterprise’s value chain in relation to that intangible. Important functions can be either directly performed or outsourced by the legal owner of the intangible.
For example, a fully developed and currently exploitable intangible purchased from a third party may require no development, maintenance or enhancement. In this case, key functions in relation to the acquisition of the intangible are those necessary to select the most appropriate intangible in the market, to analyze its anticipated benefits, take the decision to take on the riskbearing opportunity through purchasing the intangible and manage the actual conclusion of the acquisition. A key asset would be the funding required to purchase the intangible.
For selfdeveloped intangibles important functions in relation to the development of the intangible are those necessary to select the most appropriate research and development project, to analyze its anticipated benefits, and take the decision to take on the riskbearing opportunity through funding the development activities and the performance of the R&D function. A key asset would be the funding required to develop the intangible.
In respect of both acquired and internally developed intangibles, the type of return warranted by the provision of funding will depend on the extent of the functions performed and risk assumed by the funding entity. See sections 6.3.5 and following for more details.
In some cases an acquired intangible may require some further development before it becomes fully exploitable. In such cases, a combination of contributions related to the acquisition and the development of the intangible will be needed.
| Assume that MMD Co. is a company engaged in the sports apparel industry in Country Y. It owns a trademark “MMD” for which it designs and funds global marketing campaigns. The trademark MMD is well known in the market and attracts a premium return compared to its competitors. MMD Co. performs R&D activities and designs and manufactures athletic footwear under the trademark “MMD”. The footwear manufactured by MMD Co. is sold in various markets through a network of thirdparty retailers. MMD Co. has an affiliated invoicing entity, SCo. Assume that SCo does not make any contribution to DAEMPE in relation to the MMD brand and to the shoe design. SCo solely performs invoicing activities. On the basis of the fact pattern described above a correct transfer pricing analysis should imply that SCo has no claim in relation to the return derived from the exploitation of the intangibles associated with the trademark “MMD”, beyond an appropriate remuneration for its invoicing activities. |
A comparability (including functional) analysis would be incomplete unless the economically significant risks assumed by each party to the controlled transaction have been identified to delineate the actual transaction involving the use or transfer of intangibles.
The guidance in Chapter 3, in particular the discussion of risk control and mitigation and of financial capacity to assume risk, applies to the analysis of intangibles. Risks that may be especially relevant relating to transactions involving intangibles include:
► Risks related to the development of the intangible: in order to decide whether or not to take on this risk, an evaluation needs to be performed of whether the intangible potentially relates to commercially viable products, what are the expected costs of the
required development, and the possibility that such development will be unsuccessful;
► Risks related to technology obsolescence and loss of intangible value: in order to decide whether or not to take on this risk, an evaluation needs to be performed of the likelihood that competitors will introduce products or services that would materially erode the market for products dependent on the intangibles being analyzed;
► Risks related to the infringement of intangible rights: in order to decide whether or not to take on this risk an evaluation needs to be performed of the likelihood that third parties may successfully infringe the rights related to the intangible being developed, and the likelihood that third parties may successfully claim that products or services based on intangibles infringe their own intangible rights, including also an evaluation of the costs from defending from such claims;
► Risks associated with product liability which may arise from the use of the intangible; and
► Risks associated with the effective exploitation of the intangible, including uncertainties with respect to the returns to be generated by the intangible.
These risks are often connected to specific DAEMPE activities. The accurate delineation of the controlled transaction may determine that the legal owner assumes risks, or that, instead, other members of the group are assuming risks.
Risk control and mitigation may be performed by various entities within the group. For example, assume that risk associated with contract R&D activities performed by Company A for the benefit of Company B are properly assumed by Company B, which has the capability to determine the various stage processes together with the performance of the active decisionmaking function. The way the risk associated with the research and development activity assumed by Company B is mitigated may be subject to general policysetting elsewhere in the MNE group by Company C, which sets overall levels of financing tied up in the overall R&D project across markets to meet strategic objectives. This wider policysetting activity cannot be deemed to imply that the R&D risk is allocated to Company C. Instead, Company B assumes this risk.
Consistent with the guidance in Chapter 3, if it is established that an associated enterprise contractually assuming the risk both controls, and has the financial capacity to assume, the risk associated with the DAEMPE, then the contractual allocation of risk is respected. If, on the other hand, it is established that an associated enterprise contractually assuming the risk does not control or does not have the financial capacity to assume the risk associated with the DAEMPE, then the risk should be allocated to the enterprise exercising control and having the financial capacity to assume the risk.
In this latter case, should multiple associated enterprises be identified that both exercise control and have the financial capacity to assume the risk, then the risk should be allocated to the associated enterprise or group of associated enterprises exercising most control. Other parties performing control activities should be remunerated based on their contributions to the creation of intangible value. Such compensation would depend on the arrangements between the enterprises and the importance of the control activities performed: it may be appropriate for such a party to share in the potential upside and downside consequences resulting from the outcome of the underlying risk. Alternatively, the contribution might be compensated in a manner that is not contingent on the underlying risk.
According to the arm’s length principle, associated enterprises contributing assets to the development or acquisition, enhancement, maintenance, protection and exploitation of an intangible should receive appropriate compensation for doing so. Such assets may include, without limitation, intangibles generally utilized in research, development or marketing activities— such as knowhow, customer relationships and physical assets, as well as funding.
Funding and risk taking are integrally related in the sense that funding often coincides with the taking of certain risks. For example, a decision to fund R&D in exchange for rights in the potential benefits of that R&D involves the risk that the R&D will be unsuccessful and the funding will be lost. In addition, the larger the amount of the funds provided, the larger the potential impact of the risk on the provider of the funding.
It is important to distinguish between the financial risk that is linked to the funding provided (such as, for example, the risk associated with the commitment of capital used to “invest” in a risky intangible development opportunity) and the operational risks associated with the funded activity (such as, for example, the risk associated with the successful performance of the R&D function). Control over a financial risk requires the capability to make the relevant decisions related to the risk bearing opportunity. These include decisions related to taking on, laying off, or declining a risk bearing investment opportunity and the decisions on whether and how to respond to the risks associated with the investment opportunity.
It is important to distinguish between ex ante returns and ex post returns. Ex ante returns are anticipated or expected returns at the time a transaction is undertaken. Ex post returns refer to actual returns. There are two aspects, both of which are particularly applicable to intangibles, which are relevant to the difference between ex ante returns and ex post returns: time and risk, as discussed below.
Time: there is often a significant time lapse between the point in time when a transaction relating to an intangible takes place and the point in time when the actual realization of income from the exploitation of that intangible occurs. For example, a pharmaceutical company may decide in year zero to commit significant resources to undertake R&D that it anticipates will result in a marketable product in year 10. Intimately related to this temporal aspect is risk, for example if the R&D is not successful, then the company might suffer significant losses.
Risk: the difference between anticipated (ex ante) and actual (ex post) returns can arise from the materialization of a variety of risks such as risk of failure of the R&D, market risk and others. There can be a difference between what was anticipated and what actually occurred. Who should bear the consequences of risk materializing and of the difference, if any, between ex ante returns and ex post returns depends on the extent to which the relevant risk is assumed by the parties. The accurately delineated transaction (for example, the contractual terms, assuming they have substance) will determine which entity or entities assume such risks.
The notion that all contributions to value must be appropriately remunerated, as discussed above, is an ex ante concept. An example follows on Contract R&D.
| The contractual relationship between P and AE is a contract R&D services agreement whereby P will remunerate AE for its activities at cost + x%, whether the R&D is successful or not. P assumes the risk of failure of the R&D process. Assume that the actual delineation of the transaction is consistent with the contractual terms. At the time of the decision to start the R&D activity the anticipated (ex ante) return is 100, consisting of 60 for AE’s R&D activity, including future maintenance of the developed intangible (through the cost plus service arrangement) and 40 to reward P for the performance of its DAEMPE functions and assumption of risks, taking into account the passage of time. Three years later the actual ex post return is in fact 120, due to the materialization of an unforeseen market opportunity. The difference between ex ante and ex post return is 20, attributable to the party that assumed the market risk, in this case P. Thus, out of the ex post return of 120, 60 will be for the contract R&D activity (through the cost plus service arrangement) and 60 for the performance of DAEMPE functions by P. Alternatively, if the ex post return is in fact 50, the difference between ex ante and ex post return is a negative amount of (50), due to the materialization of a market risk which was assumed by P. Thus, out of the ex post return of 50, the contract R&D activity should still receive 60 (through the cost plus service arrangement) and P will bear a loss of (10). In both cases, AE’s R&D activity is appropriately remunerated, and its remuneration is the same on an ex ante and an ex post basis. This is because it does not bear the consequences (whether positive or negative) of the market risk which it did not assume. |
Assume an entity provides funding and has the ability to control its financial investment risk:
► On an ex ante basis: this entity is entitled to an appropriate riskadjusted anticipated rate of return on its investment.
► On an ex post basis: the actual return to that entity will depend on the terms of the accurately delineated transaction:
► One possibility is that the funder receives a share of the difference between ex ante and ex post returns from the investment. In this way, this type of investment is equivalent to an equity investment.
► Another alternative is that the funder receives a predetermined return (which does not depend on the ex post results from the investment). In this way, this type of investment is equivalent to a debt investment. In practice it may be a fixed rate, or a variable rate which depends on the cost of money but not on the success of the development.
Depending on the terms of the accurately delineated transaction, either type of investment could be consistent with the arm’s length principle.
On the other hand an entity that provides funding but does not have the ability to control the financial investment risk, i.e. acting as a socalled “cash box” entity, will receive no more than a low riskfree rate of anticipated return. Consistent with the riskfree nature of this low return, the ex post return will be equal to its ex ante return.
| Assume that TechCo and High-Yield Co. are members of an MNE and decide to undertake jointly the development of an intangible, which is anticipated to be highly profitable based on TechCo’s track record and experienced research and development staff. TechCo will perform, through its own personnel, all the functions expected to be carried out by an entity eager to acquire an independent right to exploit the resulting intangible, including the functions required to exercise control over the risk it has contractually assumed. Assume that the intangible develop-ment is expected to take seven years before eventually being successful for commercial exploitation purposes. Under the contractual arrangement High-Yield Co. will contribute all the funding associated with the development of the intangible, which is anticipated to be an amount of 100 million per year for seven years. TechCo makes all the other contributions to the remaining DAEMPE related to the intangible, whereas High-Yield Co. will control the risk associated with the funding activities amounting to an overall amount of 700 million. Once the intangible is developed, High-Yield Co. will legally own the intangible, which will be licensed to unrelated parties. |
The factfinding described in section 6.3.1 above is typically performed through a review of written documents, supplemented with interviews with relevant personnel. It is suggested that the following noncompulsory steps are carried out:
► Step 1: Request written information: the key objective of this step is to collect as detailed information as possible as to the transfer pricing policy set at the group level, if existing, as well as to collect documents related to key projects;
► Step 2: Review and analyze the documents and information collected;
► Step 3: Conduct interviews with relevant personnel. Typical questions refer to “Who does what in relation to the local entity’s transactions”, “Who sets project milestones” or “How is bonus compensation of local personnel attributed”; and
► Step 4: Analyze information gathered under Steps 1 to 3 to determine whether any inconsistency exists between the contractual risk allocation and the actual conduct of the parties which may potentially impair the accurate delineation of the underlying economic transaction.
The general guidance in Chapter 3 on comparability applies to transactions involving the use or transfer of intangibles. With respect to the comparability analysis intangibles often have unique characteristics. In conducting a comparability analysis, it is therefore important to take these characteristics into account. The following features may be particularly important depending on the case at hand:
► The exclusivity (or nonexclusivity) of the rights to the intangible;
► The geographic territory in which those rights may be exploited;
► The extent and duration of legal protection of the intangible and/ or of the rights granted on the intangible;
► The stage of development of the intangible at the time of the transaction;
► Any rights to (future) enhancement of the intangible;
► The options realistically available to each of the parties to the transaction, taking into account the expected future economic benefits arising from it; and
► Potential other comparability factors such as local market features, location savings, assembled workforce and MNE group synergies.
The principles set out in Chapter 4 apply to select the most appropriate method in the circumstances of the case where the transaction involves a controlled transfer of one or a series of intangibles.
In addition, the selection of the most appropriate method in relation to an intangible transaction will depend on the type of transaction involved. For example:
► In transactions involving sales of intangibles, a CUP for the value of the transferred intangible (including the acquisition price method which is a specific application of the CUP Method) or a Discounted Cash Flow approach may be appropriate. See section 6.5.4 below;
► In transactions involving rights to use intangibles, a CUP for the value of the rights to use the intangibles (e.g. value of the licence) may be appropriate. A onesided transfer pricing method (CPM, RPM or TNMM) can be the most appropriate method if a twosided functional analysis reveals that one party to the transaction makes all the unique and valuable contributions involved in the controlled transaction, while the other party does not make any unique contribution. In such a case the tested party should be the less complex one; and
► In transactions involving the development of intangibles (e.g. through low risk contract R&D), a cost based approach (whether cost plus or cost based TNMM) may be appropriate. Specific considerations apply, however, to arrangements where the risk of development is shared (including cost sharing or cost contribution arrangements).
A PSM may be the most appropriate method if each party to a transaction makes unique and valuable contributions, the parties are highly integrated, or they share significant risks.
Supplemental Guidance for applying methods for intangibles are set out below.
With regard to the application of the CUP Method, sometimes the intangibles transferred between associated enterprises were part of a recent acquisition by the MNE group from a third party. For instance, an MNE group acquires a company which owns intangibles. Further to the acquisition, a decision is made to transfer the intangibles owned by the acquired company to another entity that is a member of the MNE group, in order to integrate them with other group intangibles. In such a situation, the consideration, i.e. the price paid for the acquisition of the company from third parties, may represent a useful starting point for determining the arm’s length price for the controlled transaction consisting of the transfer of intangibles from the acquired company to another group member under the CUP Method. This type of CUP Method is sometimes referred to as an acquisition price method.
For instance, assume PenCo acquires for a price of 100 a 100% equity participation in independent enterprise “Z”. Z has a large R&D department developing cuttingedge technology devices but has recorded minimal sales so far. The price of 100 paid by PenCo reflects the value of the technologies developed by Z as well as the capabilities of the latter’s personnel to develop further new technologies in the future. Assume that there are no other sources of value contributing to this price of 100 and that the value of’ Z’s tangible assets is negligible.
Immediately following the acquisition, Z transfers all its rights in the developed and partially developed technologies, including patents, trade secrets and technical knowhow, to “Y”, a subsidiary of PenCo. Y enters simultaneously into a contract R&D agreement with Z, whereby Z’s workforce will continue to work solely on the development of the transferred technologies and on the development of new technologies on behalf of Company Y. The agreement provides that Company Z will be remunerated for its R&D services on a cost plus basis, and that all the rights to intangibles developed or enhanced under the R&D agreement will belong to Company Y. Company Y will fund all future research activities and will assume the financial risk that some or all the future research will not lead to the development of successful commercial products.
As regards the transfer pricing consequences of such a restructuring, with a specific focus on the arm’s length price to be paid by Company Y for the intangibles transferred by Company Z, as well as for the price to be paid for the ongoing R&D services to be provided by Company Z, it is important to identify with specificity the intangibles transferred to Company Y and those retained by Company Z. The valuation done for purchase price allocation purposes, although important for starting the analysis, is not determinative for transfer pricing purposes.
In particular, given the above assumption that the price of 100 paid by PenCo represents the value of the technologies developed by Z, as well as the capabilities of the latter’s personnel to develop further new technologies in the future, such price should be reflected in the sum of:
► The value of intangible assets transferred to Y; and
► The value of the intangible assets and workforce retained by Company Z.
Under the arm’s length principle and depending on the facts and circumstances, the CUP Method may be used to determine the remuneration of Company Z paid by Company Y for:
► The transferred intangibles; and
► The present value of the remuneration paid for the R&D services rendered by Company Z.
The use of transfer pricing methods seeking to estimate the value of intangibles based on their cost of development is generally discouraged, as the cost of developing intangibles is seldom a reflection of their value once developed. Accordingly, the use of transfer pricing methods based on their cost of development should generally be avoided. With that being said, where the acquirer has the available option to produce the intangible itself or to have it produced for its own purposes, instead of acquiring it, an intangible valuation based on the estimated cost of reproducing or replacing the intangible (including the value of the time needed to redevelop the intangible rather than acquiring it) may be used.
General
Where reliable comparable uncontrolled transactions cannot be identified, it may be possible, under certain circumstances, to use valuation techniques to help determine the arm’s length price for intangibles transferred between associated enterprises. In particular, the application of valuation techniques based on the calculation of the discounted value of projected future income streams or discounted cash flows (DCF), derived from the exploitation of the intangible being valued, may be useful. Depending on the facts and circumstances, valuation techniques may be used by taxpayers and tax administrations as a part of one of the methods described in Chapter 4 or as a tool that can be usefully applied in identifying an arm’s length price. It should be noted that the discussion of DCF Methods in this section is necessarily basic in nature, as a fuller exposition of the theory and practical application of DCFs is outside the scope of this Manual. Corporate finance textbooks provide a fairly solid grounding in this area.
Some transfers of intangibles involve risks associated with the uncertainty of future results. For example, an intangible transfer could involve an early stage patent requiring further development, or a fully developed intangible whose future profit potential is very uncertain. These types of intangible transactions by their very nature typically do not have comparable uncontrolled transactions to directly inform the arm’s length pricing of the transactions, and so a less direct method may be required. Under the DCF approach the value of an intangible is based on the present value of the anticipated future income or free cash flows attributable to the intangible property. In order to calculate the present value of the future income or cash flows the financial projections and the appropriate discounting rate must be determined.
Circumstances in which a DCF Approach Might be Appropriate
Because a DCF is forward looking (as it is based on projected future income), it is most typically undertaken on an ex ante basis (see 6.5.4.17 for a discussion of ex ante versus ex post analyses). That is, a DCF calculation is typically undertaken at the time of the initial intangible transfer, and prior to the actual realization of income associated with the intangible. Many audits are undertaken many years after the initial transfer, however it is difficult to reliably apply a DCF method on an ex post basis. Accordingly, as a starting point it is important to determine if the taxpayer has undertaken at the time of, or prior to, the intangible transfer, an analysis of the anticipated profitability of the intangible (i.e. financial projections), and an analysis of the anticipated risks involved. While this type of analysis is not undertaken for all intangibles, it is more likely that such an analysis may have been undertaken where the intangible is relatively important (i.e. potentially valuable) to the multinational and/or is susceptible to reasonably direct financial tracking. For example, multinationals often evaluate potential projects to develop specific intangibles, such as pharmaceutical products from a particular molecular compound, or “next generation” software. Financial projections are sometimes used— often for nontax reasons— in order to gauge the anticipated profitability of a project to determine its viability. These evaluations could be undertaken at any stage, or in several stages, of development. This information could be helpful in determining the arm’s length value of the intangible at the time of the transfer, and accordingly, be useful in determining the arm’s length price for the transaction.
A DCF analysis may be undertaken by taxpayers or tax administrations at a time subsequent to the intangible transfer in order to inform the analysis of the value of the intangible at the time of the transfer, but the reliability of this approach may be reduced. This is because, to the extent that the analysis is undertaken after risks have played out, it is difficult to assess the perception of those risks at an earlier time, such as the time of the transfer. See further section 6.5.4.17 below.
Financial projections: Financial projections58 should reflect the best estimate of the items projected, which may include sales, development costs, cost of sales and operating expenses. Given that there is typically uncertainty in possible outcomes, the financial projections may be based on a probabilityweighted average of possible outcomes, as illustrated in the example in section 6.5.4.7.
DCF methods are typically based on projections of cash flows. Accrual based measures of income may not properly reflect the timing of cash flows, which can create a difference in outcome between an income and cash-flow based approach.
However, the use of income projections rather than cash-flow projections may, in some cases, yield a more reliable result in a transfer pricing context as a practical matter. Care must be taken, however, to ensure that either income or cash flow measures are applied in a consistent manner and in appropriate circumstances. Ref-erences to cash flow in this document should therefore be read broadly to include both cash flow and income measures, appropriately applied.
The length of the period for which income or cash flow is to be determined depends on the useful life of the intangible. For instance, if the discounting period is ten years, then the income or cash flow projections should also be determined for a tenyear period. The useful life of an intangible is the entire period during which the exploitation of the intangible is anticipated to occur. Exploitation of intangibles includes any direct or indirect use or transfer of the intangible, including use without further development, use in the further development of the intangible (and any exploitation of the further developed intangible), and use in the development of other intangibles (and any exploitation of the other intangibles when they are developed).
Assume that a project is undertaken in order to develop a genetically modified grass for livestock grazing. The project will involve R&D undertaken for two years. If the R&D is successful, then the intangible will be exploited in years three through five, after which the intangible is anticipated to be worth nothing due to anticipated competitive pressures. While the future R&D expense is fairly certain, the outcome of the R&D is less certain, so the financial projections for sales are uncertain. Accordingly, the taxpayer prepares three sets of sales projections associated with an optimistic outcome, an expected outcome, and a pessimistic outcome. The taxpayer estimates that the expected outcome is most likely to occur, and that both the optimistic scenario and the pessimistic scenario are less likely. Accordingly, based on its technical and business judgment, the taxpayer assigns a 50 per cent probability of sales achieving the expected outcome, a 25 per cent probability of sales achieving the optimistic outcome, and a 25 per cent probability of sales achieving the pessimistic outcome. Assume further that production costs are estimated to be equal to 40 per cent of sales and operating expenses are estimated to be equal to 20 per cent of sales. The taxpayer determines the most reliable financial projections by performing a probabilityweighted calculation as follows:
Table 6.T.1
Expected Scenario: 50% probability of of occurring
| Year | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 |
| Sales |
|
| 250 | 250 | 250 |
| R&D | 100 | 100 |
|
|
|
| COGS |
|
| 100 | 100 | 100 |
| Operating expenses (SGA) |
|
| 50 | 50 | 50 |
| Operating income | (100) | (100) | 100 | 100 | 100 |
Table 6.T.2
Optimistic Scenario: 25% probability of occurring
| Year | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 |
| Sales |
|
| 750 | 750 | 750 |
| R&D | 100 | 100 |
|
|
|
| COGS |
|
| 300 | 300 | 300 |
| Operating expenses (SGA) |
|
| 150 | 150 | 150 |
| Operating income | (100) | (100) | 300 | 300 | 300 |
Table 6.T.3
Pessimistic Scenario: 25% probability of occurring
| Year | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 |
| Sales |
|
| 0 | 0 | 0 |
| R&D | 100 | 100 |
|
|
|
| COGS |
|
| 0 | 0 | 0 |
| Operating expenses (SGA) |
|
| 0 | 0 | 0 |
| Operating income | (100) | (100) | 0 | 0 | 0 |
Table 6.T.4
Probability-weighted Financial Projections
([Table 1 times 50%] PLUS [Table 2 times 25%] PLUS [Table 3 times 25%])
| Year | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 |
| Sales |
|
| 312 | 312 | 312 |
| R&D | 100 | 100 |
|
|
|
| COGS |
|
| 125 | 125 | 125 |
| Operating expenses (SGA) |
|
| 62 | 62 | 62 |
| Operating income | (100) | (100) | 125 | 125 | 125 |
A discount rate is used to convert the projected future year results to an equivalent present value. The discount rate is intended to compensate for the time and risk associated with the projected income or cash flows. A discount rate should be used that most reliably reflects the marketcorrelated risks of the projected income or cash flows, providing a measure of the appropriate anticipated return to the risk undertaken. For example, if a particular income or cash flow is projected to occur with complete certainty, the discount rate should only take into account the time required to receive such income or cash flows. In this case, a riskfree rate might provide the most reliable discount rate e.g. longterm government bond rates for the time value of money invested. On the other hand, if the projected income or cash flows are highly uncertain due to risk, those risks should be taken into account when determining the applicable discount rate. In such situations, the discounting rate might be calculated based on a higher rate than the riskfree rate, to adjust for risk premium.
Technical Note: “Ex ante” Versus “Ex post” Financial Projections
| “Ex post” financial projections are, of course, not really projections at all, but the actual financial results. Assume, for example, that the actual results of the project in the Example above turn out to be what was con-sidered the optimistic scenario at the outset of the project, reflected in Table 6.2. From the ex post perspective of year five there is no risk—there is only the certainty of what actually happened. If these financial results are used in a DCF model to determine the value of the intangible at the beginning of the project in year one, there are two potential biases intro-duced with respect to risk. |
Other Aspects of DCF Methods
Where the purpose of the valuation technique is to isolate the projected cash flows associated with an intangible, it may be necessary to evaluate and quantify the effect of projected future income taxes on the financial projections. Tax effects to be considered include: (i) taxes projected to be imposed on future cash flows, (ii) tax amortization benefits projected to be available to the transferee, if any, and (iii) taxes projected to be imposed on the transferor as a result of the transfer, if any.
Applications of DCF approaches require the determination of realistic and reliable financial projections, growth rates, discount rates, the useful life of the intangibles and the tax effects of the transaction. In some circumstances, where intangibles contribute to continuing cash flows beyond the period for which reasonable financial projections exist, a “terminal value” for the intangiblerelated income or cash flows may be calculated. Where terminal values are used the assumptions underlying their calculation should be clearly documented, particularly the assumed growth rates. It is important to note that a small change to one or more of the valuation parameters above can lead to huge differences in the valuation results. Therefore, it is crucial to require taxpayers to clearly state their presumptions regarding the important parameters, and, when needed, make some sensitivity analysis which presents the consequential change of valuation results of using alternative presumptions.
Technical Note: Terminal Value
| Financial forecasting is difficult, and forecasts tend to become less reliable and more cumbersome the longer the projection period. It is not necessary to estimate financial projections forever. After providing financial projections for a number of years, a “terminal value” can be used at the point of time in which the analyst expects stable growth rates. For example, if yearbyyear financial projections are estimated out to year 10, then a terminal value in year 11 is discounted at the appropriate rate—that is, divided by (1+d)11, where d is the discount rate, to determine the present value of the terminal value. The terminal value is defined by the financial projection for an item (e.g. net income) for year 11 divided by (dg), where g is the assumed growth rate of the item. The present value of the terminal value is added to the present value of the projections through year 10. Terminal values are mathematically equivalent to the financial projecions continuing in perpetuity. While this may seem at first sight to unrealistically overvalue intangibles (after all, it seems quite unlikely that intangibles will have value forever), terminal values are actually a Financial forecasting is difficult, and forecasts tend to become less reliable and more cumbersome the longer the projection period. It is not necessary to estimate financial projections forever. After providing financial projections for a number of years, a “terminal value” can be used at the point of time in which the analyst expects stable growth rates. For example, if yearbyyear financial projections are estimated out to year 10, then a terminal value in year 11 is discounted at the appropriate rate—that is, divided by (1+d)11, where d is the discount rate, to determine the present value of the terminal value. The terminal value is defined by the financial projection for an item (e.g. net income) for year 11 divided by (dg), where g is the assumed growth rate of the item. The present value of the terminal value is added to the present value of the projections through year 10. Terminal values are mathematically equivalent to the financial projections continuing in perpetuity. While this may seem at first sight to unrealistically overvalue intangibles (after all, it seems quite unlikely that intangibles will have value forever), terminal values are actually a value over time of an intangible can be reflected in “g”, the groth factor. A negative value of g, for example, can be used to reflect the expectation that competitive pressure will eventually and permanently reduce the anticipated profitability of the intangible. |
Furthermore, it is necessary to take into account the present value calculated from the perspective of both parties to the controlled transactions. The arm’s length price should fall within the range of expectations of the two parties.
Assume that the facts are the same as the example at 6.5.4.7. Assume further that:
► Company A sells the entire rights to the (potential) genetically modified seeds to Company B prior to the commencement of the R&D project, and Company B will fund the development activities. Assume that Company B has the ability to control, and the financial capacity to undertake, such financial investment risk;
► The R&D will be performed by Company A in Country A, and the intangible will solely be exploited in Country B;
► Company A is uniquely qualified to undertake the R&D because of its highly skilled workforce, and its use of valuable preexisting intangibles related to other genetically modified seed patents that it owns;
► Company B will produce and sell the seeds. Assume that the arm’s length remuneration for this activity is a 5.3 per cent markup on total costs (CGS + SGA);
► Through the functional analysis it is determined that Company A has the realistic alternative of developing the intangible itself (that is, retaining the rights to the intangible) and exploiting it in Country B. Assume further that Company B has the ability to control its investment risk; and
► It is determined that the appropriate discount rate, which reflects the market correlated risks associated with the project, is 11 per cent. This is determined with reference to the weighted average cost of capital of unrelated companies that engage in similarly risky projects.
6.5.4.13 Under these assumptions, Company A would not surrender its rights to the intangible for an amount that would make it worse off compared to its realistic alternatives. This would be reflected in the table 6.T.5 below:
Table 6.T.5
Present Value Calculation
| Year | Present Value at 11% Disc. Rt. | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 |
| Sales |
|
|
| 312 | 312 | 312 |
| R&D |
| 100 | 100 |
|
|
|
| COGS |
|
|
| 125 | 125 | 125 |
| Operating expenses (SGA) |
|
|
| 62 | 62 | 62 |
| Operating income | 77 | (100) | (100) | 125 | 125 | 125 |
| Arm’s length return to manufacturing and sales |
24 |
0 |
0 |
10 |
10 |
10 |
| Operating income attributable to intangibles |
53 |
(100) |
(100) |
115 |
115 |
115 |
The present value of operating income, discounted at an 11 per cent rate, is 77. However, of that amount, the present value of the assumed arm’s length return to manufacturing and selling, undertaken by Company B, is 24. Under these Assumptions, Company A would not surrender the rights to the intangible for less than an amount equal in present value to 53.
Technical Note: Simplifying Assumptions
| There are a number of important simplifying assumptions made for the purpose of the example:
|
It is important to consider the Assumptions and motivations that underlie particular applications of DCF approaches. For example, some valuation assumptions may reflect conservative assumptions and estimates of the value of assets reflected in a company’s balance sheet. This inherent conservatism can lead to definitions that are too narrow for transfer pricing purposes and valuation approaches that are not necessarily consistent with the arm’s length principle. Caution should be exercised in accepting valuations performed for accounting purposes as necessarily reflecting arm’s length prices or values for transfer pricing purposes without a thorough examination of the underlying assumptions. In particular, valuations of intangibles contained in PPAs (purchase price allocations) performed for accounting purposes are not determinative for transfer pricing purposes and should be used with caution and careful consideration of the underlying assumptions.
Because DCF methods are properly undertaken on an ex ante basis, and because tax audits typically occur at a later time, it is often the case that tax administrations must rely at least partially on the taxpayer’s initial DCF analysis in evaluating the arm’s length nature of a transaction involving intangibles. A relevant question is how such information can be used by tax administrations, and how this information might be supplemented as part of a factfinding exercise.
As discussed in section 6.5.4.3, one of the characteristics making the application of a DCF analysis plausible in the first place is that the intangible is susceptible to reasonably direct financial tracking. If this characteristic applies to financial projections, it is also likely to apply to the actual financial results from the intangible (that is, to ex post results). With this information, tax administrators should be able to compare anticipated profitability with actual profitability. It is important to note that there will inevitably be discrepancies between anticipated results and actual results, because after all, risk and uncertainty are real. However, the information can be used to assist in fact finding, raising questions that tax administrations may bring up with taxpayers, such as:
► How do the actual results compare to the anticipated results? Are the actual results within or outside the anticipated range of potential results (e.g. the different forecasts in the probabilityweighted financial projections in the Example above)? What explains the divergence?
► What is the company’s track record with respect to other relevant capital budgeting decisions (i.e. application of ex ante DCFs done for other intangibles)? Does the company tend to systematically outperform or underperform its estimates of anticipated profitability?
► On what basis was the initial assessment of risk undertaken, both with respect to the probabilityweighted financial projections and the determination of an appropriate discount rate? Is there documentation prepared at the time of the initial assessment?
► Is the discrepancy between anticipated results and actual results likely to continue in subsequent years (that is, years beyond the audit year)? If so why or if it is not likely to continue why not?
► Have there been unanticipated events subsequent to the initial transaction that wholly or partially explain the discrepancy?
These questions may assist the tax administration in determining whether the ex ante analysis undertaken by the taxpayer truly reflected an appropriate assessment of the anticipated profitability and risk associated with the intangible. It is important to stress that it is generally inappropriate for a taxpayer or tax authority to undertake a DCF analysis based on ex post data in order to formulate an assessment of the ex ante value of an intangible. This is because it is difficult and often subjective to determine the ex ante view of risks after the risks have already materialized. Such an analysis may constitute an inappropriate use of hindsight.
However, there are situations in which, for transactions involving intangibles whose valuation is highly uncertain at the time of the transaction, and that are susceptible to opportunistic use of information asymmetry between the taxpayer and the tax administration, ex post outcomes can provide a pointer to tax administrations as to the arm’s length nature (or otherwise) of the ex ante pricing arrangement agreed upon by the associated enterprises, and the nature of uncertainties at the time of the transaction. Section D.4 of Chapter VI of the OECD Transfer Pricing Guidelines discusses these situations at paragraphs 6.186 to 6.195, and the discussion and conclusions of that section are considered valid in the context of this Manual.
Other Applications of DCF—Using DCF to Set Ex ante Contingent Payments
A DCF can be used to determine on an ex ante basis an arm’s length contingent payment (e.g. a royalty rate on anticipated sales), which is then applied to the actual contingent payment base (e.g. the same royalty rate on actual sales). As with all methods, the application of this approach is subject to the most appropriate method rule. However, in the event that more direct comparables (e.g. comparable unrelated license rates) are not available, a less direct measure based on the anticipated profitability of the intangible might be used.
Assume that the facts are the same as in the Example at section 6.5.4.12 to 6.5.4.13. However, Company B agrees to compensate Company A on a contingent basis, based on sales. Based on the results in Table 6.T.5, a royalty rate of 36.9 per cent on anticipated sales will result in a present value of 53 to Company A. That is, a royalty rate of 36.9 per cent applied to anticipated sales of 312 in each of years three, four and five yields 115 in each of years three, four and five. Taking into account the 100 in R&D costs undertaken by A in years one and two, the present value of this income stream is 53. Accordingly, the arm’s length royalty rate is determined to be 36.9 per cent, and this rate is applied to actual sales (which may differ from anticipated sales).
Conclusion on Valuation Techniques
It is not the intention of this Manual to set out a comprehensive summary of the valuation techniques used by valuation professionals. Similarly, it is not the intention of the Manual to endorse or reject one or more sets of valuation standards used by valuation or accounting professionals or to describe in detail or endorse one or more specific valuation techniques or methods as being especially suitable for use in a transfer pricing analysis. However, where valuation techniques are applied in a manner that gives due regard to the principles outlined in this Manual, to the specific facts of the case, to sound valuation principles and practices, and with appropriate consideration of the validity of the assumptions underlying the valuation and the consistency of those assumptions with the arm’s length principle, such techniques can be useful tools in a transfer pricing analysis.
Profit Split Method (PSM)
In some circumstances a transactional PSM can be utilized to determine the arm’s length conditions for a transfer of intangibles or rights in intangibles. See further 4.6.3. In determining whether a transactional PSM should be selected as the most appropriate to the transaction, the availability of reliable and sufficient data regarding relevant profits from the transaction and factors to be used to divide them should be taken into account, as this can affect the reliability of the method.
Where a PSM is found to be the most appropriate method in a transaction involving the transfer of an intangible or rights in an intangible, the following main questions need to be addressed:
► What are the relevant profits from the transaction that will be split? This may require segmenting the parties’ profit and loss accounts to focus on the results of the transaction only;
► Will the split be based on ex ante or ex post profits? The profit split approach selected must consider which party/parties assume(s) the risks that ex post results may differ from ex ante profits; and
► What are the appropriate splitting factor(s)? This should depend on the expected contributions by each party to the transaction.
Notwithstanding the above, the transfer pricing methods most likely to prove useful in transactions involving the use or transfer of one or more intangibles are the CUP and the transactional Profit Split Methods. Valuation techniques can be useful tools to supplement the application of the abovementioned methods.
Where information regarding reliable comparable uncontrolled transactions cannot be identified, the arm’s length principle requires the use of another method to determine the price that uncontrolled parties would have agreed under comparable circumstances. In such a situation, it is important to consider the following factors:
► The functions, assets and risks of the respective parties to the transaction;
► The underlying business reasons for engaging in the transaction;
► The options realistically available to each of the parties to the transaction, including the expected future economic benefits arising from it;
► The valueadding elements embedded in the intangibles, with a specific focus on the relative profitability of the products or services to which the intangibles relate; and
► Other comparability factors such as
- local market features;
- location savings;
- assembled workforce; and
- MNE group synergies.
This chapter provides guidance on the use of cost contribution arrange-ments (CCAs) and the application of the arm’s length principle to CCAs for transfer pricing purposes. CCAs are contractual agreements between associ-ated enterprises in an MNE in which the participants share certain costs and risks in return for having a proportionate interest in the expected outcomes arising from the CCA. CCAs may also include independent parties. CCAs may be used for a broad range of purposes such as acquiring or creating tangible assets, acquiring or creating intangibles, and providing intragroup services. In relation to intangibles, the CCA will set out the interest of each participant in the intangibles to be developed. For services, the CCA will set out the services that each participant is entitled to receive. For CCAs involv-ing tangible assets, the CCA will set out the interest of each participant in the tangible assets.
A CCA will satisfy the arm’s length principle if a participant’s share of contributions to the CCA is in proportion to its share of expected benefits under the CCA.
CCAs offer significant administrative advantages. As associated enterprises perform intragroup services for other group members and also benefit from intragroup services provided by other group members, a CCA can provide a mechanism for replacing a web of separate intragroup arm’s length payments with streamlined net payments based on aggregated bene-fits and aggregated costs associated with the services. Similarly, a CCA for sharing in intangibles development can eliminate the need for complicated cross-licensing payments and replace it with a more streamlined sharing of contributions and risks, effectively achieving joint ownership of the result-ing intangible.
CCAs are used to develop future benefits such as tangible assets or intangibles, or to provide intragroup services. MNEs use CCAs to share the costs and risks of developing intangibles. These activities involve risk as the expected benefits may not be realized. For example, it is uncertain whether research and development will result in the creation of an intangible which can be exploited by the participants. Given the degree of risk involved, the sharing of costs and expected benefits may be a preferred approach. Moreover, a single associated enterprise may not have the resources or the capacity to individually carry out the development by itself. Another advan-tage of a CCA is the flexibility to make contributions in the form of tangible assets, intangibles and services. A CCA may provide that the participants are allowed the exclusive right to exploit the intangible in specific countries or regions. A participant in a CCA must be able to use its interest in the intangi-bles and thus the participants cannot be required to pay royalties for the use of intangibles developed under the CCA.
Broadly, there are two distinct categories of CCAs: arrangements for sharing in the costs and benefits of inter-company services (service shar-ing arrangements), and arrangements established for the development, production, or obtaining of intangibles or tangible assets (development arrangements, most typically intangibles development arrangements). Both types of arrangements involve the sharing of contributions and the sharing of anticipated benefits. Contributions may be in the form of cash, tangible assets, intangibles, and services. While both types of CCAs derive from the same underlying framework of sharing relative contributions in proportion to relative benefits, the motivation for these arrangements and some of the practical issues of implementing the arrangements may not be the same.
In service sharing arrangements, for example, an MNE may decide to centralize its human resources operations or information technology (IT) function in an associated enterprise so the participants will share the costs of providing these services. An advantage of intragroup service CCAs is that they provide for economies of scale to the participants, resulting in a lower proportional cost for these services than if each participant were provid-ing the services in-house. For example, an MNE may decide to have its IT services provided by a participant in a low-cost country which has an estab-lished history of being an international leader in IT. The centralization of IT provides the group with access to high quality IT services provided at a lower cost through economies of scale and potential location savings.
Some of the savings from centralizing functions may arise from preventing unnecessary duplication of functions within an MNE. The savings that arise from centralizing services provided in an associated enterprise will usually be immediate. The services that may be the subject of a CCA include management, administrative and technical services, marketing and purchas-ing of raw materials or products.
On the other hand, for example in an intangibles development CCA, participants within an MNE may decide to share in the costs, risks and potential benefits from undertaking a project to develop a new product such as a pharmaceutical product. Contributions may include patents and other existing intangibles relevant to the development, research and development services, and use of laboratories. Potential benefits might include the exclu-sive rights for each of the participants to exploit the intangible in its own market. There may be a significant time lag between development activities and the creation and exploitation of any resulting intangibles.
The key characteristic of CCAs is that the participants agree to share the proportionate costs of creating or acquiring tangible assets, creating or acquiring intangibles, or providing services. They accordingly agree to have corresponding proportionate interests in the tangible assets, intangibles or services created by the CCA. Participants should thus share the benefits in a way that is consistent with their contributions to the CCA. The predictabil-ity of the benefits of participating in CCAs varies. In some CCAs the benefits may be predictable at the outset but in other cases there may be uncertainty about the outcome. For example, it may be highly uncertain whether research and development will result in the creation of intangibles such as patents, know-how or IT software. In relation to services, a CCA may fail to provide the predicted benefits from economies of scale as a result of certain unex-pected contingencies.
The benefits for an MNE in using a CCA may include:
► Exploiting economies of scale and global corporate efficiency for commonly required services;
► Reducing duplication within an MNE;
► Increasing operational effectiveness through shared activities and synergies within the MNE;
► The sharing of risks among the CCA participants; and
► Exploiting the knowledge of the participants through the sharing of know-how and best practices.
A participant in a CCA involving intangibles is entitled to use its interest in the intangibles in accordance with its share of the intangible and cannot be required to pay a fee or royalty to use its interest in the intangible. This is the case even where legal ownership is held by one associated enter-prise on behalf of the group.
The features of CCAs are:
► Having at least two participants;
► A sharing of costs or other contributions between the partici-pants based on anticipated benefits;
► Each participant should have a reasonable expectation of benefit-ting from taking part in the arrangement (mutual benefit);
► The details of the arrangement are documented;
► The form of the CCA and the economic substance are con-sistent; and
► Arrangements exist for the departure of participants (“buy out”) from the CCA and the entry of new participants to the CCA (“buy in”).
Under the arm’s length principle, a participant in a CCA must expect to benefit from participating in the CCA. In particular, the participant must have a specific interest in the tangible assets, intangibles or services of the CCA activity and must be capable of using those tangible assets, intangibles or services. The benefit that a CCA participant expects to receive is based on an objective prediction. Nevertheless, the decision is based on an expectation because of the associated uncertainty and there is no requirement that the CCA benefits are realized as CCAs often involve risk.
In some industries, the facts and circumstances indicate that the research and development project is risky and may fail to realize benefits. For example, in the pharmaceutical industry many research and development projects may fail to result in patents and products which can be exploited commercially. Nevertheless, the pharmaceutical industry is competitive and MNEs must continue to engage in research and development to remain competitive, as the rewards flowing from the development of a new drug can be very significant. The facts and circumstances suggest that although there is a high risk that an individual pharmaceutical research and development CCA may fail to actually provide benefits to the participants, this may simply reflect the playing out of risks, and is not in itself indicative that the CCA does not satisfy the arm’s length principle.
The CCA activities may be carried out by one or more participants, or the activity may be undertaken by an associated enterprise which is not a participant. If a non-participant associated enterprise carries out the CCA activity, under the arm’s length principle it will require consideration for the work it engages in and it will not, for example, have an interest in any result-ing intangibles or tangible assets. The consideration would be determined using a functional analysis and applying the appropriate transfer pricing methods in the Manual.
To determine if a CCA satisfies the arm’s length principle, it is necessary to determine the value of each participant’s contributions. All contributions must be identified and valued generally at the time the contri-butions are made. A participant’s contributions may be in the form of cash, tangible assets, intangibles or services. The guidance provided in this Manual is to be used in valuing contributions and taking into account the mutual sharing of risks by the participants and the expected benefits that will be derived by the participants.
Contributions to a CCA may take many forms. For service shar-ing arrangements, contributions primarily consist of the performance of the services. For development CCAs, contributions typically include the performance of development activities (e.g., research and development or marketing) and often include additional contributions relevant to a develop-ment CCA such as other pre-existing intangibles that will contribute to the development of a CCA intangible.
There is a difference between current contributions and pre-existing contributions. Examples of pre-existing contributions would include the contribution of patented technology with pre-existing value that is useful towards the development of the intangible which is the subject of the CCA, or the contribution of a tangible asset that had been acquired by one of the participants some time before the commencement of a CCA. Contributions of the pre-existing value of tangible assets and intangibles should be valued using the arm’s length principle in this Manual as outlined in Chapter 6.
Current contributions, on the other hand, are ongoing contributions. An example would be the performance of research and development services directed to the objective of the CCA. Such services would be valued on the basis of the functions performed by the participants, bearing in mind the assets used or contributed and risks assumed. The current value of contribu-tions should be determined in accordance with the arm’s length principle in this Manual.
Although under the arm’s length principle all contributions should be measured at value, it may be easier for participants to measure current contributions at cost. If this approach is adopted, the value attributed to the pre-existing contributions should recover the opportunity cost of the ex ante commitment to contribute at cost resources to the CCA. For example, a contractual arrangement (i.e. the CCA) that commits an existing workforce to undertake work for the benefit of the CCA should reflect the opportunity cost of alternative R&D endeavours (e.g. the difference between the value of the next most valuable use of the research and development staff over antic-ipated research and development costs) if the research and development performed by the CCA is to be valued at cost. In making this determination it is important not to double count different contributions of value (e.g. the value of the workforce and the value of the intangible contributions).
In certain situations, current contributions may be valued at cost as a practical method of valuing the relative value of the current contribu-tions, e.g. if the difference between value and costs is insignificant. However, if contributions involve a combination of tangible assets, intangibles and services, measuring the current contributions at cost may be unreliable for valuing relative contributions and may result in non-arm’s length results. If it is claimed that the conditions of a CCA reflect those in comparable uncon-trolled transactions, and the uncontrolled transactions use cost for valuing contributions, then the comparability of all the significant economic features of the controlled and uncontrolled transactions must be examined to ensure that the CCA and the uncontrolled transactions are comparable. Another issue that needs to be considered in comparing a CCA to uncontrolled trans-actions is whether other payments are made in the uncontrolled transactions, such as milestone payments.
In some situations budgeted costs may be used for valuing contri-butions. Budgeted costs may be justified on the basis that contributions to a CCA will reflect expected benefits. There are usually differences between budgeted costs and actual costs in a CCA. A key question is therefore to determine which participants bear the risk that actual costs may be greater or lower than the budgeted costs. Arm’s length parties will usually set out how to deal with the differences between budgeted costs and actual costs. Moreover, independent parties are likely to agree on the factors that are taken into account in developing the budget and how unforeseen anomalies are to be treated. If there are significant differences between budgeted costs and actual costs, the reasons for the differences should be examined to ensure that the CCA has not been significantly altered so that the changes may not benefit some of the participants.
As stated above, all contributions by participants to a CCA must be recognized. Contributions to be considered include contributions used exclusively for the CCA and also contributions used partly in the CCA and partly in the participant’s other business activities. The apportionment of valuation of contributions may be difficult in some situations. A participant may contribute the use of its business premises including tangible assets such as plant and equipment, and the participant may also provide certain services to the CCA. The participant may also be using the business premises and tangible assets concurrently for its own business. In these circumstances the arm’s length value of the use of the business premises and the access to the plant and equipment must be determined. The appropriate valuation would be the arm’s length rent for non-exclusive possession of business premises and the use of plant and equipment. The apportionment of contributions for valuation purposes should be based on the facts and circumstances and accepted accounting principles. If material changes occur during the life of the CCA, adjustments will be required to the apportionment. How these are treated for tax purposes will depend on domestic law.
In many jurisdictions governments provide specific tax incen-tives and subsidies for research and development, which raises the issue of whether these incentives should be taken into account in determining a participant’s contributions to a research and development CCA. The alter-native approaches are to value the participant’s contribution and disregard the subsidy, or to value the contribution taking into account the effect of the subsidy. Under the former approach, the participant enjoys the full benefit of the subsidy itself. Under the latter approach the participant’s contribution is reduced by the effect of the subsidy and in effect all participants share the benefit of the participant’s subsidy. The determination under the arm’s length principle depends on whether independent enterprises would have engaged in these activities in the same circumstances.
For an associated enterprise to participate in a CCA it must have an expected and identifiable benefit. An associated enterprise’s expected benefit is important in determining the enterprise’s contribution and whether the allocation method (e.g. allocation key) used by the MNE is acceptable for the tangible assets, intangibles or services. An associated enterprise’s contribu-tions must reflect its anticipated share of expected benefits in order to satisfy the arm’s length principle. An independent enterprise would not engage in a CCA unless it is able to identify a proportionate expected benefit. The notion of expected benefit is broad and means an economic advantage that may be in the form of reduced costs, increased income or maintaining its commercial and financial position. For intragroup services one of the main advantages which would be expected from the centralized provision of services would be the cost reduction achieved through economies of scale. The analysis of the expected benefits must be based on an associated enterprise’s facts and circumstances.
“Allocation keys” are often used by MNEs as an indirect method to approximate the respective future benefits of each participant in a CCA. An allocation key may be based on factors including: turnover, gross profit, net profit, the number of employees and capital. The allocation key used is a proxy for determining the nexus between the contribution and the participant’s entitlement in expected benefits; the factors to be used must be determined on the facts and circumstances of the CCA.
The determination of a participant’s contributions should be based on objective projections of its expected benefits and the respective advan-tages that they will provide to the participants. The projections should reflect projections that would have been made by independent parties in similar circumstances. A tax authority reviewing projections should only review them on the basis of information available to the participants rather than using hindsight which would be deemed unfair. In addition, CCAs should provide for adjustments to be made to contributions during the course of the CCA on a prospective basis to reflect changes in the ratio of the expected benefits of the participants.
For some CCAs, such as for intangibles development, the benefits from the CCA will be realized in the future, and the time lag between commence-ment and realization may be significant. Accordingly, it can be difficult to measure the expected benefits flowing from research and development CCAs. Discounted income or cash flow methods are often used (see section 6.5.4). Under the arm’s length principle, a participant’s contributions to a CCA must be consistent with its share of the expected benefits. This requires a direct approximation of a participant’s expected benefits and ensuring that its relative contributions reflect its relative expected benefits. Consequently, if a participant is expected to receive a significant direct benefit if the goals of the CCA are realized, the participant should make a significant contribution.
Assume that Company A and Company B enter into a CCA in year one to develop new technology. At the inception of the CCA it is projected that the development process will take five years and that once the new technology is commercialized in year six Company A will receive 75 per cent of the benefits and Company B will receive 25 per cent of the benefits. Total development costs are 100 each year. In years one, two and three, Company A pays 75 in CCA related costs and Company B pays 25 in CCA related costs. At the end of year three, regulatory changes take place in the expected market for thenew tech-nology in Company A’s territory. As a result of those changes, it is pro-jected in year four and thereafter that Company A will derive 50 per cent of the total benefits and Company B will also derive 50 per cent of the projected benefits over the useful life of the technology being developed. As a result of the changes in total projected benefit shares, Company B should make balancing payments to Company A equal to 75 (the differ-ence between 25 per cent and 50 per cent of the total costs incurred in years one, two and three). This balancing payment should be made in year four. Also in year four and year five, based on the new benefit ratio calculation, Company A and Company B should each pay 50 of the cur-rent annual CCA related costs.
Thus, at the end of the development period, both Company A and Company B would have paid 50 per cent of the CCA development costs and each would anticipate receiving 50 per cent of the benefits of exploit-ing the new technology, as follows:
Table 7.T.1
|
| Year 1 | Year 2 | Year 3 | Balancing payment Year 4 | Year 4 | Year 5 | Total |
| Company A | 75 | 75 | 75 | (75) | 50 | 50 | 250 |
| Company B | 25 | 25 | 25 | 75 | 50 | 50 | 250 |
A CCA will fail the arm’s length test if the participant’s contri-butions are inconsistent with their share of the expected benefits. As a consequence, other participants will be receiving a corresponding excessive share of the benefits and, accordingly, an adjustment based on the facts and circumstances of the case may be required. The potential adjustments a tax authority may make in the case of a participant failing to comply with the arm’s length principle are to alter the contributions or to disregard the terms of the CCA.
A CCA will satisfy the arm’s length principle if the value of every participant’s proportionate share of the total contributions is reflected in the participant’s share of the expected benefits. If a participant’s share of over-all contributions is inconsistent with the participant’s share of the expected benefits, the contributions of at least one participant are excessive and, correspondingly, the contributions of at least one other participant will be inadequate. In this situation, under the arm’s length principle a balancing payment is required by the participants whose contributions are inadequate. The balancing payment will increase the value of contributions of the payer and decrease the value of contributions by the payee.
Participants may also make an additional contribution to a CCA if the participant’s proportionate contributions are too low when compared to its expected benefits. Adjustments may be the result of a periodic review of a participant’s contributions and its relative share of the expected bene-fits. In some cases, the need for periodic adjustments is anticipated at the commencement of the CCA.
Balancing payments may also be required by tax authorities. A tax authority may make an adjustment to remedy an identified imbalance in contributions to the CCA relative to the participant’s share of anticipated bene-fits. An adjustment may be required if a participant’s contributions in the form of tangible assets, intangibles or services were under-valued. An adjustment may also be required when a participant’s share of expected benefits is too low relative to its share of expected costs because the allocation key has failed as a proxy for expected benefits or when changes occur during the life of the CCA that would suggest the initial anticipated benefit shares have changed.
When such deficiencies are identified they may be remedied by a balancing payment. A tax authority examining a CCA and concluding that an adjustment is required may treat a participant as receiving a notional balancing payment which may result in a corresponding payment being made between the participants. Nevertheless, if a CCA has been established in good faith, tax administrations should be cautious in making adjustments, and only consider them when the participant’s relative contributions are exces-sive compared to its share of the expected benefits over several income years rather than in one income year. When required, balancing payments should be calculated to ensure that each participant’s share of the total contribu-tions over the life of the CCA is consistent with that participant’s share of the projected benefits over the useful life of the tangible assets and intangibles developed under the CCA.
If an analysis of a CCA discloses that the terms of the CCA differ from the economic reality, a tax authority may disregard some of the terms of the CCA consistent with the determination of the accurately deline-ated transaction. In addition, section 3.3.2 is relevant as to the ability of tax authorities to disregard CCA arrangements in limited circumstances.
A tax authority may conclude that a participant is unlikely to benefit from a CCA or that any expected benefits would be trivial, especially if its contributions are significant. In this case, a tax authority may conclude that the arrangement fails to comply with the arm’s length principle (since an independent enterprise would not participate in such an arrangement) and it may thus disregard the CCA.
At the time when a CCA is established, one or more participants may be required to make a payment for their share of tangible assets, intan-gibles or other contributions of pre-existing value made available to the CCA by other participants. Similarly, after a CCA is established, an associated enterprise entering the CCA as a new participant may be required to make a payment in return for acquiring an interest in the benefits that have been created under the CCA. A participant withdrawing from a CCA is required to receive a payment for its share of the value of the CCA. In addition, exist-ing participants in a CCA may either increase or decrease their involvement in a CCA. These situations are considered below.
When an associated enterprise joins a CCA, either at the commencement of the CCA or as a new participant after the CCA has been in operation, the associated enterprise may obtain an interest in contribu-tions of pre-existing value made by other participants or in the realized benefits of the CCA created by such participants. This may include, for example, intangibles, other rights and work in progress. As the new partici-pant acquires an interest in such benefits, the arm’s length principle requires the participant to make an arm’s length payment for this transfer from the other participants that created the pre-existing value. The sum payable for pre-existing benefits by a new participant on entering the CCA is called a “buy-in” payment.
The buy-in payment should be based on the arm’s length value of the rights that the new participant is acquiring and its interest in the expected benefits of the CCA. If the work of a pre-existing CCA has been fruitless and a change in approach is being considered, there may be no buy-in payment as the new participant is not acquiring an interest in tangible assets or intan-gibles, rights or work-in-progress. The new participant may also be making a contribution to the CCA in the form of intangibles or other pre-existing tangible assets. The items being contributed would have to be valued under the arm’s length principle and a balancing payment made to make up differ-ences if the buy-in payment required is greater than the value of the items being contributed by the new participant. Alternatively, if the value of the intangibles exceeds the required buy-in amount, a balancing payment will be required from the existing participants to the new participant. This may involve a netting of the buy-in payment and the balancing adjustment.
The treatment of a buy-in payment for tax purposes should be deter-mined under the domestic law and tax treaties of the participants’ countries. The payment should be treated as a payment to an independent enterprise to acquire an interest in intangibles, rights and work in progress.
When a participant leaves a CCA a “buy-out” occurs in which the departing participant sells its interest in the tangible assets, intangibles and rights under the CCA to the remaining participants. The buy-out amount should be the arm’s length value of the departing participant’s interest in the CCA at the time the participant leaves the arrangement. In some cases, the CCA’s efforts may not have resulted in any realized benefits and, consequently, the payment of consideration to the departing participant is unnecessary. The treatment of a buy-out payment for tax purposes should be determined under the domestic law and tax treaties of the participants’ countries. The payment should be treated as a payment from an independent enterprise to acquire an interest in intangibles, rights and work in progress.
When a participant leaves a CCA a “buy-out” occurs in which the departing participant sells its interest in the tangible assets, intangibles and rights under the CCA to the remaining participants. The buy-out amount should be the arm’s length value of the departing participant’s interest in the CCA at the time the participant leaves the arrangement. In some cases, the CCA’s efforts may not have resulted in any realized benefits and, consequently, the payment of consideration to the departing participant is unnecessary. The treatment of a buy-out payment for tax purposes should be determined under the domestic law and tax treaties of the participants’ countries. The payment should be treated as a payment from an independent enterprise to acquire an interest in intangibles, rights and work in progress.
When a participant leaves a CCA a “buy-out” occurs in which the departing participant sells its interest in the tangible assets, intangibles and rights under the CCA to the remaining participants. The buy-out amount should be the arm’s length value of the departing participant’s interest in the CCA at the time the participant leaves the arrangement. In some cases, the CCA’s efforts may not have resulted in any realized benefits and, consequently, the payment of consideration to the departing participant is unnecessary. The treatment of a buy-out payment for tax purposes should be determined under the domestic law and tax treaties of the participants’ countries. The payment should be treated as a payment from an independent enterprise to acquire an interest in intangibles, rights and work in progress.
When new participants join a CCA, or when existing participants leave a CCA, an adjustment to the contributions of the continuing partici-pants may be required to reflect the changes in their proportion of future anticipated benefits.
On the termination of a CCA the participants must receive their respective shares in the tangible assets, intangibles and rights acquired and developed under the CCA. If a participant surrenders its entitlements under the CCA, the other participants would be required to make a payment, following the requirements for a buy-out set out above.
CCAs should list the participants and their respective interests in order to minimize the risk of disputes over the ownership of the fruits of the CCA and disputes with tax authorities. Under a CCA the legal owner of tangible assets and intangibles may be one associated enterprise, but the CCA partici-pants have joint interests in the tangible assets and intangibles. A feature of CCAs is that the participants must have an interest in the tangible assets, intan-gibles or benefit from the services that are the subject of the CCA. In the case of intangibles, a participant must be able to use its interest in the intangibles.
In general, CCAs between associated enterprises should meet the following requirements:59
► The participants would include only enterprises expected to derive mutual and proportionate benefits from the CCA activity itself (and not just from performing part or all of that activity);
► The arrangement would specify the nature and extent of each participant’s interest in the results of the CCA activity, as well as its expected share of benefits;
► No payment other than the CCA contributions, appropriate balancing payments and buy-in payments would be made for the particular interest or rights in intangibles, tangible assets or services obtained through the CCA;
► The value of participants’ contributions would be determined in accordance with the arm’s length principle as elaborated in this Manual and, where necessary, balancing payments should be made to ensure the proportionate shares of contributions
align with the proportionate shares of expected benefits from the arrangement;
► The arrangement may specify provision for balancing payments and/or changes in the allocation of contributions prospectively after a reasonable period of time to reflect material changes
in proportionate shares of expected benefits among the par-ticipants; and
► Adjustments would be made as necessary (including the possibil-ity of buy-in and buy-out payments) upon the entrance or with-drawal of a participant and upon termination of the CCA.
OECD (2017). Transfer Pricing Guidelines for Multinational Enterprises and Tax Administrations. Paris: OECD Publishing. Available from https://doi. org/10.1787/tpg-2017-en. See para. 8.50.
Participants in a CCA should prepare documentation on the nature of the CCA, the terms of the CCA, the expected benefits and compliance with the arm’s length principle. The documentation should include infor-mation on:60
► The participants;
► Any other associated enterprises which will be involved;
► Any other associated enterprises that may be expected to benefit from the CCA;
► The activities of the CCA;
► The duration of the CCA;
► The measurement of the participants’ shares of expected benefits;
► The contributions of each participant;
► The consequences of a participant entering the CCA, leaving the CCA or of termination of the CCA; and
► Balancing payments and adjustments to the terms of the CCA to reflect changes in economic circumstances of the participants.
Ibid, see para. 8.52.
In addition, participants are encouraged to monitor the operation of a CCA and:
► Record changes to the arrangement;
► Compare projections on expected benefits with realized benefits; and
► Record the annual expenditure of the participants to the CCA, the form of cash contribution and the valuation methods used, and the consistent application of accounting principles to the participants.
| Company A and Company B are members of a multinational group. Each company performs different services (Company A performs Service 1 and Company B performs Service 2), and Company A and Company B each “consume” both services (that is, Company A receives a benefit from Service 2, and Company B receives a benefit for Service 1). Assume that the costs and value of the services are as follows: Cost to Company A Cost to Company B Total cost to group: Company A (market value): 3,600 (63% of total contributions) Contribution made by Company B consumes 15 unit of Service 1 and 10 unit of Service 2. Benefit to Company A: |
It is difficult to distinguish between a CCA and intragroup services allocated through an allocation key. The following differences between CCAs and services arrangements within an MNE group have been identified:61
EC (2012). Draft Report on Cost Contribution Arrangements on Services Not Creating Intangible Property (IP). Brussels: EC. Available from https://ec.europa.eu/ taxation_customs/system/files/2016-09/2012-09_com516_en.pdf.
Table 7.T.2
Differences Between CCAs and Services Arrangements within an MNE Group
| CCAs | Intragroup service arrangements |
| A CCA is an agreement to share costs, risks and benefits where the partici-pants contribute cash, property or services. | Intragroup services are limited to the provision and acquisition of specific services within an MNE group. |
| The service provider and the recipi-ents are all party to the one CCA. | The associated enterprise providing the services may enter into a separate agreement with each associated enter-prise. This may result in the service provider having numerous bilateral agreements for the provision of intra-group services. |
| If a participant joins or leaves a CCA, a corresponding adjustment is required to be made on the contribu-tions and the entitlements of each associated enterprise. | If an associated enterprise decides to expand a service arrangement or ter-minate the service arrangement, there is no effect on the other associated enterprises receiving the services. |
| A detailed written agreement con-taining the information set out in 7.8.3. | In some cases, written contracts may not be prepared. |
| The contributions of the participants are measured on a contribution basis. | The service recipient will be charged a service fee which will include a profit mark-up under the arm's length princi-ple for the service provider. |
| The allocation of costs under the arm's length principle must be based on each participant's expected ben-efits under the CCA. | The allocation key is designed as a proxy measure of the expected benefits that the recipient associated enterprise will receive from the services. |
In recent years the tax aspects of business restructurings under-taken by multinational enterprises (MNEs) have attracted much attention from tax authorities globally. From a transfer pricing standpoint such reorganizations require consideration of how to apply the arm´s length principle to a cross-border redeployment of functions, assets and risks within the same MNE.
There is no legal or universally accepted definition of “business restructurings”. In a transfer pricing scenario these are defined as the cross-border redeployment of functions, assets (tangible and/or intangible) and risks to which a profit/loss potential may be attached. In this respect business restructurings undertaken by MNEs should not be confused with the ordinary acquisition of a business or an ongoing concern. However, it may be common to undertake a business restructuring of the supply chain operations of an MNE following an acquisition, divestiture of a business, or in response to a changing business environment.
Common examples of business restructurings are reorganizations involving conversions of the manufacturing and/or distribution layer of an MNE such as (i) conversion of a buy-sell distributor into a sales agent or commissionaire or (ii) conversion of a fully-fledged manufacturer into a provider of manufacturing services (e.g. a contract or toll manufacturer). Business restructurings may also involve the transfer of the ownership and management of intangible property rights such as patents, trademarks, brand names etc.
As a general rule, businesses are entitled to organize their activ-ities in the way they see fit. Business restructurings undertaken in a manner consistent with the arm’s length principle are entirely appropriate. However, there may be situations in which business restructurings facilitate inappropriate income shifting through non-arm’s length pricing or through commercially irrational structures. The guidance in this Manual, including this Chapter, applies to business restructurings to ensure that they are consistent with the arm’s length principle.
The application of Article 9 of the UN Model Double Taxation Convention to business restructurings requires that the arm’s length consid-eration for a supply, acquisition or transfer of property is that which might reasonably be expected to be made under an agreement between independent parties dealing at arm’s length. As a result, a business restructuring gener-ally involves the determination of whether at arm’s length a payment would be warranted for the transfer of something of value, or for the termination or substantial renegotiation of commercial arrangements between associated enterprises, and if so what the amount of such arm’s length considera-tion would be.
The changes triggered by the implementation of a business restruc-turing can have significant effects on the allocation of profits (or losses) between the countries in which the entities of the MNE operate, regardless of whether or not tax savings are one of the motivations for the restructuring transaction. When an MNE changes its business model, the tax and legal structure of the group would generally require an alignment with the new business model.
Business restructurings increasingly affect developing countries. In recent years a number of large MNEs have either (i) transferred their manufacturing facilities into low-cost countries, e.g. where the cost of labour of a skilled workforce is lower and/or (ii) similarly moved certain distribu-tion functions and/or (iii) similarly moved valuable intangibles out of the jurisdiction where they were acquired, developed or exploited. This Chapter discusses how to determine, on a case-by-case basis, whether or not the conditions of such restructurings comply with the arm’s length principle.
In a business restructuring context, the arm’s length principle entails a comparison of the conditions (including the pricing) of a transac-tion or arrangement between associated enterprises and those which would have been agreed between independent enterprises dealing at arm’s length in similar circumstances. Where a particular transaction is a part of a broader arrangement in respect of a business restructuring, setting (as well as testing) the arm’s length consideration for that transaction requires that all the circumstances relevant to the broader arrangement are taken into account in evaluating the comparability factors that might reasonably apply under an agreement between independent parties dealing at arm’s length.
In the absence of reliable uncontrolled comparable data, an assess-ment has to be made of the consistency of the conditions of the controlled transaction with those that might reasonably be expected under an agree-ment between independent parties dealing at arm’s length.
The above-mentioned process with respect to the implementation of the arm’s length principle highlights the need for tax authorities in devel-oping countries to be alert to business restructurings and their potential consequences. As already stated in other parts of this Manual, while it is for each country to determine its own tax system, the desire to avoid double taxation has been an important factor in the very broad acceptance of the arm’s length principle internationally.
This part of the Chapter describes a typical process which may be followed when setting or reviewing transfer prices in the context of a business restructuring. This process is neither prescriptive nor exhaustive.
As a first step, it is important to characterize the transactions entered into by the associated enterprises, taking into account the business environment in which the MNE is operating. This entails carrying out the following activities:
► Identifying the scope, type (e.g. supply of goods, provision of services, licensing arrangements) and economic nature of the arrangements between the associated enterprises involved in the business restructuring;
► Performing a functional analysis of the pre- and post-business restructuring activities of associated enterprises affected by the restructuring. Such an analysis requires, as a starting point, reference to any relevant contracts, including those entered into to implement the business restructuring (e.g. contracts transfer-ring the legal ownership of intangibles and those evidencing the terms and conditions of the pre- and post-restructuring arrange-ments for the business activities affected by the restructuring) as well as an examination of risks assumed and functions per-formed by the associated enterprises; and
► Examining the consistency of the contractual terms with the outcome of the functional analysis of the associated enterprises taking part in the business restructuring, in order to determine the true nature of the transactions, including the legal, economic and tax effects thereof. It should not be automatically assumed that the contracts, though they are the starting point of any transfer pricing analysis, accurately or comprehensively capture the actual commercial or financial relations between the par-ties. The core part of such an examination is the performance of a thorough functional analysis, which is needed to identify the value-adding activities and functions performed, assets employed and risks assumed in respect of the business activities affected by the restructuring.
The selection of the most appropriate method or methodologies applicable to the transaction(s) at stake follows from the functional analysis and the accurate delineation of those transactions. As discussed in more detail below, a business restructuring is commonly implemented through a series of intertwined transactions. For instance, a business restructuring might involve transferring functions, assets and risks to a tax favourable location. This should not of itself warrant the conclusion that a non-arm’s length arrangement has been implemented.
Provided the pricing of the business restructuring itself and of the post-restructuring arrangements are consistent with what would occur under an agreement between independent parties in comparable circumstances the arm’s length principle and its requirements are met.
For example, an associated enterprise may transfer the ownership of an intangible to its foreign principal and also agree to enter into a licensing agreement with that company that allows for the enterprise to continue to use the intangible in its ongoing business operations. In determining whether the transfer of ownership is consistent with the arm’s length principle, taking into account that the transaction is part of a broader business restructuring arrangement, comparability needs to be assessed.
In practical terms, in many instances relevant third-party data are not available as the types of business restructurings commonly taking place tend to be unique to the various business models existing within MNEs. However, the lack of reliable third-party data should not lead the tax authori-ties to automatically conclude that the business restructuring as a whole does not comply with the arm’s length principle. Where such reliable uncontrolled comparable data are lacking, the consideration that might reasonably be expected in similar circumstances may be determined by taking into account the following:
► An arm’s length outcome is one that makes business sense taking into account the options realistically available for the taxpayer involved in the business restructuring;
► An independent party dealing at arm’s length would seek to protect its economic interest involved in the arrangements, or be appropriately remunerated for forgoing such interest; and
► An independent party dealing at arm’s length would compare the options realistically available in comparable transaction(s) and seek to leverage the overall value derived from the economic resources at its disposal. In certain cases, one realistically avail-able option might be not to enter into a transaction in the event that it does not make commercial sense.
A key feature in understanding the underlying commercial rationale of a business restructuring is identifying the economic benefits expected from the restructuring. For purposes of this chapter, benefits expected at the MNE level from a business restructuring may be any form of economic or commercial advantage.
To this end, a business restructuring may be triggered as a response to changes in the business environment in which the associated enterprise involved is running its activities, such as competitive pressures, market conditions or changes in the regulatory environment. In the light of such changes an MNE may decide to restructure to reduce its losses or to retain or improve its profit-making ability and/or financial strength. That is, even if an MNE’s overall profitability post-restructuring is less than its pre-restructuring profitability, such a restructuring might still be commer-cially rational in light of the MNE’s realistic alternatives in the face of the changes in the business environment.
Business restructurings may include, or may be motivated by, outsourcing. Outsourcing occurs between independent enterprises, for example in relation to inventory management and logistics, IT support, after-sales support, customer receivables management and R&D activi-ties. The underlying commercial rationale for a third party entering into an outsourcing agreement is that generally commercial advantages to the enterprise are expected from contracting out the activity, as compared with performing the activity itself. These expected commercial advantages may relate to cost reductions and/or retaining or increasing profits.
When restructuring, an MNE or one or more of the entities in the MNE may undertake a cost-benefit analysis. Should such an analysis exist and be documented (including any other financial and commercial data relevant to the restructuring) it may be helpful to determine the existence of the underlying commercial rationale triggering the restructuring.
An MNE may fragment functions across several MNE companies to achieve efficiencies by exerting group management coordination functions. For instance, it is quite common in restructuring the supply chain of highly integrated MNE groups to allocate functions such as logistics, warehousing, marketing and sales to different legal entities. As the functions generally represent the core of the supply chain of an MNE this may require coordi-nation of activities at the group management level in order for the separate activities to interact effectively.
Accordingly, when conducting a functional and risk analysis of the controlled transactions between the associated enterprises carrying out the fragmented activities, the economic benefits to the MNE expected from the activities conducted separately should be identified within the context of the broader arrangements.
Although the list below is not exhaustive, common types of restruc-turing carried out by MNEs involve:
► As concerns manufacturing activities, the conversion of fully-fledged manufacturers into contract or toll manufacturers (or vice versa);
► As regards distribution activities, the conversion of fully-fledged distributors into limited-risk distributors, sales agents or commissionaires (or vice versa); and
► As regards the management of valuable, unique intellectual property rights, the transfer of either trade or marketing intan-gibles to foreign intellectual property holding companies.
As a result, the restructured entity may end up performing limited routine functions, holding minimal assets, assuming limited risks and having a lower profit/loss potential attached to it. Profit/loss potential should be construed as “expected future profits or losses”. This notion is relevant in the valuation phase of determining an arm’s length compensation for a transfer of tangible and/or intangible assets or of an ongoing concern, or in the determination of an arm’s length indemnification for the termination or substantial renegotiation of existing arrangements.
In another form of reorganization sometimes referred to as “reverse restructuring” a cross-border redeployment of functions, assets and risks may be directed towards highly taxed jurisdictions.
Taxpayers are generally free to arrange their business operations as they see fit but tax authorities have the right to verify consistency with the arm’s length principle. Any restructuring as described above may be commercially rational. Disregarding or re-characterizing an arrangement entered into by an entity that is part of a multinational group should be the exception to the general rule of respecting the structuring as adopted by the taxpayer. See, however, 3.3.2 et seq. for a discussion of the recognition of the actual transaction.
Although a country may not have specific transfer pricing provi-sions dealing with cross-border restructurings, transactions entered into with the sole purpose of obtaining an undue tax saving could be challenged through the application of a general or a specific anti-avoidance rule (if present in the tax system of the jurisdiction concerned).
As a result, should either a domestic general or specific anti-avoidance rule be applicable to the restructuring, such rule may lead to the transaction as entered into by the taxpayer being disregarded. In such a case, there might not be room to apply any transfer pricing provision in order to set or test the arm’s length conditions of the restructuring.
Business restructurings have to comply with the arm’s length principle. This holds true both with respect to “exit scenarios” and “entry scenarios”, i.e. irrespective of whether functions, assets and risks are trans-ferred out of or into a jurisdiction.
To this end the following points warrant consideration:
► A key question is whether a transfer of functions, assets and/or risks conveys value and would be compensated at arm´s length. See Chapter 6 on intangibles in this respect; and
► Further, or alternatively, it may need to be determined whether the termination or substantial renegotiation of existing arrangements would warrant indemnification at arm’s length. The approach likely to be followed here is a two-pronged one, namely (i) an analysis of the underlying contractual arrange-ments so as to identify the content of any termination clause, and (ii) the determination of whether a third party would demand an indemnification in the event of a comparable termination or substantial renegotiation of contractual arrangements.
Some taxpayers have entered into business restructurings to contrac-tually allocate economically significant risks to a group entity, perhaps located in a low-tax jurisdiction. Based on that risk allocation, economi-cally significant risks (e.g. “key entrepreneurial risks”) might purportedly be allocated to such an entity that would be presented as a “principal” contrac-tually bearing those risks that justify the premium returns. It will be relevant to determine whether the principal has the capability to control, and actually controls, the economically significant risks allocated to it, and has the finan-cial capacity to assume those risks, consistent with the attribution to it of a return for the risks. See the discussion of risk in Chapter 3 of this Manual, particularly at section 3.4.4.21 et seq.
For example, assume that Company A was a fully-fledged manufac-turer of widgets which, among others, assumed economically significant inventory risk. During a business restructuring, Company B is set up as a principal. Under the new contractual arrangements between Company A and Company B the former is obliged to produce widgets according to the quality standards and production plan provided for by Company B. The contractual arrangements indicate that Company B is responsible for the inventory risk. However, the functional analysis shows that Company B does not in fact have any control over the inventory risk, i.e. it does not make the key decisions in relation to the production plan and has no influence over the deployment of risk mitigation strategies if, for instance, inventory levels rise because of a sales slow-down. Instead, these key decisions remain with Company A. In such a situation the accurate delineation of the transaction is such that the risk and associated consequences are appropriately assumed by Company A, i.e. the company actually controlling and managing the risk in spite of the terms of the contract allocating such risk to Company B.
In the case of a contract termination or substantial renegotiation, it should be determined whether an indemnity payment may be warranted under the arm’s length principle. At arm’s length, depending on the applicable commercial law of the country concerned, an indemnity payment may be warranted, for instance in the event a party withdraws from a contract in an unjustified and unforeseeable manner. Depending on the applicable commer-cial law, such an indemnification may, for instance, encompass the loss of future expected profitability. There is a wide variety of elements that may be taken into account by courts or other arbiters in determining whether an indemnification should be applied, for instance the nature and terms of the contractual arrangements, the circumstances of the termination or renego-tiation and/or the economic dependence of one party on another.
Therefore, where a contract between associated enterprises includes a termination clause (and assuming the terms and conditions set out in it are in fact followed upon termination), it should be determined whether such terms and conditions are arm’s length.
From a transfer pricing standpoint, another relevant factor relates to the opportunities the terminated party will be granted to obtain alterna-tive business opportunities. That is, there may be a commercial counterpart to the business restructuring. This is specifically relevant as it is frequent in practice that in a group context the affected party having its contract terminated (or substantially renegotiated) will be entering into a different agreement with the same or another affiliate within the group. Tax admin-istrations should examine the entirety of the commercial arrangements to determine whether or not a particular business restructuring transaction is at arm’s length.
The following example illustrates the application of the approach to business restructurings as outlined above. The example summarizes the indicative issues which might arise in addressing the application of the arm’s length principle to any specific business restructuring arrangement.
OpCo is a taxpayer resident in Country A operating a fully-fledged manufacturing and distribution activity of chemical components. Based on the contractual arrangements existing at the group level, OpCo has the following rights and responsibilities:
► OpCo oWwns or holds licensing rights over all the intangibles (such as patents, trademarks, and a legally protected specific “Just-in-Time” manufacturing planning know-how) that it needs to operate its manufacturing and distribution activities;
► OpCo is responsible for arranging the procurement of all raw materials (including selection of suppliers and qualification of raw materials);
► OpCo owns the inventories of raw materials, work-in-process and finished goods, assumes related inventory risk and actually performs the risk management and control functions;
► OpCo manages and controls the production planning, sets the output budget and determines the milestones within the supply chain process; and
► OpCo sells the finished goods to third-party customers in its market and to associated enterprises acting as distributors in foreign markets.
As far as financial results are concerned, OpCo has recorded relatively strong and stable profits over most of the past ten years, although they have been gradually declining over the past three years due to adverse global economic market conditions which triggered a steep increase in the input costs of production. The financial outlook for the next five years forecasts a continued decrease of profitability due to increased competition.
In the year 2000+X, the MNE of which OpCo is a member decides to enter into a restructuring of the supply chain manufacturing layer, by centralizing its management and control activities in a regional headquar-ters located in Country B and operated by the associated enterprise, Principal Co. The MNE’s top management highlights during the shareholder meeting that the underlying commercial rationale for entering into the restructuring is to achieve forecast costs savings and efficiency gains allowing the group to achieve sustained profit growth over the following five financial years.
In particular, the business restructuring arrangement requires the implementation of the following steps:
► OpCo transfers to Principal Co. by means of an outright sale arrangement all the intangible rights that it owned in relation to the products. All the license agreements under which OpCo had rights over product intangibles (including the “Just-in-Time” know-how) are terminated as part of an arrangement whereby Principal Co. will enter into similar licensing agreements with the owners of these intangibles (i.e. Principal Co. is the new licensee);
► OpCo enters into a toll manufacturing agreement with Principal Co., whereby the latter company will have a sole ownership interest and manage all the risks associated with the procure-ment of the raw materials and the inventory stock. Under the toll manufacturing agreement, OpCo will continue to use the rights related to the “Just-in-Time” manufacturing know-how on a royalty-free basis;
► Principal Co. is contractually responsible for the timing and quantity of the output to be produced by OpCo;
► Principal Co. has the right to dictate design specifications for the product, and to exert control over product quality;
► Principal Co. will pay a service fee for the manufacturing ser-vices provided by OpCo. The fee is calculated by adding a mark-up of ten per cent over the costs incurred by OpCo. Moreover, under the contract, OpCo does not bear any risk with respect to any potential profit or loss arising from the sale of the prod-uct (i.e. all the market and credit risk is purportedly shifted to Principal Co.) and has no role in determining the marketing strategy for the sale of the product;
► OpCo’s distribution agreements with associated group distribu-tors are terminated as part of an arrangement with Principal Co., whereby the latter company will enter into identical agreements with those same entities; and
► OpCo retains its distribution activity in its domestic market, for which it will now purchase finished products from Principal Co. (including products manufactured by OpCo in its toll manufac-turing function).
A suggested approach for a tax official of a developing country auditing this type of business restructuring would be to start from the transfer pricing documentation prepared by the taxpayer (see Chapter 12) and address the following questions:
► What is the accurate delineation, including the terms and effect, of the business restructuring arrangement and OpCo’s related party transactions (in this case with Principal Co.) under that arrangement?
► What are the business strategies underlying the decision to enter into such a restructuring, including a high-level identification of the expected economic benefits?
► Do the functional analyses of OpCo and Principal Co., before and after the business restructuring is implemented, accord with the changes and any difference in the terms of the contractual arrangements?
Where the actual conduct of the parties does not reflect their contrac-tual arrangements (for instance, because contrary to the contractual arrangements, OpCo’s employees continue to manage production schedules, develop quality and design specifications and manage effectively the arrange-ments with the distribution affiliates), then the actual arrangements must be determined in order to accurately delineate the transaction and from there, select the most appropriate transfer pricing method in the circumstances of the case. See Chapter 4 on the selection of the most appropriate method.
Relevant comparable data in the above example may include: (i) similar uncontrolled arrangements involving a business restructuring with the conversion of a manufacturing entity into a toll manufacturer; (ii) similar uncontrolled transfer/sales agreements of patents and trademarks or similar intangibles (including rights in similar intangibles); (iii) the terms governing the termination of uncontrolled licensing and distribution agreements, similar to those in place in the pre-restructuring controlled agreements; and (iv) uncontrolled toll manufacturing arrangements similar to the post-restructuring controlled arrangements.
Depending upon the extent of such comparable data, any other avail-able information relevant to determining whether the business restructuring makes commercial sense for both the transferor (OpCo) and the transferee (Principal Co.) should be obtained, taking into account the options realisti-cally available to each of them at arm’s length.
If reliable comparables cannot be identified, the tax authorities may still achieve an arm’s length outcome by hypothesizing the conditions that might reasonably be expected to be agreed upon between independent enter-prises dealing at arm’s length in comparable circumstances.
Most notably, an important question to be addressed entails whether any compensation should be expected between OpCo and Principal Co. if a similar agreement had been entered into by independent enterprises dealing at arm’s length in comparable circumstances.
This would entail, first of all, identifying the legal nature and economic value of the transfer of property between OpCo and Principal Co. (for example, patents, and trademarks, know-how or other intangibles, as well as tangible assets such as inventories) and, should the answer be affirma-tive, assessing whether an independent party might reasonably be expected to pay for it or to obtain compensation for supplying it.
Secondly, it would be necessary to investigate whether OpCo would, at arm’s length, be owed an indemnification for the termination of its license agreements for the use of intangibles and distribution agreements, which resulted in a substantial renegotiation of its manufacturing status.
Thirdly, as an independent party, would OpCo realistically have the option of continuing to operate under its previous arrangements, or of under-taking a different restructuring? In particular, given all the legal, commercial, economic and financial circumstances, would OpCo as an independent party have any option realistically available other than to enter into the business restructuring on the agreed terms? For instance, would OpCo as an independent party legally have any option not to terminate its existing licensing and distribution agreements? Another related question is whether the conditions for termination of the licensing agreements with OpCo are arm’s length.
Would Principal Co. as an independent party have any option realis-tically available to it other than to enter into the business restructuring on the agreed terms? Would Principal Co. have the option of entering into similar licensing, distribution and toll manufacturing arrangements without involving OpCo?
Moreover, does Principal Co. have both the decision-making capability and financial capacity to assume and manage the risks transferred to it by OpCo? Does Principal Co. actually perform such control functions in relation to its purported risks? Does Principal Co have the decision-making capability and financial capacity to assume and manage the risks associated with the ownership of the rights in the patents, trademarks and “Just-in-Time” manufacturing know-how? Does it actually perform such control functions in relation to these risks?
The answers to the above questions will inform the accurate delinea-tion of the business restructuring. Assuming that the restructuring itself is not commercially irrational, arm’s length pricing for both the restructuring itself (i.e. any transfers of value or indemnifications for the termination or substan-tial renegotiation of existing arrangements) and for the post-restructuring transactions should be able to be determined.